Version 3.0
September 2013
701P33170
®
Xerox D95/D110/D125/D136
Copier/Printer
User Guide
©2013 Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved. Xerox® and Xerox and Design® are
trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
FreeFlow®, SquareFold®, and CentreWare® are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries. Product status, build status, and/or specifications
are subject to change without notice.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, and Word are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
PANTONE® is a registered trademark of Pantone, Inc. ScanFlowStore® is a registered
trademark of Nuance Communications, Inc.
Apple®, Macintosh®, Mac OS®, and EtherTalk™ are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Elements of Apple's
Technical User Documentation used by permission from Apple Computer, Inc.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo, Acrobat Reader, Distiller, Adobe PDF
logo, Adobe PDF JobReady, Illustrator, InDesign, and Photoshop are registered trademarks
of Adobe Systems, Inc. PostScript is an Adobe registered trademark used with the Adobe
PostScript Interpreter, the Adobe page description language, and other Adobe products.
This product is not endorsed or sponsored by Adobe Systems, publisher of Adobe
Photoshop.
Fiery® and PrintMe® are registered trademarks of Electronics For Imaging, Inc. GBC® and
AdvancedPunch™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of General Binding Corporation.
HP, HPGL, HPGL/2, and HP-UX are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation.
Netscape® is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications. UNIX® is a registered
trademark of the Open Group. Mozilla Firefox™ is a trademark of Mozilla Foundation.
BR779
Table of Contents
1 Product Overview.......................................................................................1-1
Machine Components........................................................................................................1-1
Document Feeder...................................................................................................1-3
User Interface (UI)..............................................................................................................1-3
Power Source..........................................................................................................................1-5
Power On....................................................................................................................1-5
Power Off...................................................................................................................1-6
Energy Saver..........................................................................................................................1-6
Exiting the Energy Saver mode.........................................................................1-7
Print server overview...........................................................................................................1-7
Feeding and finishing devices.........................................................................................1-7
High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7), 8.5 x 11 in./A4..................1-8
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays
6/7).........................................................................................................................1-8
Interface Module (D110/D125 configurations).........................................1-9
Interface (Cooling) Module (D136 configuration)....................................1-9
GBC® AdvancedPunch™...................................................................................1-10
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 configurations)................................1-10
High Capacity Stacker........................................................................................1-12
Standard Finisher.................................................................................................1-12
Booklet Maker Finisher......................................................................................1-13
SquareFold Trimmer Module...........................................................................1-13
Standard Finisher Plus........................................................................................1-14
Third-Party Finishing Devices (D110/D125/D136
configurations)...............................................................................................1-14
2 Where to find help....................................................................................2-1
Customer documentation CD/DVD..............................................................................2-1
Print server customer documentation.........................................................................2-1
Help on the World Wide Web..........................................................................................2-1
3 Paper and other media...........................................................................3-1
Loading media in trays 1, 2, 3, and 4...........................................................................3-1
Loading paper in trays 1 and 2.........................................................................3-2
Loading paper in trays 3 and 4.........................................................................3-3
Loading tab stock in trays 3 and 4..................................................................3-4
Loading pre-drilled stock in trays 1, 2, 3, and 4..........................................3-4
Loading transparencies in trays 1-4................................................................3-5
Loading media in optional feeding devices..............................................................3-6
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
i
Table of Contents
Loading post-process media in optional finishing devices..................................3-6
Loading tab stock with the GBC AdvancedPunch.....................................3-6
4 Copy................................................................................................................4-1
Basic copy using the document feeder.......................................................................4-1
Basic copy using the document glass..........................................................................4-2
Selecting copy options for a DFA finishing device..................................................4-3
Copy tab..................................................................................................................................4-4
Reduce/Enlarge........................................................................................................4-4
Paper Supply Screen..............................................................................................4-4
2-Sided Copying (Making 2-Sided Copies)...................................................4-5
Copy Output.............................................................................................................4-5
Image Shift...............................................................................................................4-5
Original Type............................................................................................................4-5
Lighten/Darken........................................................................................................4-6
Image Quality.......................................................................................................................4-6
Original Type............................................................................................................4-6
Image Options.........................................................................................................4-6
Background Suppression......................................................................................4-7
Layout Adjustment..............................................................................................................4-7
Book Copying...........................................................................................................4-7
2-Sided Book Copying...........................................................................................4-8
Original Size..............................................................................................................4-8
Edge Erase ................................................................................................................4-8
Image Shift...............................................................................................................4-9
Image Rotation ......................................................................................................4-9
Invert Image (Mirror Image/Negative Image).......................................4-10
Original Orientation............................................................................................4-10
Repeat Image........................................................................................................4-10
Output Format....................................................................................................................4-11
Booklet Creation...................................................................................................4-11
Perfect Binding (optional).................................................................................4-12
Selecting the Perfect Binding options............................................4-13
Covers.......................................................................................................................4-15
Page Layout...........................................................................................................4-15
Poster........................................................................................................................4-16
Annotations............................................................................................................4-16
Watermark..............................................................................................................4-18
Secure Watermark...............................................................................................4-18
Tab Margin Shift...................................................................................................4-19
Face Up/Down Output.......................................................................................4-19
ii
User Guide
Table of Contents
Identification Card Copying............................................................................4-20
Folding......................................................................................................................4-20
Transparency Options........................................................................................4-20
Job Assembly tab..............................................................................................................4-21
Build Job..................................................................................................................4-21
Build Job Options.................................................................................................4-22
Sample Job.............................................................................................................4-23
Combine Original Sets........................................................................................4-23
Form Overlay..........................................................................................................4-24
Delete Outside/Delete Inside..........................................................................4-24
Stored Programming..........................................................................................4-25
5 Scan................................................................................................................5-1
Simple Scanning...................................................................................................................5-1
Simple Scan Procedure.........................................................................................5-1
Loading Documents..............................................................................................5-1
Selecting Document Features............................................................................5-1
Starting the Scan Job............................................................................................5-2
Saving the Scanned Data....................................................................................5-2
Cancelling a Scan Job...........................................................................................5-3
Preview Scanned Images of a Job...................................................................5-3
Stopping the Scan Job..........................................................................................5-3
Scan Settings............................................................................................................5-3
Scan Settings.........................................................................................................................5-4
Resolution..................................................................................................................5-4
Lighten/Darken........................................................................................................5-4
Original Orientation...............................................................................................5-5
Original Size .............................................................................................................5-5
E-mail........................................................................................................................................5-5
Address Book............................................................................................................5-6
Adding E-mail Recipients:....................................................................................5-6
Removing E-mail Recipients...............................................................................5-6
Subject........................................................................................................................5-6
Message Contents..................................................................................................5-6
Preview Scanned Image......................................................................................5-7
Selecting an Output Color...................................................................................5-7
Scan Both Sides of a Document.......................................................................5-7
Original Type............................................................................................................5-8
Scan Presets..............................................................................................................5-8
Network Scanning................................................................................................................5-9
Preview Scanned Images of a Job...................................................................5-9
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
iii
Table of Contents
Selecting an Output Color...................................................................................5-9
Scan Both Sides of a Document.......................................................................5-9
Original Type..........................................................................................................5-10
Scan Presets...........................................................................................................5-10
Scan to PC............................................................................................................................5-11
Transfer Protocol..................................................................................................5-11
Address Book.........................................................................................................5-11
Browse Network for PC......................................................................................5-11
Specify Destination.............................................................................................5-12
Scan Presets...........................................................................................................5-12
Store to Folder....................................................................................................................5-13
Selecting an Output Color................................................................................5-13
Scan Both Sides of a Document....................................................................5-13
Original Type..........................................................................................................5-14
Preview Scanned Images of a Job................................................................5-14
Store to USB........................................................................................................................5-14
Using a USB Storage Device............................................................................5-15
Save using the USB Memory Device (optional).......................................5-15
Removing the USB Device................................................................................5-16
Display Details of Storage in USB.................................................................5-16
Preview Scanned Images of a Job................................................................5-16
Selecting an Output Color................................................................................5-16
Scan Both Sides of a Document....................................................................5-17
Original Type..........................................................................................................5-17
File Format..............................................................................................................5-17
Send to Folder.....................................................................................................................5-18
Scan To.....................................................................................................................5-18
From..........................................................................................................................5-18
Subject......................................................................................................................5-19
Message...................................................................................................................5-19
Selecting an Output Color................................................................................5-19
Scan Both Sides of a Document....................................................................5-19
Preview Scanned Image....................................................................................5-20
Web Services for Devices (WSD)..................................................................................5-20
How to store to WSD..........................................................................................5-20
WSD Starting a Scan Job..................................................................................5-21
WSD Storing Data from a Network Computer.........................................5-21
Advanced Settings tab....................................................................................................5-21
Image Options......................................................................................................5-22
Image Enhancement..........................................................................................5-22
iv
User Guide
Table of Contents
Resolution...............................................................................................................5-23
Quality/File Size....................................................................................................5-23
Photographs...........................................................................................................5-23
Shadow Suppression...........................................................................................5-24
Color Space.............................................................................................................5-24
Layout Adjustment tab...................................................................................................5-24
Original Orientation............................................................................................5-24
Original Size ..........................................................................................................5-25
Edge Erase...............................................................................................................5-25
Book Scanning.......................................................................................................5-26
Reduce/Enlarge.....................................................................................................5-26
Filing Options......................................................................................................................5-26
File Name................................................................................................................5-26
File Format..............................................................................................................5-27
Read Receipts........................................................................................................5-27
File Name Conflict...............................................................................................5-28
Email Options tab..............................................................................................................5-28
File Name................................................................................................................5-28
File Format..............................................................................................................5-28
Reply to....................................................................................................................5-29
Read Receipts for Email.....................................................................................5-29
6 Send from Folder.......................................................................................6-1
Folder Operating Procedure.............................................................................................6-1
Selecting a Folder.................................................................................................................6-1
Checking files in Copy & Print Job.................................................................................6-2
Deleting Files in Copy & Print Jobs................................................................................6-2
Copying/Moving Files in Copy & Print Jobs...............................................................6-2
Copy.............................................................................................................................6-3
Move............................................................................................................................6-3
Editing Files............................................................................................................................6-3
Delete Pages.............................................................................................................6-3
Insert Separators....................................................................................................6-4
Chapter Start and Insert File.............................................................................6-4
Edit List and Delete Pages...................................................................................6-4
Merging/Batch Printing Files in Copy & Print Jobs.................................................6-4
File Details.................................................................................................................6-5
Merge..........................................................................................................................6-5
Merge and Print.......................................................................................................6-5
Separators.................................................................................................................6-6
Covers..........................................................................................................................6-6
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
v
Table of Contents
Watermark.................................................................................................................6-6
File Name...................................................................................................................6-7
Output.........................................................................................................................6-7
Annotations..............................................................................................................6-7
Secure Watermark..................................................................................................6-8
Printing Files in Copy & Print Jobs.................................................................................6-8
File Details.................................................................................................................6-8
Output.........................................................................................................................6-9
Covers..........................................................................................................................6-9
Folding.........................................................................................................................6-9
2 Sided Printing.....................................................................................................6-10
Image Shift............................................................................................................6-10
Booklet Creation...................................................................................................6-10
Annotations............................................................................................................6-11
Watermark..............................................................................................................6-11
Face Up/Down Output.......................................................................................6-12
Secure Watermark...............................................................................................6-12
Add Tab Stock........................................................................................................6-12
Selecting a folder under Scan & Other Jobs...........................................................6-13
Checking/Operating Files in Scan & Other Jobs....................................................6-13
Checking File Details in Scan & Other Jobs.............................................................6-14
Printing Files in Scan & Other Jobs.............................................................................6-14
Configuring/Starting Job Flow.....................................................................................6-14
Link Job Flow Sheet to Folder..........................................................................6-15
Job Flow Restrictions..........................................................................................6-15
Making Backups of Files in Folders.............................................................................6-15
Setting a Password..............................................................................................6-15
7 Job Flow........................................................................................................7-1
Job Flow Procedures............................................................................................................7-2
Creating a Job Flow Sheet..................................................................................7-2
Linking a Job Flow Sheet with a Mailbox......................................................7-3
Starting a Job Flow Manually ...........................................................................7-5
Job Flow Sheet Filtering.......................................................................................7-5
Confirming/Changing Job Flow .......................................................................7-5
8 Stored Programming................................................................................8-1
Storing a Program................................................................................................................8-1
Deleting Stored Programs.................................................................................................8-3
Naming/Renaming a Stored Program.........................................................................8-3
Stored Program icons.........................................................................................................8-3
vi
User Guide
Table of Contents
Calling a Stored Program..................................................................................................8-4
9 Media Print - Text......................................................................................9-1
Overview..................................................................................................................................9-1
Supported file formats..........................................................................................9-1
Notes and Restrictions..........................................................................................9-2
Selecting media files...........................................................................................................9-2
Inserting USB Memory Device.......................................................................................9-3
Setting the Printing Options............................................................................................9-3
Media Print - Text printing options..................................................................9-3
Index Print.................................................................................................................9-4
10 Web Applications.................................................................................10-1
Web Application Overview.............................................................................................10-1
Accessing Using Buttons Registered on the Services Home window...........10-1
11 Computer operations..........................................................................11-1
Network Printing................................................................................................................11-1
Printing with the PS print drivers...................................................................11-1
Printing with the PCL print drivers.................................................................11-1
Copying a job with tabs..................................................................................................11-2
Network tab printing........................................................................................................11-3
Network printing on tabs using the PS print drivers..............................11-3
Network printing on tabs using the PCL print drivers............................11-3
E-mail print...........................................................................................................................11-4
Sending e-mails....................................................................................................11-4
Importing scanned data................................................................................................11-5
Importing from a TWAIN-compatible application.................................11-5
Changing network scan driver settings..........................................11-6
Configure the display method for the scanner name..............11-6
Configure the import method for scanned
documents..........................................................................................11-6
12 Job Status................................................................................................12-1
Job Status overview..........................................................................................................12-1
Active Jobs...........................................................................................................................12-1
Completed Jobs..................................................................................................................12-2
Secure Print Jobs & More tab........................................................................................12-2
Secure Print.............................................................................................................12-2
Sample Set..............................................................................................................12-3
Delayed Print.........................................................................................................12-3
Charge Print...........................................................................................................12-4
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
vii
Table of Contents
13 Machine Status.....................................................................................13-1
Machine Status..................................................................................................................13-1
Machine Information tab..............................................................................................13-1
Faults tab..............................................................................................................................13-3
Supplies tab.........................................................................................................................13-3
Billing Information tab....................................................................................................13-4
Accessing Billing Information.........................................................................13-4
Billing meters/usage counters.........................................................................13-4
Usage Counters.......................................................................................13-4
User Account Billing Information....................................................13-5
Tools tab................................................................................................................................13-6
Changing the paper tray attributes..............................................................13-6
14 Maintenance..........................................................................................14-1
Cleaning the machine ....................................................................................................14-1
Cleaning the exterior..........................................................................................14-2
Cleaning the document cover and glass....................................................14-2
Cleaning the document feeder rollers.........................................................14-5
Cleaning the Fuser Stripper Fingers..............................................................14-6
Replacing consumable supplies...................................................................................14-8
Ordering supplies.................................................................................................14-8
Checking the status of CRUs...........................................................................14-9
Replacing the toner cartridge.........................................................................14-9
Replacing the toner waste container........................................................14-12
15 Problem solving.....................................................................................15-1
Paper jams............................................................................................................................15-1
Information about paper jams......................................................................15-1
Document feeder jams......................................................................................15-2
Document jams under the document feeder belt..................................15-4
Lower left cover jams..........................................................................................15-6
Paper jams in the Bypass (Tray 5).................................................................15-7
Envelope jams in the Bypass tray.....................................................15-8
Paper jams in Trays 1-4.....................................................................................15-9
Paper jams in transport unit 4.....................................................................15-10
Paper jams in duplex module 3...................................................................15-11
Paper jams inside the main unit..................................................................15-13
Fault codes........................................................................................................................15-16
Machine troubleshooting............................................................................................15-28
Basic troubleshooting......................................................................................15-28
Image quality problems.................................................................................15-32
viii
User Guide
Table of Contents
Image is not what was expected..................................................15-36
Copy troubleshooting......................................................................................15-37
Unable to copy......................................................................................15-38
The copy result is not what was expected.................................15-39
Print troubleshooting.......................................................................................15-41
Unable to print......................................................................................15-42
The printed result is not what was expected............................15-44
Scan troubleshooting.......................................................................................15-45
Unable to scan with the machine.................................................15-46
Unable to import the scanned document into the
computer...........................................................................................15-47
Unable to send the scanned document over the network
(FTP/SMB)........................................................................................15-48
Problems with sending Email..........................................................15-49
16 Specifications........................................................................................16-1
D95 Copy specifications.................................................................................................16-1
D110/D125 Copy specifications.................................................................................16-3
D136 Copy specifications..............................................................................................16-5
Print specifications............................................................................................................16-7
Scan specifications...........................................................................................................16-8
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) specifications...........................16-9
17 High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7), 8.5 x 11
in./A4..........................................................................................................17-1
Loading media into the HCF (Trays 6 and 7).........................................................17-2
Problem solving..................................................................................................................17-3
Paper jams in Trays 6/7 (HCF)........................................................................17-3
Paper jams inside the HCF unit......................................................................17-4
Paper jams inside lower left cover...................................................17-5
Paper jams at lever 1a and knob 1c................................................17-6
Paper jams at lever 1b and knob 1c................................................17-8
Paper jams at lever 1d and knob 1c................................................17-9
Fault codes...........................................................................................................17-10
Trays 6/7 (HCF) specifications...................................................................................17-11
18 Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays
(Trays 6/7)................................................................................................18-1
Postcard bracket.................................................................................................................18-2
Using the Postcard bracket..............................................................................18-2
Loading media in the 1 or 2-Tray OHCF..................................................................18-4
Loading paper in the OHCF (1 or 2 Trays).................................................18-4
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
ix
Table of Contents
Loading tabs in the OHCF (1 or 2 Trays)....................................................18-4
Loading transparencies in the OHCF (1 or 2 Trays)...............................18-5
Loading pre-drilled stock into the OHCF (1 or 2 Trays) for 1-sided
print jobs...........................................................................................................18-6
Loading pre-drilled stock into the OHCF (1 or 2 Trays) for 2-sided
print jobs...........................................................................................................18-7
Skew adjustment levers..................................................................................................18-8
OHCF problem solving.....................................................................................................18-9
Clearing OHCF jams............................................................................................18-9
Paper jams inside the OHCF trays.................................................18-10
OHCF paper jams at lever 1a and knob 1c................................18-10
OHCF paper jams at lever 1b and knob 1c................................18-11
OHCF paper jams at lever 1d and knob 1c................................18-12
OHCF fault codes...............................................................................................18-14
OHCF specifications.......................................................................................................18-22
19 Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module............................19-1
Module overview................................................................................................................19-3
Control panel.........................................................................................................19-3
Paper path..............................................................................................................19-4
Paper curl settings on the module..............................................................................19-4
Preset decurler settings.....................................................................................19-4
Manual decurler buttons...................................................................................19-4
Problem solving..................................................................................................................19-5
Clearing jams.........................................................................................................19-5
Paper jams at lever 1a..........................................................................19-5
Paper jams at lever 2a..........................................................................19-6
Paper jams at lever 2b..........................................................................19-8
Fault codes..............................................................................................................19-9
20 High Capacity Stacker (HCS)...........................................................20-1
Overview................................................................................................................................20-1
Identifying the components...........................................................................20-2
Control panel.........................................................................................................20-3
HCS top tray...........................................................................................................20-3
Unloading the Stacker Tray...........................................................................................20-4
Problem solving..................................................................................................................20-5
General problems.................................................................................................20-5
Jam clearance........................................................................................................20-5
HCS entrance jams (E1, E2, and E3)...............................................20-5
HCS transport jams (E4, E5, and E6)...............................................20-6
HCS top tray jam (E7)...........................................................................20-7
x
User Guide
Table of Contents
HCS exit jam (E8)....................................................................................20-8
Hints and tips for using the HCS....................................................................20-9
Loss of power......................................................................................................20-10
Fault codes...........................................................................................................20-10
Specifications...................................................................................................................20-25
21 Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated
controller).................................................................................................21-1
Binder components..........................................................................................................21-3
External components..........................................................................................21-3
Cover inserter.........................................................................................................21-5
Internal components..........................................................................................21-6
Binder control panel............................................................................................21-7
Binder circuit breaker..........................................................................................21-8
Book binding path.............................................................................................................21-9
Bypass path............................................................................................................21-9
Standard path....................................................................................................21-10
Cover inserter path...........................................................................................21-11
Power on/off.....................................................................................................................21-12
Power Saver mode.............................................................................................21-12
Loading media in the cover inserter tray..............................................................21-13
Removing books from the binder.............................................................................21-14
Using the Perfect Binder..............................................................................................21-14
Perfect Binder hints and tips.........................................................................21-15
Copy mode...........................................................................................................21-15
Selecting the Perfect Binding options..........................................21-17
Manual mode.....................................................................................................21-18
Print mode............................................................................................................21-19
Maintenance....................................................................................................................21-20
Cleaning the binder..........................................................................................21-20
Empty the trimmer waste tray.....................................................................21-20
Adhesive filling tray..........................................................................................21-21
Replenishing the adhesive filling tray..........................................21-22
Binder problem solving.................................................................................................21-22
Paper jams in areas E1 and E2....................................................................21-22
Paper jams in area E3......................................................................................21-24
Paper jams in area E4......................................................................................21-25
Paper jams in areas E5 and E6....................................................................21-25
General problems..............................................................................................21-27
Power interruption during operation............................................21-27
Adjusting the printed image and trim.........................................21-28
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
xi
Table of Contents
Fault codes...........................................................................................................21-28
Paper size and trim recommendations for perfect bound books................21-32
Binder specifications.....................................................................................................21-32
22 Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher..................................................22-1
Manual decurling feature on the finisher................................................................22-3
Folding feature...................................................................................................................22-4
Fold types................................................................................................................22-4
Loading paper/tabs in Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter)..................................22-6
Maintenance.......................................................................................................................22-7
Standard/Booklet Maker consumable supplies........................................22-7
Replace the standard staple cartridge........................................................22-7
Replace the booklet staple cartridge............................................................22-9
Replacing the Staple Waste Container on the finisher......................22-10
Empty the Punch Waste Container............................................................22-12
Finisher problem solving..............................................................................................22-13
Paper jams in Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter)...................................22-14
Paper jams at lever 1a and knob 1c..........................................................22-15
Paper jams at lever 1d.....................................................................................22-16
Paper jams at lever 1b.....................................................................................22-17
Paper jams at lever 3b and 3d.....................................................................22-18
Paper jams at lever 3e and knob 3c...........................................................22-19
Paper jams at lever 3g and knob 3f...........................................................22-20
Paper jams at lever 4b and knob 3a..........................................................22-21
Paper jams at lever 2a and knob 3a..........................................................22-22
Paper jams at lever 2b and knob 2c..........................................................22-23
Paper jams at 2c, 2e, 2f, and 2d..................................................................22-24
Paper jams at 2d and lever 2g.....................................................................22-25
Paper jams at unit 4 and knob 4a..............................................................22-26
Paper jams at finisher top tray....................................................................22-27
Paper jams at finisher stacker tray.............................................................22-28
Paper jams at the optional booklet maker tray....................................22-29
Stapler faults.......................................................................................................22-30
Staple jams in the standard staple cartridge...........................22-30
Staple jams in the booklet maker cartridge..............................22-32
Reinserting the standard staple cartridge...............................................22-34
Fault codes...........................................................................................................22-36
Specifications...................................................................................................................22-47
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher...............................................................22-47
Optional C/Z Folder..........................................................................................22-50
xii
User Guide
Table of Contents
23 SquareFold Trimmer Module...........................................................23-1
Overview................................................................................................................................23-1
Identifying the components.........................................................................................23-2
Main components................................................................................................23-2
Paper path..............................................................................................................23-3
Control panel.........................................................................................................23-4
Square Fold feature..........................................................................................................23-4
Square fold options.............................................................................................23-5
Accessing the Square Fold options...............................................................23-6
Accessing the Square Fold options for network print
jobs.........................................................................................................23-6
Accessing the Square Fold options for copy jobs.......................23-7
Trimmer feature.................................................................................................................23-7
Trimmer options...................................................................................................23-7
Trim guidelines......................................................................................................23-9
Accessing the Trimmer options...................................................................23-10
Accessing the Trimmer options for network print
jobs......................................................................................................23-10
Accessing the Trimmer options for copy jobs...........................23-10
Hints and tips...................................................................................................................23-11
Printing full-page images on booklets......................................................23-11
Follow these tips................................................................................................23-12
Problem solving...............................................................................................................23-12
Jam clearance.....................................................................................................23-12
Clearing jams.........................................................................................23-13
Clearing E1/E2 jams............................................................................23-13
Clearing E3 jams..................................................................................23-15
Fault codes...........................................................................................................23-16
Technical data..................................................................................................................23-26
Specifications......................................................................................................23-26
24 Standard Finisher Plus........................................................................24-1
Overview................................................................................................................................24-1
Finisher Module..................................................................................................................24-2
Finisher Module main components..............................................................24-2
Folding feature......................................................................................................24-3
Fold types...................................................................................................24-4
Loading paper/tabs in Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter).....................24-5
Finishing Transport...........................................................................................................24-6
Finishing Transport main components........................................................24-6
Finishing Transport status indicators...........................................................24-7
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
xiii
Table of Contents
Standard Finisher Plus maintenance.........................................................................24-8
Standard Finisher Plus consumable supplies............................................24-8
Replace the standard staple cartridge........................................................24-8
Replacing the Staple Waste Container on the finisher......................24-10
Empty the Punch Waste Container............................................................24-12
Problem solving...............................................................................................................24-13
Paper jams in the Finisher Module.............................................................24-13
Paper jams in Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter)......................24-13
Paper jams inside the finisher left cover.....................................24-14
Paper jams inside the finisher right cover..................................24-17
Paper jams at the optional C/Z Folder.........................................24-22
Paper jams at the finisher output area.......................................24-29
Paper jams in the Finishing Transport......................................................24-30
Paper jams in area 1...........................................................................24-30
Paper jams in area 2...........................................................................24-32
Paper jams in area 3...........................................................................24-33
Paper jams in area 4...........................................................................24-34
Stapler faults.......................................................................................................24-35
Staple jams in the standard staple cartridge...........................24-35
Standard Finisher Plus fault codes.............................................................24-37
Finisher Module fault codes.............................................................24-37
Finishing Transport fault codes......................................................24-38
Third-party DFA fault codes.............................................................24-42
Specifications...................................................................................................................24-44
Finisher Module specifications....................................................................24-44
Optional C/Z Folder.............................................................................24-47
Finishing Transport specifications..............................................................24-47
xiv
User Guide
1
Product Overview
Machine Components
1 Optional High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7)
This optional feeding device adds an additional 2000 sheet capacity of letter-size (8.5
x 11 in.)/A4 media.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
1-1
Product Overview
2 Bypass tray (Tray 5)
The Bypass tray, also called Tray 5, accommodates all types of stock in various size
and weight ranges. The tray holds a maximum of 250 sheets of 20 lb./75 gsm bond
paper. This tray is often used to load nonstandard paper, such as heavy stock or other
special media, which cannot be loaded in trays 1-4.
3 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
The document feeder automatically feeds 1 and 2-sided original documents to the
document glass for copying or scanning.
4 Document cover
Holds a document in place on the document glass.
5 Document glass
Place a document here in order to copy it.
6 User Interface (UI)
The User Interface (UI) consists of the control panel and the touch screen.
7 Optional Standard Finisher
This optional finishing device provides a wide range of finishing options including
stapling and folding.
8 Front cover
Open this cover to clear paper jams and to replace the toner waste container.
9 Left cover
Open this cover to replace the toner cartridge.
10 Trays 1-4
Contains the media used for copy or print output.
11 Lower left cover
Open this cover to access the inside of the machine to remove jammed paper.
12 Front cover on optional HCF
Open this cover to access the bottom left cover of the machine to remove jammed
paper.
1-2
User Guide
Product Overview
Document Feeder
Tips for using the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF):
• A maximum of 250 documents can be scanned at one time by using the document
feeder.
• Mixed-size original documents can be used; however, the top left corners of the
original documents must be aligned in the document handler.
• Remove any staples and paper clips from the documents before loading them in the
document feeder.
• For best output, ensure that the documents are in good condition.
User Interface (UI)
The User Interface is the main area where options are selected, procedures are completed,
and printer information can be viewed.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
1-3
Product Overview
Number
Component
Function
1
Touch Screen
Displays messages required for operation and buttons for
features. You can directly touch the screen to instruct
operations and to set features.
2
Machine Status
Use this button to check the machine status, meters, the
status of the consumables, and to print reports.
3
Job Status
Use this button to check or cancel the current job, to check
or print stored jobs, or to check completed jobs.
4
Services Home
Press this button to display the main window, which is called
Services Home. The Services Home window, by default, is
where the UI displays the available service buttons such
as Copy, E-Mail, Network Scanning, Store to Folder, and
Send from Folder. The system administrator can change
the Services Home window to display a specific feature
(such as Copy); refer to the System Administration Guide
for more information.
5
Services
This button lights when the main power is on.
6
Help
Displays the Help System
7
Dial Pause
Not used
8
C
Clear the last entry
1-4
User Guide
Product Overview
Number
Component
Function
9
Key Pad
Used to enter alpha/numeric data
10
Interrupt button
Use this button to suspend a copy or print job in progress
and have the machine stop to process another job. During
the Interrupt mode, the Interrupt button lights. Pressing
the Interrupt button again exits the Interrupt mode and
resumes the suspended job.
11
Start
Use this button to perform certain functions, such as
scanning a document.
12
Stop
Use this button to pause the current job or communication.
13
Clear All
Select this button to return all selections to the default
values. The machine returns to the same state as when it
is powered on.
14
Energy Saver button When the machine is not being used for a while, it enters
the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption.
When the Energy Saver mode is active, the Energy Saver
button lights. Press this button to exit the Energy Saver
mode.
15
Log In/Log Out
This button lights when a user is logged in through the
System Administration mode, the Authentication mode,
or the Accounting mode. Press this button to display the
User ID entry screen for entering the System Administration
mode, the Authentication mode, or the Accounting mode.
Also press this button to exit these modes.
16
Services buttons
Use these options to enter the various service windows to
make feature selections. This is where you will find the
Copy, Network Scanning, and Store to USB options among
others.
17
Login field
This area displays the currently logged in user. Select this
option to login as the System Administration,
Authentication, or Accounting modes.
18
Message field
This area displays messages to the user.
Power Source
The machine is provided with the power switch and the main power switch.
Power On
After turning the power on, the machine takes approximately 3 minutes to warm up
before you can start making copies.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
1-5
Product Overview
1. Open the cover.
2. Press the power switch to the On position.
The Please wait... message indicates that the machine is warming up. The machine
cannot be used while it is warming up.
Power Off
Before switching the power off, ensure all job processing, copy and printing is completed
and ensure that the Data indicator is not lit up.
1. Press the power switch on top of the printer to the upright position (I). This will power
off the printer.
2. To continue to power off the Main Power, ensure that the touch screen is blank and
the Energy Saver button is not lit up.
3. Open the front cover.
4. Press the main power switch to the zero [0] position to switch the main power off.
The Main Power indicator on the control panel will turn off.
5. Close the front cover.
Energy Saver
Note
The terms Power Saver and Energy Saver are used synonymously.
The Energy Saver feature has two modes:
• Low Power: After remaining inactive for a preset time period, the machine enters the
Low Power mode.
• Sleep Mode: After entering Low Power and remaining inactive for another preset
time period, the machine enters the Sleep mode.
1-6
User Guide
Product Overview
Here are two examples:
• If the Low Power Mode is set to 15 minutes and the Sleep Mode is set to 60 minutes,
the Sleep Mode activates after 60 minutes of total inactivity and not 60 minutes
after the Low Power Mode begins.
• If the Low Power Mode is set to 15 minutes and the Sleep mode is set to 20 minutes,
the Sleep Mode activates 5 minutes after the Low Power Mode begins.
When logged on as administrator, the time periods for both Low Power and Sleep Mode
may be set from Tools > System Settings > Common Service Settings > Energy
Saver Settings.
Exiting the Energy Saver mode
1. Press Energy Saver, or
2. Send a print job to the machine or make copies at the machine.
Print server overview
One of the following print servers may be available and used with your machine:
• Xerox® FreeFlow® Print Server
• Xerox® EX Print Server, Powered by Fiery®
Note
For detailed information on your specific print server, refer to the customer
documentation that was delivered with it.
Feeding and finishing devices
Available with your machine is a variety of optional feeding and finishing devices. These
devices are briefly discussed on the following pages along with where to find specific
information on each device.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
1-7
Product Overview
High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7), 8.5 x 11 in./A4
The two-tray High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7) provides an extra 4,000 sheet
capacity of either 8.5 x 11 in. or A4 paper. Each tray holds 2000 sheets (from 16 lb. Bond
to 80 lb. Cover/52 gsm to 216 gsm).
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
The Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF) is available in a 1-tray or 2-tray option. The
OHCF feeds a variety of stock sizes, including standard and oversized stock up to 13 x
19.2 in./330.2 x 488 mm. Each tray holds 2,000 sheets.
1-8
User Guide
Product Overview
Note
The 1-Tray OHCF is not available with D136 configurations.
Interface Module (D110/D125 configurations)
The Interface Module is required with many finishing devices. It enables communication
and provides a paper path between the print engine and any attached finishing device
or devices.
Note
The Interface Module is not available with the D95 Copier/Printer configuration.
Interface (Cooling) Module (D136 configuration)
The Interface Cooling Module is required for all D136 configurations. It is similar in
function to the Interface Module (for D110/D125 configurations), but it also aids in
cooling the outgoing printed media through the use of additional fans and associated
duct work.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
1-9
Product Overview
GBC® AdvancedPunch™
The GBC AdvancedPunch may be attached to a variety of optional finishing accessories.
The GBC AdvancedPunch provides another level of finishing options to your output by
allowing you to punch holes in 8.5 x 11 in./A4 documents, which support a variety of
binding styles. Punch types include 19-hole to a maximum of 32-hole for 8.5 x 11 in.
media. A4 media supports punch types 21-hole to a maximum of 47-hole.
Note
The GBC AdvancedPunch is shown here with either the required Interface Module or
the Interface Cooling Module (depends on your machine configuration); it is also shown
with the optional Booklet Maker Finisher and the optional C/Z Folder.
Important
The D110/D125 configurations require the Interface Module, while the D136
configuration requires the Interface Cooling Module.The Interface Module is not available
with the D95 Copier/Printer configuration.
Information on this device can be found on the customer documentation CD that came
with the accessory, or documentation can be downloaded from www.xerox.com. From
the website, enter the machine product name in the Search field and select the User
Documentation link.
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 configurations)
Important
The Perfect Binder is available with the D110, D125, and D136 Copier/Printer. The
copier/printer must use the integrated controller and not a separate print server.
1-10
User Guide
Product Overview
The Perfect Binder is an optional finishing device that takes the printed output and binds
it into a finished book; a front and back cover is included with the bound output.
Note
Depending on your machine configuration, the Perfect Binder requires either the Interface
Module or the Interface Cooling Module.The Perfect Binder also requires an optional
finisher, such as High Capacity Stacker, Standard Finisher, or Booklet Maker Finisher.
Important
The D110/D125 configurations require the Interface Module, while the D136
configuration requires the Interface Cooling Module.The Interface Module is not available
with the D95 Copier/Printer configuration.
The Perfect Binder can be used in three modes:
• Manual mode: Load the preprinted book block into the Perfect Binder compiler tray
and covers into Tray 9. Program the Perfect Binder settings using the copier/printer
UI and press Start to complete the job.
• Copy mode: Copy the book block and cover. Program the Perfect Binder settings using
the copier/printer UI and press Start to complete the job.
• Print mode: From the user’s computer, the book block and cover are programmed
using the print driver. Information and steps for submitting the job are available
through the print driver help screens.
Tip
For optimum efficiency with a minimal amount of time, refer to the Perfect Binder
chapter in this guide before using it.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
1-11
Product Overview
High Capacity Stacker
The High Capacity Stacker (HCS) is an optional finishing device that provides stacking
and offsetting capabilities for output to a Stacker Tray.
Note
The Interface Module is not available with the D95 Copier/Printer configuration.
Standard Finisher
This finisher provides a wide range of finishing/folding options.
Note
If attached to a D136 configuration, the Standard Finisher requires the Interface Cooling
Module.
1-12
User Guide
Product Overview
Booklet Maker Finisher
This finisher provides a wide range of finishing/folding options.
Note
If attached to a D136 configuration, the Booklet Maker Finisher requires the Interface
Cooling Module.
SquareFold Trimmer Module
The SquareFold Trimmer Module is an optional finishing device that is used in conjunction
with a finishing device that contains a booklet maker.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
1-13
Product Overview
Standard Finisher Plus
The Standard Finisher Plus serves as an interface to transfer paper between the print
engine and any third-party, Document Finishing Architecture (DFA) device attached to
the machine.
Note
The Standard Finisher Plus requires the either the Interface Module (for D110/D125
configurations) or the Interface Cooling Module (for D136 configurations). The Standard
Finisher Plus is not available with the D95 Copier/Printer configuration.
Third-Party Finishing Devices (D110/D125/D136 configurations)
Additional third-party, Document Finishing Architecture (DFA) devices are also available
for your machine. Information on these DFA devices can be obtained by contacting your
Xerox sales representative.
Note
All third-party, DFA devices require the Interface Module (for D110/D125 configurations)
or the Interface Cooling Module (for D136 configurations), and they also require the
Standard Finisher Plus. DFA devices are not available with the D95 Copier/Printer
configuration.
1-14
User Guide
2
Where to find help
Customer documentation CD/DVD
We recommend that you print all customer documentation and keep it close to the
machine.
You can locate the customer documentation on your Customer Documentation CD/DVD.
Your customer documentation CD/DVD was shipped with the machine.
Print server customer documentation
Supporting customer documentation for your print server is on a CD/DVD and is shipped
with the print server. You or your System Administrator should print these documents,
after the installation is complete.
Help on the World Wide Web
Xerox on the World Wide Web: For system support, user help, customer documentation,
and service support, go to www.xerox.com and click the Contact Us link for specific
contact information/telephone numbers in your area.
Note
You can get the latest customer documentation updates for your product by going to
www.xerox.com. Be sure to periodically check this website for the latest information on
your product.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
2-1
Where to find help
It may be helpful to know your machine serial number before calling for support. The
machine serial number is shown on the Machine Information tab: Machine Status >
Machine Information.
2-2
User Guide
3
Paper and other media
Loading media in trays 1, 2, 3, and 4
The following information is applicable for Trays 1-4:
Trays 1 and 2
• Trays 1 and 2 are identical
• Only 8.5 x 11 in./A4 media may be loaded into Trays 1 and 2
• Both trays accommodate media weights from 16 lb bond to 80 lb cover (52 gsm to
216 gsm)
• Tray 1 has a capacity of 1,100 sheets
• Tray 2 has a capacity of 1,600 sheets
• Media must be loaded into the trays in the long edge feed (LEF) direction
Trays 3 and 4
• Trays 3 and 4 are size-adjustable
• Both trays accommodate media sizes starting at 5.5 x 7.2 in./140 mm x 182 mm
(A5) to a maximum of 13.0 x 19.2 in./330 mm x 488 mm (SRA3)
• Both trays accommodate media weights from 16 lb bond to 80 lb cover (52 gsm to
216 gsm)
• Each tray has a capacity of 550 sheets
• Media may be loaded in either the long edge feed (LEF)/portrait or short edge feed
(SEF)/landscape direction
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
3-1
Paper and other media
Loading paper in trays 1 and 2
Note
A paper jam may occur if a tray is opened while it is being used to feed stock.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job.
Pull out the tray slowly until it stops.
Open the ream of paper with the seam side facing up.
Fan the sheets before loading them into the tray.
Load and align the edge of the paper against the LEFT edge of the tray.
Paper must be loaded in the Long Edge Feed (LEF)/portrait direction.
6. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray settings screen may be
displayed on the UI.
7. If changes have been made to the paper tray, select the Change Settings button;
otherwise, proceed to the next step.
a) Make the desired selections for Paper Type/Paper Weight, Paper Size, and Paper
Color.
b) If necessary, make the desired changes to paper curl and alignment adjustment.
Note
Refer to the System Administration Guide for detailed information on the paper
curl and alignment adjustment options.
c) Select Save until you are returned to the tray settings window.
8. Select Confirm to close the window.
3-2
User Guide
Paper and other media
Loading paper in trays 3 and 4
Note
A paper jam may occur if a tray is opened while it is being used to feed stock.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job.
Pull out the tray slowly until it stops.
Open the ream of paper with the seam side facing up.
Fan the sheets before loading them into the tray.
Load and align the edge of the paper against the LEFT edge of the tray.
Paper can be loaded either in the Long Edge Feed (LEF)/portrait or Short Edge Feed
(SEF)/landscape direction.
6. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the
Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray.
Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
7. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray settings screen may be
displayed on the UI.
8. If changes have been made to the paper tray, select the Change Settings button;
otherwise, proceed to the next step.
a) Make the desired selections for Paper Type/Paper Weight, Paper Size, and Paper
Color.
b) If necessary, make the desired changes to paper curl and alignment adjustment.
Note
Refer to the System Administration Guide for detailed information on the paper
curl and alignment adjustment options.
c) Select Save until you are returned to the tray settings window.
9. Select Confirm to close the window.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
3-3
Paper and other media
Loading tab stock in trays 3 and 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job.
Pull out the tray slowly until it stops.
Fan the tab paper before loading into the tray.
Load and align the edge of the tab paper against the RIGHT edge of the tray with
the side to be copied or printed on facing down.
Note
Tab stock can be loaded either long edge or short edge feed (portrait or landscape).
5. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the
Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray.
Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
6. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray settings screen may be
displayed on the UI.
7. If changes have been made to the paper tray, select the Change Settings button;
otherwise, proceed to the next step.
a) Make the desired selections for Paper Type/Paper Weight, Paper Size, and Paper
Color.
b) If necessary, make the desired changes to paper curl and alignment adjustment.
Note
Refer to the System Administration Guide for detailed information on the paper
curl and alignment adjustment options.
c) Select Save until you are returned to the tray settings window.
8. Select Confirm to close the window.
Loading pre-drilled stock in trays 1, 2, 3, and 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
3-4
Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job.
Pull out the tray slowly until it stops.
Open the ream of paper with the seam side facing up.
Fan the sheets before loading them into the tray.
User Guide
Paper and other media
5. Load and align the edge of the pre-drilled paper against the LEFT edge of the tray.
Align the paper so that the holes are against the left edge of the tray, and ensure
that the paper is loaded in the LEF direction.
6. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the
Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray.
Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
7. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray settings screen may be
displayed on the UI.
8. If changes have been made to the paper tray, select the Change Settings button;
otherwise, proceed to the next step.
a) Make the desired selections for Paper Type/Paper Weight, Paper Size, and Paper
Color.
b) If necessary, make the desired changes to paper curl and alignment adjustment.
Note
Refer to the System Administration Guide for detailed information on the paper
curl and alignment adjustment options.
c) Select Save until you are returned to the tray settings window.
9. Select Confirm to close the window.
Loading transparencies in trays 1-4
1. Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job.
2. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops.
3. Fan the transparencies to stop them from sticking together before loading into the
tray.
4. Load transparencies on top of a small stack of same-size paper, and align the edge
of the transparencies with the removable stripe against the LEFT edge of the tray
with the side to be copied or printed on facing down.
Note
• Do not load more than 100 transparencies in a paper tray at one time.
• Transparencies can be loaded either long edge or short edge feed (portrait or
landscape).
• Do not load transparencies above the MAX line as indicated on the tray.
5. When loading transparencies into either Tray 3 or 4, adjust the paper guides until
they lightly touch the edges of the material in the tray.
6. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray settings screen may be
displayed on the UI.
7. If changes have been made to the paper tray, select the Change Settings button;
otherwise, proceed to the next step.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
3-5
Paper and other media
a) Make the desired selections for Paper Type/Paper Weight, Paper Size, and Paper
Color.
b) If necessary, make the desired changes to paper curl and alignment adjustment.
Note
Refer to the System Administration Guide for detailed information on the paper
curl and alignment adjustment options.
c) Select Save until you are returned to the tray settings window.
8. Select Confirm to close the window.
Loading media in optional feeding devices
Refer to the specific chapter for information and instructions on loading media in the
optional feeding devices.
Loading post-process media in optional
finishing devices
Refer to the specific chapter for information on loading post-process media in the optional
finishing devices.
Loading tab stock with the GBC AdvancedPunch
When the optional GBC AdvancedPunch is attached to your machine, tab stock is loaded
differently into paper trays. For information on how to load media into the paper trays
when a GBC AdvancedPunch is attached, refer to the GBC AdvancedPunch customer
documentation.
3-6
User Guide
4
Copy
Basic copy using the document feeder
1. Adjust the movable document guides to their widest position.
2. Load the documents face up with the first page on top and with the headings toward
the back or left of the machine.
The confirmation indicator lights to show that the documents are loaded correctly.
3. Press the Services Home button.
4. Select Copy on the Services Home screen.
5. From the Copy screen, select the desired features/options.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
4-1
Copy
•
•
•
•
•
•
Reduce/Enlarge
Paper Supply
Copy Output
2-Sided Copying
Original Type
Lighten/Darken
The features displayed on the main Copy screen vary depending on how the main
Copy screen is configured by the administrator.
6. Enter the quantity.
7. Press Start.
Basic copy using the document glass
1. Open the document feeder.
2. Place the document face down by aligning it as shown in the illustration.
3. Press the Services Home button.
4. Select Copy on the Services Home screen.
5. From the Copy screen, select the desired features/options.
• Reduce/Enlarge
• Paper Supply
• Copy Output
4-2
User Guide
Copy
• 2-Sided Copying
• Original Type
• Lighten/Darken
The features displayed on the main Copy screen vary depending on how the main
Copy screen is configured by the administrator.
6. Enter the quantity.
7. Press Start.
Selecting copy options for a DFA finishing
device
If your machine has an optional, third-party, Document Finishing Architecture (DFA)
device attached, then this profile feature is available, and specific copy options may be
selected for a job.
Prior to physically attaching the DFA device to the machine, device profiles are created.
The profiles represent the characteristics of your finishing device.
Note
Refer to the third-party customer documentation for information on setting the profile
values for the specific DFA device attached to the machine.
A profile for the job can be selected from either the print server, the print driver on your
computer, or the machine’s User Interface. Depending on the DFA device, a maximum
of twelve profiles are available.
1. Place your original documents either in the document feeder or on the document
glass.
2. Press the Services Home button.
3. Select Copy on the Services Home screen.
4. Select the Output Format tab.
a) Select the DFA Finisher.
The DFA Finisher Profile screen displays.
b) From the displayed list, select the profile for the job.
If the device is an e-binder, select the binding position.
c) Select Save.
d) Select the desired Face Up/Down Output option.
5. From the Copy screen, select the desired features/options.
The features displayed on the main Copy screen vary depending on how the main
Copy screen is configured by the administrator.
6. Enter the quantity.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
4-3
Copy
7. Press Start.
If prompted on the UI, follow the instructions provided to correct any job submission
errors. If there is a DFA problem, refer to your DFA documentation.
Copy tab
The Copy tab contains the following features:
• Reduce/Enlarge
• Paper Supply
Note
Depending on how the Copy tab is configured by the administrator, this tab may also
contain the following the features:
•
•
•
•
•
Copy Output
2 Sided Copying
Image Shift
Original Type
Lighten/Darken
Reduce/Enlarge
You can set the reduce or enlarge copy features on the Copy screen in the Reduce/Enlarge
area.
1. Select the applicable reduce/enlarge ratio.
2. You can also set the Reduce/Enlarge ratio by using the up or down buttons. The ratio
is displayed in the text box.
Paper Supply Screen
You can select a paper tray that does not appear on the Paper Supply area of the Copy
screen.
1. Under the Paper Supply feature, select the desired paper.
2. From the Paper Supply area of the Copy screen, select More...
3. From the list displayed, select the tray that contains the applicable paper size and
paper type.
4. Select Save to keep your changes.
4-4
User Guide
Copy
2-Sided Copying (Making 2-Sided Copies)
Copies of 1-sided and 2-sided documents can be made on one side or both sides.
1. From the Copy screen, in the 2 Sided Copying area, make the applicable selection
from the displayed buttons.
2. If Side 2 is to be rotated (head-to-foot) select the Rotate Side 2 check box.
Copy Output
Copy output can be defined by using the Copy Output button on the Copy screen.
1. From the Copy screen, select the Copy Output button.
2. From the Hole Punch & More screen select the applicable output features from the
Hole Punch & More screen:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Paper Supply (The Paper Supply screen is displayed.)
Collation feature
Separator Tray
Staple (Available only when Collated is selected)
Hole Punch (Available only when Collated is selected)
Output/Offset Stacking
3. Select Save to save the changes.
Image Shift
Image shift features are defined by using the Image Shift button on the Copy tab screen.
1. From the Copy screen, select the Image Shift button.
2. Select the applicable image shift features from the Image Shift screen.
3. When Margin Shift is selected, set the image shift parameters, using the left/right
(or) up/down buttons.
4. Select Original Orientation... and set and save the orientation.
5. You can elect to mirror the Side 1 settings to side 2 by selecting the Mirror Side 1
check box.
6. Select Save to save the changes.
Original Type
The original-type specifications can be defined by using the Original Type button on the
Copy tab screen.
1. From the Copy screen, select the Original Type button.
2. Select the applicable specifications for the original type.
3. Select Save to save the changes.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
4-5
Copy
Lighten/Darken
You can adjust the copy density to one of seven levels from the Copy window, in the
Lighten/Darken area.
The density is adjusted by selecting either the left or right buttons.
Image Quality
The Image Quality option contains the following features/options: Original Type, Image
Options, and Background Suppression.
Original Type
The Original Type feature provides a convenient way to enhance the quality of your
output based on the type of original images you are copying. Select the Original Type
button on the Image Quality section, and select the desired option.
Select the Original Type.
• Photo & Text: Use this option if your original is from a magazine or other source
that contains high quality photographs with text. This setting produces better
pictures, but slightly reduces sharpness for text and line art.
• Text: Use this option if your original contains only text or line art. The result is
sharper edges for the text and line art.
• Photo: This option is specifically designed to copy photographs or magazine
pictures without any text or line drawings. This option prevents faint reproduction
of colors.
• Light Text: Select this option for text that requires enhancement, such as
handwritten pencil text.
• Text on See-Through Paper: Select this option to reduce blurs of tracing paper
documents or to suppress background shadows of lightweight documents.
Image Options
Use the Image Options feature to make adjustments to the following options:
Select Image Options:
• Lighten/Darken: This option provides manual control to adjust the lightness or
darkness of the scanned images. Select the Down scroll button to darken the
scanned image from light originals such as pencil images. Select the Up scroll
button to lighten the scanned image from dark originals such as half tones or
originals with colored backgrounds.
4-6
User Guide
Copy
• Sharpness: This option controls the balance between sharp text and moiré
(patterns within the image). Move the slider control down (Soften) to produce an
image with a smooth, uniform appearance (ideally suited for photographic scanned
images). Move the slider control up (Sharpen) to produce an image with better
quality text or line art.
Background Suppression
When Background Suppression is selected, the background color of documents such as
newspapers and colored paper documents is erased on the copy.
Note
When Document Type is set to Photo, the Background Suppression feature is not
functional.
1.
2.
3.
4.
From the Copy screen, select the Image Quality option.
Select Background Suppression.
Select Off (No Suppression) or Auto Suppression.
Select Save to save the changes.
Layout Adjustment
The Layout Adjustment section includes the following features: Book Copying, 2 Sided
Book Copying, Original Size, Edge Erase, Image Shift, Image Rotation, Invert Image,
and Original Orientation.
Book Copying
Bound originals (such as books) can be placed on the document glass to make 1-sided
or 2-sided copies. The bound original should be placed face down and registered to the
rear left corner of the document glass. Align the top of the bound original against the
rear edge of the document glass.
Select a Book Copying Option:
• Both Pages: Copies both pages in page order.
• Left Page Only: Copies the left page only.
• Right Page Only: Copies the right page only.
• Binding Edge Erase: Erases the shadow from the center section of the document.
You can set the binding erase width in the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm
increments.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
4-7
Copy
2-Sided Book Copying
This feature allows you to make 2-Sided copies of facing pages of the original bound
document.
Note
This feature and Book Copying cannot be activated simultaneously, you must use the
document glass to make copies from books, magazines, or pamphlets. Do not place
bound originals in the document feeder. Non-standard size documents will not be
separated into two pages accurately.
1. Select Copy on the Services Home window, then select the Layout Adjustment tab.
2. Select 2-Sided Book Copying and then select On.
3. To specify the copy start page and copy end page, select Starting & Ending Page.
• For Starting Page: touch Left Page or Right Page.
• For Ending Page: touch Left Page or Right Page.
4. To specify the Binding Edge Erase amount, the space between the image area and
the binding, touch the plus or minus (+/–) buttons.
5. Select Save.
Original Size
1. On the Services Home window, select Copy, then select the Layout Adjustment tab.
2. Select Original Size.
• The printer can pre-scan the first page of the originals to determine the area to
copy. Select Auto Detect.
• If the area to be copied matches a particular paper size, select Manual Size Input,
then select the desired paper size. To view the entire list, select the scroll arrows.
• If the original contains pages of different sizes, select Mixed Size Originals.
3. Select Save.
Edge Erase
You can erase content from the edges of your copies by specifying the amount to erase
on the right, left, top, and bottom edge.
1. Select Copy on the Services Home window, then select the Layout Adjustment tab.
2. Select Edge Erase.
3. To erase all the edges by the same amount:
• Select All Edges.
• Select the plus or minus (+/–) buttons.
4. To specify different amounts for the edges:
4-8
User Guide
Copy
• Select Individual Edges.
• For each edge, select the plus or minus (+/–) buttons.
• If you selected 2-sided copies: to specify the amount to erase from each edge on
Side 2, touch the plus or minus (+/–) buttons, or select Mirror Side 1.
5. To cancel edge erase, select Print to Edge.
6. To specify the original’s orientation as you place it in the document feeder or on the
document glass, select Original Orientation, then select either Upright Image or
Sideways Image (top to left), then select Save.
7. If preset values such as Hole Punch Erase or Header/Footer Erase were previously
saved, you can select the preset in the lower-left corner of the window.
8. Select Save.
Image Shift
You can change the placement of the image on the copy page. This feature is useful if
the image size is smaller than the page size. Originals must be positioned correctly for
image shift to work correctly.
1. Select Copy on the Services Home window, then select the Layout Adjustment tab.
2. Select Image Shift.
3. To center the image on the page, select Auto Center.
4. To specify the position of the image:
• Select Margin Shift.
• To specify the amount of Up/Down and Left/Right shift for Side 1, select the plus
or minus (+/–) buttons.
• If you selected 2-sided copies: to specify the amount to erase from each edge on
Side 2, touch the plus or minus (+/–) buttons, or touch Mirror Side 1.
5. To specify the original’s orientation as you place it in the document feeder or on the
document glass, select Original Orientation, then select either Upright Image or
Sideways Image (top to left), then select Save.
If preset values were previously saved, select the preset in the lower-left corner of
the window.
6. Select Save.
Image Rotation
If the orientation of the paper currently loaded in the tray differs from that of the
document that is loaded, the machine automatically rotates the document image to
make copies with the document and paper orientations matched.
1. From the Copy tab screen, select the Layout Adjustment tab.
2. Select Image Rotation...
3. Select the applicable image rotation.
4. Select Save to save the changes.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
4-9
Copy
Invert Image (Mirror Image/Negative Image)
Copies can be made with a negative image of the original, or with the left and right-side
images of the document reversed.
1. From the Copy screen, select the Layout Adjustment tab.
2. Select Invert Image.
The default is Normal Image, which does not mirror the images.
3. Select the Mirror Image and/or Negative Image option.
4. To create negative images, select Negative Image. The default is Positive Image,
which does not print the image as a negative.
5. Select Save to save the changes.
Note
When Negative Image and Edge Erase are set simultaneously, the edge erase area
turns to white.
Original Orientation
The document orientation needs to be set to indicate the top of the document.
1. From the Copy screen, select Layout Adjustment.
2. Select Original Orientation.
3. Select the orientation in accordance with the document that is loaded.
4. Select Save to save the changes.
Note
If the Original Orientation differs from the actual document orientation, the machine
may mistakenly detect the wrong side as the head of the document.
Repeat Image
A document image can be copied on one sheet of paper repeatedly for a specified
number of times.
1. On the Services Home screen, select Copy.
2. Select Output Format.
3. Select Page Layout.
4. Select Repeat Image.
5. Select the applicable Repeat Image option.
6. If Variable Repeat is required, select the correct image layout button and then set
the number of columns and rows using the related buttons.
7. Select Original Orientation.
8. Set and save the original orientation features.
9. Select Save to keep your repeat-image changes.
4-10
User Guide
Copy
Tip
When the copy ratio is set to Auto, the repeated copies of the image are reduced to
fit on the selected paper. You can also specify how the repeated copies of the image
are arranged.
Note
When making repeat copies at the same size as the document image, you can specify
a number of repeats that will fit on the paper.
Output Format
The Output Format section contains features such as Booklet Creation, Secure Watermark,
Transparency Options, as well as many other output formats.
Booklet Creation
Copies can be printed in the form of a booklet. The page images are reduced to print
two images per side of each printed page. The pages can then be folded and stapled
manually, or with the appropriate finisher, they can be creased and stapled automatically.
In this mode, the printer does not print the copies until it has scanned all the originals.
1. Select Copy on the Services Home, then select the Output Format tab.
2. Select Booklet Creation, then select Booklet Options On.
3. Under Original Input, select 1-Sided Originals, 2-Sided Originals or 2-Sided Rotated
Originals.
4. If the Office Finisher LX with Booklet Maker option is installed, select No Crease &
Staple, Crease & Staple or Crease Only.
5. You can add margins in the center binding area to compensate for the thickness of
the booklet:
• Select Binding Shift, then select the plus or minus (+/–) buttons to set the shift.
• Select Save.
6. To add covers, select Covers, then select Blank Cover, Print on Both or 1-Sided Covers
Print Outside.
• Select the tray loaded with cover paper and the tray loaded with main body paper
and select Save.
• To print the copy of the last original page on the back cover for Blank Cover and
Print on Both, select Last Page on Back Cover, then select Save.
7. To print the copy of the last original page on the back cover for Blank Cover and Print
on Both, select Last Page on Back Cover, then select Save.
8. To enter the number of sheets for each subset, select the plus or minus (+/–) buttons,
then select Save.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
4-11
Copy
9. Offset Stacking places each stack of printed pages slightly to the left or right of the
previous stack for easier separation.
a) Select Output /Offset.
b) Select Center Tray Upper or Center Tray Lower. For automatic creasing, select
Right Middle Tray.
c) Select Offset Stacking, then select System Default, No Offset, Offset Per Set or
Offset Per Job, then select Save.
10. Select Save.
Perfect Binding (optional)
Important
The Perfect Binder is available with the D110, D125, and D136 Copier/Printer. The
copier/printer must use the integrated controller and not a separate print server.
Note
The Layout Adjustment options may be useful when the completed output is a perfect
bound book.
When the optional Perfect Binding feature is On, the following options are available:
Covers
Choose one of three options:
• Blank Cover: Select this option either for blank covers (front and back) or when using
preprinted covers.
• Print on Both: Select this option when printing on front and back covers and on both
the inside and outside of the covers.
• 1 Sided Covers, Print on Outside: Select this option to print only on the outside of
the front and back covers.
Cover & Book Block Size/Paper Supply
This option allows you to set the size of both the Cover and the Book Block pages and
to select from which tray the paper will be supplied.
• Cover Size: Select the paper size of the book cover from either the standard sizes
(such as 11 x 17 in./A3) or set a custom size.
• Book Block Size: Select the paper size of the book block pages from the standard
sizes (such as 11 x 17 in./A3) or set a custom size.
• Paper Supply: Select the tray to use for both the cover and book block pages; these
will be two different trays (one for the cover and another for the book block pages).
4-12
User Guide
Copy
Cut to Size
Select the trim amount to use for the printed and bound book; options include (refer
to the UI screens to indicate the default trim amount for each option):
• No Trim: The book is not trimmed
• Minor Trim: 7 mm (0.275 in.) is removed from all three sides of the book
• Standard Size: Oversized stock is trimmed to 8.5 x 11 in. or A4
• Custom Size: Select the trim amounts in 0.1 mm (0.003 in.) increments, starting at
7 mm (0.275 in.) to 27 mm (1.062 in.) for the top and bottom, and 7 mm (0.275 in.)
to 34 mm (1.338 in.) for the face.
Refer to the Perfect Binder chapter of the User Guide for specific trim and size
recommendations for perfect bound books.
Fine Adjustment
Use this option to fine tune the adjustment to the cover and/or the book block pages;
options include:
• Adjust Trim Size
• Adjust Trim Position
• Trim Angle
• Adjust Cover Position
Note
Refer to the UI screen information when using one of these options.
Add As/Edit Preset
This option allows you to add a new preset that contains specific perfect binding
information for a frequently-run perfect-bound job. Once a new preset is added, it
remains in the system’s memory and is available for recall and reuse when required.
This option also allows you to edit or delete already-existing perfect bound presets.
Use Preset
As the name indicates, this option allows you to select a preexisting, perfect bound
preset.
Selecting the Perfect Binding options
1. Press the Services Home button.
2. Select Copy on the Services Home screen.
3. From the Copy screen, select the Output Format tab.
The Output Format screen displays.
4. Select Perfect Binding.
The Perfect Binding screen displays.
5. Select On.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
4-13
Copy
The Perfect Binding options are available now for selection.
6. Select the desired Cover option:
a) Select the Cover button.
b) Select one of the three Cover options: Blank Cover, Print on Both, or 1 Sided
Covers, Print on Outside.
c) Select Save.
The main Perfect Binding screen displays.
7. Select Cover & Book Block/Paper Supply.
8. Select Cover Size.
a) Select the output size of the cover either from the Standard Size options or enter
a Custom Size.
b) Select Save.
The Cover & Book Block/Paper Supply screen displays.
9. Select Book Block Size.
a) Select the output size of the book block pages from the Standard Size options or
enter a Custom Size.
b) Select Save.
The Cover & Book Block/Paper Supply screen displays.
10. Select Paper Supply.
a) If using preprinted covers, select Tray 9 for the cover paper supply.
Ensure that the blank or preprinted cover stock is loaded into the Perfect Binder
Tray 9.
b) Select the desired tray for the book block pages.
Ensure that the correct paper stock is loaded into the selected tray.
c) Select Save.
The Cover & Book Block/Paper Supply screen displays.
11. Select Cut to Size.
a) Select the desired option: No Trim, Minor Trim, Standard Size, or Custom Size.
b) Select Save.
The Cover & Book Block/Paper Supply screen displays.
12. If necessary, select the desired Fine Adjustment options and select Save.
The main Perfect Binding screen displays.
13. Select Save.
The Output Format screen displays.
14. Select other copy options as applicable (such as Original Orientation or 2 Sided
Copying).
15. Enter the desired quantity.
16. Press Start to begin the perfect bound copy job.
4-14
User Guide
Copy
17. Follow the instructions provided on the copier/printer UI to complete the perfect
bound job.
Covers
To add covers to a copy job, select different trays for the first and last page. Those trays
can be loaded with heavier stock, color or pre-printed paper. The covers can be blank or
printed.
The paper used for the covers must be the same size as the paper used for the rest of
the document.
1. Select Copy on the Services Home window, then select the Output Format tab.
2. Select Covers.
3. To include both a front and back cover that use the same tray and printing options:
a) Select Front & Back Covers.
b) Select a printing option for the cover: Blank Cover, 1-Sided Covers or Print on Both.
c) Select the tray to use for the covers, then select the tray to use for the main body.
4. To include only a front cover or only a back cover:
a) Select Front Cover Only or Back Cover Only.
b) Select a printing option for the cover: Blank Cover, 1-Sided Covers or Print on Both.
c) Touch the tray to use for the covers, then touch the tray to use for the main body
of the document.
5. Select Save.
Page Layout
You can copy multiple original pages onto one side of a sheet of paper. The size of the
page images is reduced proportionally to fit on the selected paper.
1. Select Copy on the Services Home window, then select the Output Format tab.
2. Select Page Layout and then select Multiple Pages per Side.
3. To select the number of original pages for each sheet of paper, select 2 Pages, 4
Pages or 8 Pages. For 4 Pages Up or 8 Pages Up, select the desired Reading Order.
4. To change the orientation of the copies, select Original Orientation, then select
Upright Images or Sideways Images, then select Save.
5. To repeat the same image on a page, select Repeat Image.
a) Select 2 Times, 4 Times, or 8 Times.
b) To automatically calculate the number of times to repeat vertically or horizontally
(based on document size, paper size, and the enlarge/reduction ratio), select Auto
Repeat.
c) To specify the number of times to repeat the image vertically or horizontally, select
Variable Repeat, then select the plus or minus (+/–) buttons. You can repeat an
image between 1 to 23 times vertically (columns), and between 1 to 33 times
horizontally (rows).
d) To change the orientation of the copies, select Original Orientation, then select
Upright Images or Sideways Images, then select Save.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
4-15
Copy
Poster
This feature allows you to create a large poster by pasting the copies spread over multiple
sheets together. Copied sheets are provided with a paste margin so that they can be
pasted together. This paste margin is fixed to 0.4 inches (10 mm).
1. On the Services Home window, select Copy.
2. Select the Output Format option.
3. Select Poster.
4. Select Output Size, then touch the desired size of the poster.
5. To select the width and length enlargement percentages independently, select
Enlargement %, then select the plus or minus (+/–) buttons. To set the width and
length proportionally, select Lock X–Y%.
6. Select Paper Supply and set the applicable paper supply tray options.
7. Save the paper-supply options.
8. Select Save to keep your changes
Tip
Confirm that the orientation of the document and the Original Orientation setting
of the Scan Options screen are the same.
Note
This feature is disabled when Collate is selected from the Holepunch & More screen
(Copy tab, Copy Output button).
Annotations
You can add an annotation-stamp, date, page number, and Bates Stamp to the final
copies that are not included on the original document.
1. On the Services Home screen, select Copy.
2. Select Output Format and then select Annotations.
3. To insert a comment:
a) Select Comment, then select On.
b) On the next screen, select the desired comment in the list of stored comments.
c) To create a comment, select an <Available> comment, then select Edit. Using the
touch screen keyboard, enter the new comment, then select Save.
d) Select Apply To, then select First Page Only, All Pages or All Pages Except First,
then select Save.
e) To select the location of the comment on the page, select Position, then select
the desired location.
f) Select Save twice.
4. To insert the current date:
a) Select Date, then select On.
b) Select the format to use for the date.
4-16
User Guide
Copy
c) To select the position of the date stamp on the page, select Position, then select
the desired position.
d) To select which pages the date appears on, select Apply To, then select First Page
Only, All Pages or All Pages Except First, then select Save.
e) SelectSave twice.
5. To insert page numbers:
a) Select Page Numbers, then select On.
b) To enter the starting page number, select the plus or minus (+/–) buttons.
c) To select which pages the page number appears on, select Apply To, then select
All Pages or All Pages Except First, then select Save.
d) To select the position of the date stamp on the page, select Position, then select
the desired position.
e) Select Save twice.
6. To insert a Bates Stamp:
a) Select Bates Stamp, then touch On.
b) Select an existing prefix or create a new prefix.
c) To create a new prefix, touch an <Available> prefix, then select Edit. Using the
touch screen keyboard, enter the new prefix, then select Save.
d) To enter the starting page number, select the plus or minus (+/–) buttons.
e) To select which pages the Bates Stamp appears on, select Apply To, then select
All Pages or All Pages Except First, then select Save.
f) To select the position of the Bates Stamp on the page, select Position, then select
the desired position, then select Save.
g) To specify the number of digits, select Number of Digits. To select the minimum
number of digits necessary, select Auto Assign, then select Save. To select a
specific number of digits, touch Manual Assign, then select the plus or minus (+/–)
buttons to insert up to nine leading zeros, then select Save.
h) Select Save.
7. To specify the original’s orientation as you place it in the document feeder or on the
document glass, under Original Orientation, select either Upright Images or Sideways
Images.
8. To change the format used for annotations:
a) Select Format & Style.
b) To select the font point size, select the plus or minus (+/–) buttons.
c) Select the desired font color.
d) To select the placement of the annotations on the second side when printing
2-sided copies, select Same as Side 1 or Mirror Side 1.
e) Select Save.
9. Select Save.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
4-17
Copy
Watermark
You can elect to lightly print a sequential control-number, stored watermark, date and
time, or serial number on the background of each copy set as a watermark.
1. On the Services Home window, select Copy.
2. Select Output Format and then select Watermark.
3. To add a control number, select Control Number, select Add. To select the starting
number, select the plus or minus (+/–) buttons.
4. Select Save.
5. To add a stored watermark, select Stored Watermarks, then select On. Select a stored
watermark in the list, then select Save.
6. To print the current date and time on the copies, select Date & Time, select Add,
then select Save.
7. To print the printer’s serial number on the copies, select Serial Number, select Add,
then select Save.
8. The watermark image is faint so the content of the page can be seen. To make the
watermark visible on copies used as originals, select Watermark Effect, then select
Embossed or Outline, then select Save.
9. Select Save.
Secure Watermark
Secure Watermark is an optional feature and requires the purchase of an optional
package. For information, contact the Xerox Customer Support Center. Secure Watermark
is sometimes called Hybrid Watermark.
Secure Watermark is a security management feature that embeds a copy-protection,
digital code into a document in order to restrict the document from being duplicated
(copied). With the digital code, you can also determine when, from which machine, and
by whom the document originated.
The following limitations or conditions apply to the Secure Watermark feature:
Secure Watermark options include:
Protection Code
This option embeds a code into the document, and prevents it from being copied or
scanned.
Stored Secure Watermark
This option embeds hidden text into the documents. With this hidden text feature, the
specified text is embedded in the entire sheet. When copying a document with hidden
text, the embedded text on the printed output appears in white regardless of whether
or not the optional Secure Watermark kit is installed on the machine.
4-18
User Guide
Copy
• Using the Secure Watermark feature may cause print quality to deteriorate such as:
-
Colors may appear darker and
Resolution for text and dots (such as decimal characters and periods) may be
slightly out of focus and harder to read
• The Secure Watermark feature may not function properly for a document if any of
the following apply:
-
The document size is smaller than 5.5 x 8.5 in./A5.
The background color is not white.
The Watermark or Secure Watermark feature was previously used for the
document.
Tab Margin Shift
You can copy images to a tab location on tabbed paper by specifying the exact position
of the tab, so that the image is copied onto the tab. Sizes of tab paper that can be copied
are A4 and 8.5 to 11 in.
1. On the Services Home screen, select Copy.
2. From the Output Format section, select Tab Margin Shift...
3. Select the applicable shift feature option:
• Shift to Tab - The image is only copied to the tab part of the paper.
• Shift All - The whole document image is copied to the tab paper.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Use the +/- button to specify the shift value.
Select the applicable tab stock size and type.
Select Add Tab Stock to set the tab stock quantity.
Select Save to keep your choices.
• When loading tab paper in Tray 5 (Bypass), load the paper with the side to be
copied facing up and with the edge opposite to the tab to be fed first.
• You can load the tab paper in tray 3 to 4 only when selecting Tabbed Stock 1
105-216 gsm. When loading the tab paper in tray 3 or 4, load the paper with the
side to be copied facing down and with the edge opposite to the tab aligning to
the left side of the tray.
Face Up/Down Output
Auto
Selecting the Auto button automatically determines whether the copies should be
output face up or face down.
Face Up
Selecting the Face Up button causes all output to be delivered face up, with the first
page on top of the output stack.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
4-19
Copy
Face Down
Selecting the Face Down button causes all output to be delivered face down, with the
first page on the bottom of the output stack.
Face Up (Reverse Order)
Selecting the Face Up (Reverse Order) button causes all output to be delivered face
up, with the last page on the top of the output stack. This setting may not be available,
depending on how your system administrator configures the machine.
Identification Card Copying
This feature allows you to copy both sides of a small original, such as an identification
card, onto the same side of a page.
1. Open the document feeder and place the card in the upper left corner of the document
glass.
2. Close the document feeder, select Copy on the Services Home window, then select
the Output Format tab.
3. Select ID Card Copy, select On, then select Save.
4. To scan side one, press the green Start button.
5. To scan side two, turn the card over without changing its location on the document
glass, then select Start. Both sides of the card will then print onto the same side of
a sheet of paper.
Folding
If the machine is equipped with a folding option, you can make copies to be folded in
half (single fold) or in thirds (C fold or Z fold types). Each type fold is discussed in detail
in this section.
1. On the Services Home screen, select Copy.
2. Select Output Format.
3. Select Folding...
4. Select the applicable folding features:
5. Select Save to keep your choices.
Note
The orientation of documents is limited to short-edge feed; therefore, you must select
a paper tray set with short-edge feed stock.
Transparency Options
This feature allows you to place a blank paper of the same size and orientation between
each transparency.
4-20
User Guide
Copy
Caution
Xerox recommends OHP transparency film for transparent copies. Use of
non-recommended films could cause machine failure or paper jams.
1. On the Services Home screen, select Copy.
2. Select Output Format.
3. Select Transparency Options.
• Off
• Blank Transparency Separators
• Blank Separators and Handouts
• Transparency Set and Handouts
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select the applicable transparency option.
Select Paper Supply Settings and set the paper tray features.
Save the paper-tray features.
On the Transparency Options screen, select Save to keep your changes.
Job Assembly tab
Build Job
Complex copy jobs that include a variety of originals requiring different copy settings
can be produced using this feature. Each “segment” can have different copy settings.
After all segments are programmed and scanned, the page images are stored temporarily
in the printer. The complete copy job is then printed.
1. On the Services Home screen, select Copy.
2. Select Job Assembly.
3. Program and scan the first segment:
a) Place the originals in the document feeder or on the document glass for the first
segment.
b) Select the desired copy settings for the first segment.
c) Select the Job Assembly tab.
d) Select Build Job, select On, then select Save.
e) To scan the first set of originals, press the green Start button on the control panel.
4. Program and scan additional segments:
a) Place the originals in the document feeder or on the document glass for the next
segment, then select Next Original.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
4-21
Copy
b) When printing 2-sided jobs, the start page of the next segment is set using Chapter
Start. To set the start page of the next 2-sided segment, select Chapter Start,
then choose from the following:
Off: the first page of the next segment prints on the next available side.
On: the first page of the next segment prints on Side 1 of a new sheet of paper.
Pages per Side-New Page: If the first segment has an odd number of pages, the
second segment starts on side 1. If the first segment has an even number of pages,
the second segment starts on side 2.
c) Select Change Settings. Select the settings for the segment.
d) To scan the next set of originals, press the green Start button on the control panel.
5. For each additional segment you wish to copy, repeat Step 3.
6. When all segments have been scanned, in the Copy screen, select Last Original.
Build Job Options
1. Select Copy on the Services Home window, then select the Job Assembly tab.
2. Select Build Job, then select On.
3. Select from:
• Copy Output: Touch Paper Supply, Stapling, Collation and Output/Offset options,
then touch Save.
• Booklet Creation: Select the desired settings, then select Save.
• Covers: Select the desired settings, then select Save.
• Annotations: Select the desired settings, then select Save.
• Segment Separators: To insert separator pages between segments, touch Segment
Separators, then choose from the following:
-
No Separators: Separators are not inserted. Select Save.
-
Blank Separators: Blank separators are inserted. To specify the quantity of
separators, select the plus or minus (+/–) buttons, then touch Save.
-
1-Sided Separators Side 1 Only: The first page of the loaded documents is
copied on the front side of a separator. Select Save.
-
1-Sided Separators Side 2 Only: The first page of the loaded documents is
copied on the back side of a separator. Select Save.
-
2-Sided Separators: The first two pages of the loaded documents are copied
onto eachside of a separator. Select Save.
• Watermarks: Select settings, then touch Save.
4. Select Save.
4-22
User Guide
Copy
Sample Job
With a complicated copy job, it can be helpful to print a test copy before printing multiple
copies. This feature prints a single copy and holds the remaining copies. After inspection
of the sample, the remaining copies can be printed using the same settings, or canceled.
The sample copy is counted as part of the total quantity selected. For example, when
copying a book, if 3 is entered as the number of desired copies, one copy of the book
will be printed, and two other copies will be held until they are released for printing.
1.
Select Copy on the Services Home window, then select the desired copy settings.
2.
Select the Job Assembly tab.
3.
Select Sample Job, then select On.
4.
Select Save.
5.
Press the green Start button on the control panel. The sample set is printed.
6.
To print the remaining copies of the job, select Start, or press the green Start button
on the control panel.
7.
If the sample copy is unsatisfactory, select Delete.
Combine Original Sets
This feature allows you to copy sets of documents that cannot be loaded into the
document feeder. This is useful when copying documents that may be damaged, ripped
or torn, or too wrinkled to go through the document feeder. Combine Original Sets allows
you to copy each original by placing it on the document glass and creating one copy
job for the entire set.
1. Select Copy on the Services Home window. Select the desired copy settings, then
enter the number of copies using the alphanumeric keypad on the control panel.
2. Select the Job Assembly tab, then select Combine Original Sets.
3. Select On, then select Save.
4. Copy the first set of originals:
a) If the first set of originals is not damaged, place them in the document feeder.
b) If the set of originals is damaged, copy them from the document glass.
5. Press the green Start button on the control panel. Copying begins.
6. Scan additional sets:
a) Use either the document feeder (if the originals are not damaged) or the document
glass to copy the next set of originals.
b) On the Copy screen, select Next Original.
7. Select Start on the touch screen, or press the green Start button on the control panel.
8. When the final set has been copied, in the Combine Original Sets screen, select Last
Original.
9. To cancel the job, select Delete.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
4-23
Copy
Form Overlay
You can make copies overlaying the first page of the document on the rest of the
documents. For example, if the first page of the document only has a header and footer,
the rest of the documents can be copied with the same header and footer.
1. From Job Assembly, select Form Overlay.
2. From the Form Overlay screen, select On or Off.
3. Select Save to keep your choices.
• If the first page is 2-sided, only the top side is used for the form overlay.
• The Center/Corner shift, Image shift, Delete Outside/Delete Inside, Edge Erase,
Border Erase features are applied to the text body.
Delete Outside/Delete Inside
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Copy on the Services Home window.
Select Job Assembly.
Select Delete Outside/Delete Inside.
Select either Delete Outside or Delete Inside.
If the originals are 2-sided, select the applicable option:
• Both Sides
• Side 1 Only
• Side 2 Only
6. Select the Area 1 button.
7. To define a specific area, enter the two X/Y coordinates within a range 0.0-17.0 inches
(0.0-431.8 mm). Navigate from coordinate to coordinate by selecting each X/Y button:
a) Select the Y1 box and use the numeric keypad on the control panel to enter the
value for Y1.
b) Select the Y2 box and use the numeric keypad on the control panel to enter the
value for Y2.
c) Select the X1 box and use the numeric keypad on the control panel to enter the
value for X1.
d) Select the X2 box and use the numeric keypad on the control panel to enter the
value for X2.
Clear a deletion area by selecting the Clear Area X (1, 2, or 3) button.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Select Save.
Select Save again.
Enter the Quantity and press Start.
Retrieve the copies from the output area.
4-24
User Guide
Copy
Stored Programming
Frequently used features and job settings can be saved as Stored Programming, which
can be accessed using a shortcut button.
Stored Programming not only remembers feature settings, but it can record a series of
operations. This enables you to record the hierarchy of displayed screens for each step.
For example, you could use Stored Programming to record the following actions: press
the Machine Status button, and display the Print Reports screen to print reports.
• You can record up to 100 consecutive operations in each stored program.
• Up to 40 programs can be stored.
• Build Job cannot be used with Stored Programming.
• There are situations where a stored program will become invalid:
-
When default values or paper tray settings are changed in the system setting
-
When buttons are added or removed from the touch screen, since stored
programming only remembers the location of a button on the screen, not the
name of the button. For example, button positions can change when a job flow
or job template is added or deleted
-
Changing the values of the Watermark feature when it is used in a stored program
-
Changing the password to the folder used in the stored program after it is stored.
• System Settings, Job Flow Sheets, Network Scanning, Address Book and the Browse
feature for the Scan to PC cannot be used with Stored Programming.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
4-25
Copy
4-26
User Guide
5
Scan
Features for the Scanning device are explained in this section. There are various ways
to scan a job as well as where the scanned output should reside when finished.
Simple Scanning
The simple scanning procedure involves loading documents, selecting features, scanning
the job, and identifying where to store the scanned job.
Simple Scan Procedure
1. Load the documents.
2. From the Services Home window, select the applicable feature.
3. Press Start on the Control Panel. The print job will scan.
Loading Documents
The following two methods are available to load documents:
• Document Feeder: Single Sheet or Multiple Sheets
• Document Glass: Single sheet or Bound book
1.
2.
3.
4.
Determine which method you are going to use to load the document.
Remove any paper clips and staples before loading a document.
Adjust any document guides to match the size of the document loaded.
Load the documents face up for the Document Feeder, or place the document face
down on the Document Glass.
Selecting Document Features
1. Place the document in either the Document Feeder or on the Document Glass.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
5-1
Scan
2. Select the desired feature for the document.
• Email: Scans a document and sends the scanned data as an e-mail attachment
after converting the data to TIFF, JPEG, PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS (XML Paper
specification).
• Network Scanning: Scans a document using a job template created on CentreWare
Internet Services. When Scan to Home is enabled and the Remote Access feature
is available, the scanned data can be transferred to a different destination
according to an authenticated user.
• Scan to PC: Scans a document and sends the scanned data to a network computer
via the FTP or SMB protocol.
• Store to Folder: Scans a document and saves the scanned data in a folder on the
machine.
• Send from Folder: Scans a document and temporarily saves the scanned data on
the machine. The user is notified by e-mail of the URL to the location where the
scanned data is stored. Then, the user can access the URL to retrieve the scanned
data.
• Store to USB: Scans a document and saves the scanned data to a USB memory
device (This is an optional feature).
• Store to WSD: You can scan documents set on the machine and save the scanned
data from a computer. Also, you can save the scanned data to a computer on the
network.
(This is an optional feature)
Starting the Scan Job
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Load the document into either the Document Feeder or onto the Document Glass.
Select the desired scanning method.
Select desired features from the Scan window.
On the Control Panel, select the Start button.
If more than one document needs to be scanned, or another page of a bound book,
select Next Original, place the original to be scanned and select the Start button.
6. Continue until you are scanning the last original, select Last Original then select the
Start button.
7. Select Job Status on the control panel to view the status of the scanned job.
Saving the Scanned Data
When you used the Store to Folder service, you can use the following methods to
import the file stored in a folder of the machine to your computer:
• Import using an application: Use Network Scanner Driver.
• Import using Stored File Manager 3
• Import using CentreWare Internet Services
• Import using EasyOperator
5-2
User Guide
Scan
Cancelling a Scan Job
Follow the procedure below to cancel a scan.
1. Either select Stop on the touch screen or press the Stop button on the Control Panel.
2. On the control panel, press Cancel to end scanning or Start to restart the scan.
3. Press the Job Status button on the control panel.
4. Select the job to cancel, and then press Stop.
Note
When a scan is cancelled, scan data already stored to the mailbox is deleted.
Preview Scanned Images of a Job
1. Scan the images and select job features.
2. While scanning, select Preview to preview the last page that was scanned.
3. From the drop-down menu, specify the view size by selecting Whole Page or Enlarge
View, and set Current Page.
4. After the confirmation, select Close to close the preview screen.
Stopping the Scan Job
1. While a scan job is in process, Press either the Stop button on the control panel or
select Delete on the touch screen.
2. Select Delete.
3. If Delete does not appear on the screen, press the Job Status button on the Control
Panel.
4. Select the job to cancel and select Delete.
Scan Settings
1. While your scan job is scanning, you can change settings to that job by selecting
Next Original.
2. Select Change Settings.
3. Select the appropriate section and make select features. The following features can
be adjusted:
• Color Scanning
• 2 Sided Scanning
• Original Type
• Image Options (Lighten/Darken)
• Image Enhancement
• Resolution
• Quality/File Size
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
5-3
Scan
• Shadow Suppression
• Original Orientation
• Original Size
• Edge Erase
• Book Scanning
• Reduce/Enlarge
4. After your changes are complete, select Start.
Scan Settings
The following settings can be set for scan jobs.
• Color Settings
• Original Type
• Resolution
• Lighten/Darken
• Original Orientation
• 2 Sided Scanning
• Original Size
Resolution
You can select preset resolution settings.
1. From the Advanced Settings tab, select Resolution...
2. Specify the image resolution.
3. Select Save.
Note
When File Format > MRC High Compression or OCR is set to On, only 200 dpi and
300 dpi are available.
Lighten/Darken
You can use the up/down buttons to adjust the density settings.
You can select the output type desired.
5-4
User Guide
Scan
Original Orientation
The document orientation needs to be set to indicate the top of the document.
1. From the Copy tab screen, select the Layout Adjustment tab.
2. Select Original Orientation...
3. Select the orientation in accordance with the document that is loaded.
4. Select Save to save the changes.
Note
If the Original Orientation differs from the actual document orientation, the machine
may mistakenly detect the wrong side as the head of the document.
Original Size
You can specify the size of the document when scanning standard and custom sized
documents or when making copies at a size different from that of the currently loaded
document.
1. From the Copy tab screen, select the Layout Adjustment option.
2. Select the Original Size button.
3. Select the actual size of the document from the options displayed.
4. If you select a Manual Size Input, specify values for the X and Y directions.
5. Select Save to save the changes.
Note
If the document size cannot be detected, a screen for inputting the document size
is displayed.
E-mail
You can scan a document and send the scanned data as an e-mail attachment.
1. Select E-mail from the Service Home screen.
2. From the E-mail tab screen, select New Recipient... .
- OR 3. Select Address book...to search for and specify recipients in the address book.
4. If you wish to add the machine as a recipient, select Add Me.
5. If you wish to remove or change a recipient, select the applicable recipient and then
select Remove or Edit... from the pop-up menu.
6. Select Subject... to enter and save the E-mail subject by using the keyboard screen.
7. Select Message... to enter and save the E-mail message by using the keyboard screen.
8. Set the various scan features.
9. As needed, select the Advanced Settings tab and set and save the advanced settings.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
5-5
Scan
10. As needed, select the Layout Adjustment tab and set and save the layout
adjustments.
11. Select, set and save the various options from the Email Options tab.
12. Press Start on the control panel.
Note
The Mail Delivery Notification (MDN) and Split Send features in the Output Format
screen are only available when using the E-mail feature.
Address Book
1. From the E-mail option on the Services Home screen, select Address Book.
2. Select a Recipient from the address list. Search for an address if needed.
• List all public entries: Displays the local address list.
• Search Public: Searches recipients in the local address list.
• Search Network: Searches recipients in the remote address list.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Specify the To, CC, or BCC.
Use the scroll-bar to navigate the Name list.
If needed, select Details to display the Details screen.
Select Close.
Adding E-mail Recipients:
1. From the E-mail tab, select New Recipient...
2. Enter the new recipient(s). You can select +Add to add another recipient.
3. Select Close.
Removing E-mail Recipients
1. From the E-mail tab, select the recipient to be deleted in the Recipient(s) list.
2. Select Remove from the menu.
Subject
You can enter the Subject containing up to 128 characters for the e-mail.
1. From the E-mail tab, select Subject...
2. Use the keyboard to enter the e-mail subject.
3. Select Save.
Message Contents
You can enter the Message contents containing up to 128 characters for the e-mail.
1. From the E-mail tab, select Message...
2. Use the keyboard to enter a brief message.
5-6
User Guide
Scan
3. Select Save.
Preview Scanned Image
1. Select Email from the Services Home window.
2. On the Email window, select the Preview check box.
3. Preview the scanned images after the document is scanned.
Selecting an Output Color
You can set the output color to scan a document.
1. Select Color Scanning from the current scanning edit window.
2. Select a Color Option.
• Auto Detect: The color of the document is determined automatically; the machine
scans in full color when the document is colored; otherwise, scans in monochrome.
• Color: Select this option to scan a color document.
• Black & White: Scans a document in monochrome two tones. You can select the
document type in Original Type.
• Grayscale: Scans a document in grayscale. Adds shades to monochrome, creating
intermediate tones that change gradually. Suited to documents containing
gradations that cannot be reproduced with monochrome (2-color tone).
Scan Both Sides of a Document
You can scan a 1-sided or 2-sided document on one or both sides of paper. By setting
the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.
1. Select 2 Sided Scanning from the current scanning edit window.
2. Select an option.
• 1 Sided: Select this option to scan only one side of the document.
• 2 Sided (Head to Head): Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided
document are in the same orientation.
• 2 Sided (Head to Toe): Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided document
are in opposite orientations.
• More: Displays the 2 Sided Scanning window.
3. If More is selected, the 2 Sided Scanning window opens. Select an option.
• 1 Sided: Select this option to scan only one side of the document.
• 2 Sided: Select this option to scan both sides of the document.
• Originals: This option is displayed when 2 Sided is selected.
• Head to Head: Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided document are in
the same orientation.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
5-7
Scan
• Head to Toe: Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided document are in
opposite orientations.
Original Type
When you select Black & White in Color Scanning, you must then select the document
type.
On the current Scanning edit window, select Original Type and select an option.
• Photo & Text: Select this option when scanning a document that contains both
text and photos. The machine automatically identifies text and photo areas to
scan each area with optimum quality.
• Text: Select this option when scanning text clearly.
• Photo: Select this option when scanning photos.
Scan Presets
There are various scan presets that can be chosen.
• Sharing and Printing: This setting is best used for sharing files to be viewed on screen
and for printing most standard business documents. Using this setting results in small
file sizes and higher image quality.
• Archival Record: This setting is best used for standard business documents that are
stored for record keeping purposes. Using this setting results in the smallest file size
and normal image quality.
• OCR: This setting is best used for documents that are processed by optical character
recognizing software. Using this setting results in large file sizes and the highest
image quality.
• Highest Quality Print: This setting is best used for documents that contain detailed
graphics and photos. Using this setting results in large file sizes and maximum image
quality.
• Simple Scan: This setting is best used for faster processing but may result in
excessively large file sizes. Use this setting to apply the minimal amount of image
processing and compression.
5-8
User Guide
Scan
Network Scanning
On the Network Scanning window, you can scan documents after specifying a file (job
template) saving scanning conditions, information on the forwarding destination server,
and others. This feature creates job templates on a computer using CentreWare Internet
Services. Scanned data is converted to the format specified in a job template, and is
automatically sent to a server. The machine allows you to automatically retrieve job
templates stored in a server.
When Scan to Home is enabled, and when the Remote Access feature is available, the
scanned document can be transferred to a different destination according to an
authenticated user.
Preview Scanned Images of a Job
1. Scan the images and select job features.
2. While scanning, select Preview to preview the last page that was scanned.
3. From the drop-down menu, specify the view size by selecting Whole Page or Enlarge
View, and set Current Page.
4. After the confirmation, select Close to close the preview screen.
Selecting an Output Color
You can set the output color to scan a document.
1. Select Color Scanning from the current scanning edit window.
2. Select a Color Option.
• Auto Detect: The color of the document is determined automatically; the machine
scans in full color when the document is colored; otherwise, scans in monochrome.
• Color: Select this option to scan a color document.
• Black & White: Scans a document in monochrome two tones. You can select the
document type in Original Type.
• Grayscale: Scans a document in grayscale. Adds shades to monochrome, creating
intermediate tones that change gradually. Suited to documents containing
gradations that cannot be reproduced with monochrome (2-color tone).
Scan Both Sides of a Document
You can scan a 1-sided or 2-sided document on one or both sides of paper. By setting
the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.
1. Select 2 Sided Scanning from the current scanning edit window.
2. Select an option.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
5-9
Scan
• 1 Sided: Select this option to scan only one side of the document.
• 2 Sided (Head to Head): Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided
document are in the same orientation.
• 2 Sided (Head to Toe): Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided document
are in opposite orientations.
• More: Displays the 2 Sided Scanning window.
3. If More is selected, the 2 Sided Scanning window opens. Select an option.
• 1 Sided: Select this option to scan only one side of the document.
• 2 Sided: Select this option to scan both sides of the document.
• Originals: This option is displayed when 2 Sided is selected.
• Head to Head: Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided document are in
the same orientation.
• Head to Toe: Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided document are in
opposite orientations.
Original Type
When you select Black & White in Color Scanning, you must then select the document
type.
On the current Scanning edit window, select Original Type and select an option.
• Photo & Text: Select this option when scanning a document that contains both
text and photos. The machine automatically identifies text and photo areas to
scan each area with optimum quality.
• Text: Select this option when scanning text clearly.
• Photo: Select this option when scanning photos.
Scan Presets
There are various scan presets that can be chosen.
• Sharing and Printing: This setting is best used for sharing files to be viewed on screen
and for printing most standard business documents. Using this setting results in small
file sizes and higher image quality.
• Archival Record: This setting is best used for standard business documents that are
stored for record keeping purposes. Using this setting results in the smallest file size
and normal image quality.
• OCR: This setting is best used for documents that are processed by optical character
recognizing software. Using this setting results in large file sizes and the highest
image quality.
5-10
User Guide
Scan
• Highest Quality Print: This setting is best used for documents that contain detailed
graphics and photos. Using this setting results in large file sizes and maximum image
quality.
• Simple Scan: This setting is best used for faster processing but may result in
excessively large file sizes. Use this setting to apply the minimal amount of image
processing and compression.
Scan to PC
The Scan to PC service allows you to scan documents and send the scanned data to a
network computer using the FTP or SMB protocol.
Transfer Protocol
1. From the Scan to PC option, select Transfer Protocol.
2. Select FTP, SMB, or SMB (UNC Format) as a forwarding protocol.
• FTP: Transfers using the FTP protocol.
• SMB: Transfers using the SMB protocol
SMB (UNC Format):Transfers using the SMB protocol (UNC Format).UNC stands
for Universal Naming Convention and its format is as follows:\\host name\shared
name\directory name
3. Select Save.
Address Book
1. From the E-mail option on the Services Home screen, select Address Book.
2. Select a Recipient from the address list. Search for an address if needed.
• List all public entries: Displays the local address list.
• Search Public: Searches recipients in the local address list.
• Search Network: Searches recipients in the remote address list.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Specify the To, CC, or BCC.
Use the scroll-bar to navigate the Name list.
If needed, select Details to display the Details screen.
Select Close.
Browse Network for PC
Specify a destination pc by browsing your network.
Selecting Browse displays a hierarchy consisting of available server names and folders.
1. Select Scan to PC from Services Home.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
5-11
Scan
2. Select Browse.
3. Select the destination for saving the data. To locate a file, select Previous or to move
to another level and view other destinations, select Next.
Specify Destination
Use this option to specify a destination PC using the screen keyboard, Enter information
in the fields provided for the selected protocol, to specify a forwarding destination.
1. On the Scan to PC window, select in the Server section of the window.
2. Enter information to identify the server using the keyboard displayed on the screen.
You can also select Address Book to locate information.
3. For the Server name, enter a server name or IP address. When the save location is in
the DFS namespace on Windows, enter a domain name or server name. Up to 64
characters are allowed.
4. Select in the Shared Name section of the window and enter a shared name. When
the save location is in the DFS namespace on Windows, enter a root name. Up to 64
characters. This option is only available when you select SMB in Transfer Protocol.
5. Select in the Save In section of the window and enter a directory path. When the
save location is in the DFS namespace on Windows, enter a folder name. Up to 128
characters. This option is only available when you select FTP or SMB in Transfer
Protocol.
When you select SMB (UNC Format) in Transfer Protocol, the following directory
path: "\\Host Name\Shared Name\Directory Name".
6. Click in the User Name section of the window then enter the user name of the
computer you are forwarding to. When a user name is not required for the destination,
this field can be skipped.
7. Select in the Password section of the window and enter the password for the user
name. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
Scan Presets
There are various scan presets that can be chosen.
• Sharing and Printing: This setting is best used for sharing files to be viewed on screen
and for printing most standard business documents. Using this setting results in small
file sizes and higher image quality.
• Archival Record: This setting is best used for standard business documents that are
stored for record keeping purposes. Using this setting results in the smallest file size
and normal image quality.
• OCR: This setting is best used for documents that are processed by optical character
recognizing software. Using this setting results in large file sizes and the highest
image quality.
• Highest Quality Print: This setting is best used for documents that contain detailed
graphics and photos. Using this setting results in large file sizes and maximum image
quality.
5-12
User Guide
Scan
• Simple Scan: This setting is best used for faster processing but may result in
excessively large file sizes. Use this setting to apply the minimal amount of image
processing and compression.
Store to Folder
Use the Store to Folder option to scan documents and save the scanned data in a folder
of the machine.
Note
Folders must be created before using the Store to Folder feature. Refer to the System
Administration Guide for detailed information and instruction on creating folders.
Selecting an Output Color
You can set the output color to scan a document.
1. Select Color Scanning from the current scanning edit window.
2. Select a Color Option.
• Auto Detect: The color of the document is determined automatically; the machine
scans in full color when the document is colored; otherwise, scans in monochrome.
• Color: Select this option to scan a color document.
• Black & White: Scans a document in monochrome two tones. You can select the
document type in Original Type.
• Grayscale: Scans a document in grayscale. Adds shades to monochrome, creating
intermediate tones that change gradually. Suited to documents containing
gradations that cannot be reproduced with monochrome (2-color tone).
Scan Both Sides of a Document
You can scan a 1-sided or 2-sided document on one or both sides of paper. By setting
the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.
1. Select 2 Sided Scanning from the current scanning edit window.
2. Select an option.
• 1 Sided: Select this option to scan only one side of the document.
• 2 Sided (Head to Head): Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided
document are in the same orientation.
• 2 Sided (Head to Toe): Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided document
are in opposite orientations.
• More: Displays the 2 Sided Scanning window.
3. If More is selected, the 2 Sided Scanning window opens. Select an option.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
5-13
Scan
• 1 Sided: Select this option to scan only one side of the document.
• 2 Sided: Select this option to scan both sides of the document.
• Originals: This option is displayed when 2 Sided is selected.
• Head to Head: Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided document are in
the same orientation.
• Head to Toe: Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided document are in
opposite orientations.
Original Type
When you select Black & White in Color Scanning, you must then select the document
type.
On the current Scanning edit window, select Original Type and select an option.
• Photo & Text: Select this option when scanning a document that contains both
text and photos. The machine automatically identifies text and photo areas to
scan each area with optimum quality.
• Text: Select this option when scanning text clearly.
• Photo: Select this option when scanning photos.
Preview Scanned Images of a Job
1. Scan the images and select job features.
2. While scanning, select Preview to preview the last page that was scanned.
3. From the drop-down menu, specify the view size by selecting Whole Page or Enlarge
View, and set Current Page.
4. After the confirmation, select Close to close the preview screen.
Store to USB
The Store to USB feature allows you to scan documents and save the scanned data to
a USB memory device.
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory slot on the control panel of the
printer.
2. Select Store to USB .
If the USB Detected window does not display, then select Services Home button and
then select the Store to USB option.
3. Select Save in and select a folder for saving the data.
4. Select Save.
5. Select Preview to view the scanned images while you are scanning the document or
preview saved files.
5-14
User Guide
Scan
6. Select the Color Scanning option to set the output color to scan a document. You
can choose Auto Detect, Color, Black & White, or Grayscale.
7. Select 2 Sided Scanning to automatically scan both sides of a 2-sided document. If
you select the binding style, the print job will scan both sides in the same orientation.
8. Select Original Type to identify the type of document. Select Photo & Text, Text, or
Photo.
9. Select Scan Presets. Select Sharing & Printing, Archive Record, OCR, High Quality
Printing, or Simple Scan.
Using a USB Storage Device
A commercially available Memory Card Reader with a single slot can be used for this
feature, but the safe performance of this reader is not guaranteed. When a Memory
Card Reader with multiple slots is used, only one particular slot is available.
The following USB memory devices are supported:
• A formatted USB memory device
• A USB 2.0 compliant memory device (USB 1.1 is not supported.)
• A USB memory device with a storage capacity of up to 128 GB
A USB memory device encrypted with software is not supported.
When a USB memory device is inserted into the USB memory slot during the Energy
Saver mode, the touch screen does not light. After exiting the Energy Saver mode by
pressing the Energy Saver button, insert the USB memory device again or select Store
to USB on the Services Home screen.
Before removing the USB memory device, make sure that the screen indicating that
data is being transferred is not displayed. If you remove the USB memory device while
the data is being stored, the data in the device may be damaged. You can also view the
[Job Status] screen to confirm if the data has been stored to the USB memory device.
Save using the USB Memory Device (optional)
The Store to USB is an optional service that allows you to scan documents and save the
scanned data to a USB memory device.
Use the following USB memory devices:
• A formatted USB memory device
• A USB 2.0 compliant memory device (USB 1.1 is not supported.)
• A USB memory device with a storage capacity of up to 128 GB
To save using the USB, perform the following:
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory slot on the control panel.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
5-15
Scan
2. The USB Memory Device Detected window should appear. If this window does not
appear, select the Services Home button and select Store to USB.
3. Select Save In.
4. Select a folder to for saving the data.
5. Select Save.
If you do not specify the file storage location, the scanned data is saved in the root
directory.
Removing the USB Device
Before removing the USB memory device, make sure that the screen indicating that
data is being transferred is not displayed. If you remove the USB memory device while
the data is being stored, the data in the device may be damaged. You can also view the
Job Status screen to confirm if the data has been stored to the USB memory device.
Display Details of Storage in USB
1. Select Store to USB on the Services Home window.
2. Select Details.
3. The folder and file names in all directories to be saved are displayed.
Preview Scanned Images of a Job
1. Scan the images and select job features.
2. While scanning, select Preview to preview the last page that was scanned.
3. From the drop-down menu, specify the view size by selecting Whole Page or Enlarge
View, and set Current Page.
4. After the confirmation, select Close to close the preview screen.
Selecting an Output Color
You can set the output color to scan a document.
1. Select Color Scanning from the current scanning edit window.
2. Select a Color Option.
• Auto Detect: The color of the document is determined automatically; the machine
scans in full color when the document is colored; otherwise, scans in monochrome.
• Color: Select this option to scan a color document.
• Black & White: Scans a document in monochrome two tones. You can select the
document type in Original Type.
• Grayscale: Scans a document in grayscale. Adds shades to monochrome, creating
intermediate tones that change gradually. Suited to documents containing
gradations that cannot be reproduced with monochrome (2-color tone).
5-16
User Guide
Scan
Scan Both Sides of a Document
You can scan a 1-sided or 2-sided document on one or both sides of paper. By setting
the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.
1. Select 2 Sided Scanning from the current scanning edit window.
2. Select an option.
• 1 Sided: Select this option to scan only one side of the document.
• 2 Sided (Head to Head): Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided
document are in the same orientation.
• 2 Sided (Head to Toe): Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided document
are in opposite orientations.
• More: Displays the 2 Sided Scanning window.
3. If More is selected, the 2 Sided Scanning window opens. Select an option.
• 1 Sided: Select this option to scan only one side of the document.
• 2 Sided: Select this option to scan both sides of the document.
• Originals: This option is displayed when 2 Sided is selected.
• Head to Head: Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided document are in
the same orientation.
• Head to Toe: Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided document are in
opposite orientations.
Original Type
When you select Black & White in Color Scanning, you must then select the document
type.
On the current Scanning edit window, select Original Type and select an option.
• Photo & Text: Select this option when scanning a document that contains both
text and photos. The machine automatically identifies text and photo areas to
scan each area with optimum quality.
• Text: Select this option when scanning text clearly.
• Photo: Select this option when scanning photos.
File Format
You can select a file format for scanned data.
1. From the scan window, select File Format and select the appropriate file format for
the output data.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
5-17
Scan
• TIFF/JPEG Auto Select: Automatically selects JPEG or TIFF. The file format is
determined for each page. JPEG for full-color and grayscale pages, and TIFF for
monochrome pages.
• TIFF: Saves scanned data in the TIFF format.
• JPEG: Saves scanned data in the JPEG format. This option is selectable when either
Color or Grayscale is selected in Color Scanning.
• PDF: Saves scanned data in the PDF format.
• DocuWorks: Saves scanned data in the DocuWorks format.
• More: Displays the File Format window.
2. If More was selected, make a selection on the additional File Format window. In
addition to the previously listed file formats, you can also select:
• Compression Method: Allows you to select a compression method for scanned
image data.
• MRC High Compression: Allows you to save the PDF, DocuWorks, and XPS files
with high compression.
• Searchable Text: Allows you to select whether to perform character recognition
in the PDF and DocuWorks files.
• Add Thumbnail: Allows you to attach thumbnails to the DocuWorks and XPS files
when DocuWorks or XPS is selected. A thumbnail is a reduced, small file size image
that helps you check the file contents.
• Single File for Each Page: Saves each page as a single file in the specified format.
• Optimize For Quick Web View: Optimizes the PDF file so that it is displayed faster
on a web browser.
Send to Folder
Scan To
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel or select the login information field
on the touch screen.
2. Enter the user ID.
3. Select Store & Send Link on the Services Home screen.
4. The system automatically obtains the pre-registered e-mail address of the
authenticated user, and it is displayed in the Scan To section.
From
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel or select the login information field
on the touch screen.
2. Enter the user ID.
5-18
User Guide
Scan
3. Select Store & Send Link on the Services Home screen.
4. The system automatically obtains the pre-registered e-mail address of the
authenticated user.
Subject
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel or select the login information field
on the touch screen.
2. Enter the user ID.
3. Select Store & Send Link on the Services Home screen.
4. Select Subject.
5. Enter a subject with up to 128 characters using the displayed keyboard.
Message
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel or select the login information field
on the touch screen.
2. Enter the user ID.
3. Select Store & Send Link on the Services Home screen.
4. Select Message.
5. Enter a message with up to 512 characters using the displayed keyboard.
Selecting an Output Color
You can set the output color to scan a document.
1. Select Color Scanning from the current scanning edit window.
2. Select a Color Option.
• Auto Detect: The color of the document is determined automatically; the machine
scans in full color when the document is colored; otherwise, scans in monochrome.
• Color: Select this option to scan a color document.
• Black & White: Scans a document in monochrome two tones. You can select the
document type in Original Type.
• Grayscale: Scans a document in grayscale. Adds shades to monochrome, creating
intermediate tones that change gradually. Suited to documents containing
gradations that cannot be reproduced with monochrome (2-color tone).
Scan Both Sides of a Document
You can scan a 1-sided or 2-sided document on one or both sides of paper. By setting
the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.
1. Select 2 Sided Scanning from the current scanning edit window.
2. Select an option.
• 1 Sided: Select this option to scan only one side of the document.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
5-19
Scan
• 2 Sided (Head to Head): Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided
document are in the same orientation.
• 2 Sided (Head to Toe): Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided document
are in opposite orientations.
• More: Displays the 2 Sided Scanning window.
3. If More is selected, the 2 Sided Scanning window opens. Select an option.
• 1 Sided: Select this option to scan only one side of the document.
• 2 Sided: Select this option to scan both sides of the document.
• Originals: This option is displayed when 2 Sided is selected.
• Head to Head: Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided document are in
the same orientation.
• Head to Toe: Select this option when both sides of the 2-sided document are in
opposite orientations.
Preview Scanned Image
1. Select Email from the Services Home window.
2. On the Email window, select the Preview check box.
3. Preview the scanned images after the document is scanned.
Web Services for Devices (WSD)
The Store to WSD service allows you to scan documents set on the machine from a
network computer. This is optional.
How to store to WSD
1. On the Services Home window, select Store to WSD (Web Services on Device).
2. In the Start Scan Job From section, select where to start a scan job. You will select
either Computer (a request will be sent from a network computer) or This Device
(from the current machine).
3. If you choose to use Computer, then load the document onto the document glass
or into the document feeder and select Operate from Computer.
4. Operate scanning from a network computer by using an application which supports
the image loading feature (Windows Fax & Scan is an application). Scan according
to the application being used. The scanned data will be sent to the specified computer.
5. Remove your originals and select OK.
6. If you choose to use This Device, load the document on the document glass or into
the document feeder and select the destination from the List of Computer and select
Start.
7. The scanned data will be saved at the specified destination.
5-20
User Guide
Scan
WSD Starting a Scan Job
The Store to WSD service allows you to scan documents set on the machine from a
network computer. It also allows you to save the scanned data to a network computer.
You can scan documents set on the machine by sending a request from a network
computer.
1. Select Store to WSD on the Services Home screen.
2. Select Computer.
3. Load the document on the document glass or in the document feeder, and select
Operate From Computer.
4. The standby screen is displayed on the touch screen.
5. Operate scan from a network computer. To operate scan from a network computer,
use application which supports image loading feature such as Windows Fax and
Scan. The following describes the method using Windows Fax and Scan with Windows
7.
6. After being scanned, the scanned data is forwarded to the specified computer.
WSD Storing Data from a Network Computer
You can forward the data scanned with the command from the machine to a specified
computer on the network.
1. Select Store to WSD on the Services Home window.
2. Load the document on the document glass or in the document feeder, and select
This Device.
3. Computer names and 5 processing methods are displayed in the List of Computers.
Select destination from the list in accordance with the intended use.
4. Press the Start button.
5. The scanned date will be forwarded to the specified destination.
6. Check the forwarded data on the destination computer.
Advanced Settings tab
You can set advanced setting options from the Advanced Settings tab.
1. Select E-mail from the All Services screen.
2. Select the Advanced Settings tab.
3. As needed, select the applicable options:
•
•
•
•
Image Options
Image Enhancement
Resolution
Quality/File Size
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
5-21
Scan
• Photographs
• Shadow Suppression
• Color Space
Image Options
• Lighten/Darken:
This option provides manual control to adjust the lightness or darkness of the scanned
images. Select the Down scroll button to darken the scanned image from light originals
such as pencil images. Select the Up scroll button to lighten the scanned image from
dark originals such as half tones or originals with colored backgrounds.
• Sharpness
This option controls the balance between sharp text and moiré (patterns within the
image). Move the slider control down (Soften) to produce an image with a smooth,
uniform appearance (ideally suited for photographic scanned images). Move the
slider control up (Sharpen) to produce an image with better quality text or line art.
• Saturation
This option allows colors to become more or less vivid. To make the colors on your
output more vivid, move the slide bar up. To create a less vivid output, or a pastel
effect, move the slide bar down. To keep the output normal, do not adjust the
saturation.
Image Enhancement
1. Select Image Enhancement.
2. Set Background Suppression and Contrast.
• Off: Scans the document backgrounds with no filtering.
• Auto Suppression: When Color Scanning is set to Black & White, the background
of a document printed on colored paper, such as newspaper, will be suppressed.
When Color Scanning is set to Color, the background of a document printed on
white-color paper will be suppressed.
• Contrast: Allows you to select a contrast level from five levels between [Less] and
[More]. Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the difference between light and
dark areas greater; light areas become lighter and dark areas darker. In contrast,
selecting a lower cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark
areas smaller.
3. Select Shadow Suppression.
4. Select Auto Suppression.
5-22
User Guide
Scan
Resolution
You can select preset resolution settings.
1. From the Advanced Settings tab, select Resolution...
2. Specify the image resolution.
3. Select Save.
Note
When File Format > MRC High Compression or OCR is set to On, only 200 dpi and
300 dpi are available.
Quality/File Size
This feature allows you to select the ratio of data compression for color and grayscale
scanned images.
Note
This feature is unavailable whenever Black and White is selected.
1. From the Advanced Settings tab, select Quality/File Size...
2. Use the right or left button to specify the output quality/file size.
Note
Only three compression levels are available when MRC High Compression is enabled
under PDF Multiple Pages per File in File Format.
3. Select Save.
Photographs
The Photographs enhancement feature is available if Color is selected from the Color
Scanning section of a tab screen.
1. From the Advanced Settings tab, select Photographs...
2. Select Off or Enhance Photographs:
• Off: Disables the feature.
• Enhance Photographs: Enhances images scanned from color photographs with
Output Color set to Full Color.
3. Select Save.
Note
When Enhance Photographs is selected, Shadow Suppression and Background
Suppression are not available.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
5-23
Scan
Shadow Suppression
You can use the Shadow Suppression feature to hide background colors and image
bleed-through.
1. From the Advanced Settings tab, select Shadow Suppression...
2. Select No Suppression or Auto Suppression.
3. Select Save.
Color Space
The Color Space feature is available if Color is selected from the Color Scanning section
of a tab screen.
1. From the Advanced Settings tab, select Color Space.
2. Select sRGB or Device Color Space.
3. Select Save.
Note
When this Device Color Space is selected, the factory default values are used or the
Image Options, Shadow Suppression, and Image Enhancement features.
Layout Adjustment tab
You can specify layout adjustment settings from the Layout Adjustment tab.
1. Select E-mail from the All Services screen.
2. Select the Layout Adjustment tab.
3. Select the applicable option:
•
•
•
•
•
Original Orientation
Original Size
Edge Erase
Book Scanning
Reduce/Enlarge
Original Orientation
The document orientation needs to be set to indicate the top of the document.
1. From the Copy tab screen, select the Layout Adjustment tab.
2. Select Original Orientation...
3. Select the orientation in accordance with the document that is loaded.
4. Select Save to save the changes.
5-24
User Guide
Scan
Note
If the Original Orientation differs from the actual document orientation, the machine
may mistakenly detect the wrong side as the head of the document.
Original Size
You can specify the size of the document when scanning standard and custom sized
documents or when making copies at a size different from that of the currently loaded
document.
1. From the Copy tab screen, select the Layout Adjustment option.
2. Select the Original Size button.
3. Select the actual size of the document from the options displayed.
4. If you select a Manual Size Input, specify values for the X and Y directions.
5. Select Save to save the changes.
Note
If the document size cannot be detected, a screen for inputting the document size
is displayed.
Edge Erase
When scanning with the document-feeder in the open position or from a book, you can
remove the black shadows along the edges using the Edge Erase feature.
1. From the Layout Adjustments tab, select Edge Erase.
2. Select All Edges or Individual Edges:
• All Edges: Erases the same amount of length from all four edges of your
document. The edge erase amount is specified by the System Administrator. If
you do not want to erase any edges, select [Individual Edges] and specify 0 for
both the top and bottom and left and right edges.
• Individual Edges: Allows you to specify the lengths to be erased from the top
and bottom and left and right edges of your document. Up to 50 mm (2 inches)
can be specified to each field.
3. For individual edges, you can use the up or down buttons to set the values.
4. Select the applicable Original Orientation:
• Upright Images - Selects the vertical orientation, where the top of the document
is orientated towards the back of the machine.
• Sideways Images - Selects the horizontal orientation, where the top of the
document is orientated towards the left of the machine.
5. Select Save.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
5-25
Scan
Book Scanning
The Book Scanning feature allows you to scan facing pages of a document on separate
sheets of paper in page-number order.
1. From the Layout Adjustments tab, select Book Scanning.
2. From the Book Scanning screen, select the features.
3. Binding Edge Erase erases the center binding area of the book that tends to be
shadowed due to the fold in the pages. Use the Left or Right buttons to set the
dimensions.
4. Select Save to save the changes.
Tip
You cannot use the document feeder when using this feature.
Note
A document of non-standard size or undetectable size may not be divided exactly
into two equal sizes.
Reduce/Enlarge
The Reduce/Enlarge feature allows you specify a reduction or enlargement value for the
scanned document.
1. From the Layout Adjustments tab, select Reduce/Enlarge...
2. Select from:
a) Proportional% (default):
•
•
•
•
In the Variable% area, specify the ratio with the up and down buttons.
You can also select a preselect value from the Preset% area.
Select Save to save the changes.
Enter Output Size: Select from preset standard scanning ratios to set the
output size.
b) In the Output Size area, select the applicable preset.
c) Select Save to save the changes.
Filing Options
File Name
You can enter and save a file name.
1. From the E-mail Options tab, select File Name...
2. Use the keyboard to enter the file name.
3. Select Save to save the changes.
5-26
User Guide
Scan
File Format
You can select a file format for scanned data.
1. From the scan window, select File Format and select the appropriate file format for
the output data.
• TIFF/JPEG Auto Select: Automatically selects JPEG or TIFF. The file format is
determined for each page. JPEG for full-color and grayscale pages, and TIFF for
monochrome pages.
• TIFF: Saves scanned data in the TIFF format.
• JPEG: Saves scanned data in the JPEG format. This option is selectable when either
Color or Grayscale is selected in Color Scanning.
• PDF: Saves scanned data in the PDF format.
• DocuWorks: Saves scanned data in the DocuWorks format.
• More: Displays the File Format window.
2. If More was selected, make a selection on the additional File Format window. In
addition to the previously listed file formats, you can also select:
• Compression Method: Allows you to select a compression method for scanned
image data.
• MRC High Compression: Allows you to save the PDF, DocuWorks, and XPS files
with high compression.
• Searchable Text: Allows you to select whether to perform character recognition
in the PDF and DocuWorks files.
• Add Thumbnail: Allows you to attach thumbnails to the DocuWorks and XPS files
when DocuWorks or XPS is selected. A thumbnail is a reduced, small file size image
that helps you check the file contents.
• Single File for Each Page: Saves each page as a single file in the specified format.
• Optimize For Quick Web View: Optimizes the PDF file so that it is displayed faster
on a web browser.
Read Receipts
1. On the printer control panel, press the Services Home button.
2. Select the correct Scan option (Network Scanning, Send to Folder, and so on), then
select the Filing Options tab.
3. Select Read Receipts, then select On.
4. Select Save.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
5-27
Scan
File Name Conflict
You can resolve a file-name conflict by using the File Name Conflict option.
1. Select the Filing Options tab.
2. Select the File Name Conflict option.
3. Select the appropriate option:
• Do Not Save: Cancels the scan operation so that you may enter another file
name.
• Rename New File: Attaches a 4-digit number (0000-9999) to the end of the
duplicate file name and saves the file in the same directory.
• Overwrite Existing File: Deletes the existing file with the duplicate file name and
saves the new file with the specified file name in the same directory.
4. Select Save.
Email Options tab
Set e-mail options using the E-mail Options tab.
1. Select E-mail from the Services Home window.
2. Select the E-mail.
3. Select the applicable option:
•
•
•
•
•
File Name
File Format
Reply to
Split Send
Read Receipts
File Name
You can enter and save a file name.
1. From the E-mail Options tab, select File Name...
2. Use the keyboard to enter the file name.
3. Select Save to save the changes.
File Format
1. From the Scan window, select the Email Options tab.
2. Enter the File Name, File Format, Reply To, and Read Receipts sections.
5-28
User Guide
Scan
• TIFF/JPEG Auto Select: Automatically saves scanned data as TIFF or JPEG files.
Full color and grayscale scanned images are stored in the JPEG format, and
monochrome scanned images are saved in the TIFF format.
• PDF Images Multiple Pages per File: Saves multiple pages into a single file in the
PDF format.
• PDF/A: Saves scanned data in the PDF/A format; PDF/A format is used primarily
for archiving and long-term preservation.
• Optimize PDF for Fast Web: If you select one of the PDF file format options, the
Optimize PDF for Fast Web View option is available for selection.
• The Optimize PDF for Fast Web View feature allows the user to open and view
the first page of a multi-page PDF document within a web browser, while the
remainder of the document continues to load in the background. This may increase
the overall file size. Fast Web View restructures an Adobe PDF document for
page-at-a-time downloading (byte-serving) from web servers. With page-at-a-time
downloading, the web server sends only the requested page, rather than the entire
PDF document. This is especially important with large documents that can take
a long time to download from a server.
• Check with your web master to make sure that the web server software you use
supports page-at-time downloading. To ensure that the PDF documents on your
website appear in older browsers, you may also want to create HTML links (versus
ASP scripts or the POST method) to the PDF documents and keep path names, or
URLs, to the files at less than 256 characters.
• TIFF File for Each Page: Saves each page into a different file in the TIFF format.
• mTIFF Multiple Pages per File: Saves multiple pages into a single file in the TIFF
format.
• JPEG File for Each Page: Saves each page into a different file in the JPEG format.
• JPEG File for Each Page is not available when Color Scanning is set to Black &
White.
• XPS: Saves multiple pages into a single file in the XPS (XML Paper Specification)
format.
Reply to
Use the Reply to... feature to specify or search for a reply recipient.
1. From the E-mail Options tab, select Reply to...
2. Use the keyboard to enter or search for the applicable reply-to name.
3. Select Save to save the changes.
Read Receipts for Email
1.
2.
3.
4.
On the printer control panel, press the Services Home button.
Select E-mail, then select the E-mail Options tab.
Select Read Receipts, then select On.
Select Save.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
5-29
Scan
5-30
User Guide
6
Send from Folder
Folder Operating Procedure
Two types of folders are available: Scan & Other Jobs and Copy & Print Jobs. The folders
under Scan & Other Jobs allow you to store print files submitted by a computer and
scan files. These files stored in a folder can be sent by e-mail and be retrieved from a
network computer. You can also automate routine tasks, or register private folders and
shared folders separately.
The folders under Copy & Print Jobs allow you to store copy files and print files. You
can also save the files again and reprint them in a folder after editing the files or changing
their settings.
Selecting a Folder
The following describes how to select a folder under Copy & Print Jobs. Access to some
folders may be restricted, depending on the settings of the Authentication feature.
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. On the Send From Folder screen, select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
3. Select a folder displayed on the window or select one using Go to.
4. In the Go to section, a folder at the top will display when you enter the 3-digit folder
number with the numeric keypad.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
6-1
Send from Folder
Checking files in Copy & Print Job
You can check or operate files stored in a folder under Copy & Print Jobs. Both copy
and print files are displayed in folders under Copy & Print Jobs.
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. Select a folder under Copy & Print Jobs on the Send from Folder screen.
3. Select a file.
4. Select any option.
• Refresh: Displays the updated information.
• List: Lists the files stored in the folder, with their stored dates and pages.
• Thumbnail: Displays the images and names of the files stored in the folder.
• Number of Files: Displays the number of files stored in the selected folder.
• Select All: Allows you to select all the files in the folder. If you select [Select All]
again, all the files are deselected.
• Delete: Allows you to delete the selected files in the folder.
• Copy/Move: Previews the selected file to allow you to check its details, and copy
or move it to another folder.
• Edit Pages: Allows you to edit the files in the folder.
• Merge/Batch Print: Allows you to merge multiple files in the folder, and batch
print them.
• Change Settings/Print: Allows you to change the file settings before printing the
files.
Deleting Files in Copy & Print Jobs
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select Delete.
Select Delete.
Copying/Moving Files in Copy & Print Jobs
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
3. Select a file and select Copy/Move.
6-2
User Guide
Send from Folder
4. Select any option.
• View Size: Allows you to select whether to display the whole page or to enlarge
the image by 200%.
• Rotation: Allows you to select an angle to preview the image from Right 90
degrees, Left 90 degrees, and 180 degrees.
• Change File Name: Allows you to change the file name.
• Current Page: Allows you to specify a page to preview on the screen using [+] and
[-] or the numeric keypad.
• First Page Only: Allows you to print the first pages of files for confirmation.
• Copy: Allows you to copy files from one folder to another.
• Move: Allows you to move files from one folder to another.
Copy
You can copy files from one folder to another.
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
3. Select a file and select Copy/Move.
4. Select Copy.
5. Select a folder to which a file will be copied, and select Save.
Move
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select Copy/Move.
Select Move.
Select a folder to which a file will be moved, and select Save.
Editing Files
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select Edit Pages.
Select Delete Pages or Insert File/Separators.
Delete Pages
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
3. Select a file and select Edit Pages.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
6-3
Send from Folder
4. Select Delete Pages.
5. Use the numeric keypad to select the target page to be deleted and select Add to
Delete List.
6. Select Delete.
Insert Separators
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select Edit Pages.
Select Insert File/Separators.
Select a paper tray for separators to be inserted.
Use [+] and [-] or the numeric keypad to enter the number of separators to be inserted,
and then select Save.
Chapter Start and Insert File
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select Chapter Start + Insert File.
Select a file to be inserted, and select Save.
Select Insert File.
Select a file to be inserted, and select Save.
Edit List and Delete Pages
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select Edit Pages.
Select Edit List/Delete Pages
Use [+] and [-] or the numeric keypad to select a page to be deleted, and select Add
to Delete List.
6. Select Delete.
Merging/Batch Printing Files in Copy &
Print Jobs
You can merge multiple files stored in a folder under [Copy & Print Jobs], and batch print
them.
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
3. Select a file and select Merge/Batch Print.
6-4
User Guide
Send from Folder
4. Select any option, and specify the number of print sets using the numeric keypad.
5. Select Print.
File Details
Use this option to check the content of selected files.
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
3. Select a file and select an option from this window.
4. Select File Details.
5. Select any option, and specify the number of print sets using the numeric keypad.
• Merge: Displays the Merge window.
• Merge & Print: Displays the Merge & Print window.
• Print: Merges and then prints (multiple) selected files. The merged files are not
saved.
Merge
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select Merge/Batch Print.
Select Merge.
Select any option.
• Delete Source Files
• Keep Source Files
• Cancel
Merge and Print
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select Merge/Batch Print.
Select Merge & Print.
Select any option.
• Delete Source Files
• Keep Source Files
• Cancel
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
6-5
Send from Folder
Separators
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select Merge/Batch Print.
Select Separators.
Select any option.
• No Separators
• Blank Separators
• Printed Separators
• No Chapter Start
• Separator Tray
• Separator Quantity
Covers
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select an option.
Select Covers.
Select any option.
• Front Cover: Front covers can be attached to a merged file.
• Back Cover: Back covers can be attached to a merged file.
• Front Cover Quantity: Allows you to specify the number of blank sheets to be
used as front covers.
• Back Cover Quantity: Allows you to specify the number of blank sheets to be used
as back covers.
• Paper Supply: Select the trays for front and back covers from Front Cover Tray
and Back Cover Tray.
Watermark
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select an option.
Select Watermark.
Select any option.
• Control Number: Select whether to print control numbers.
6-6
User Guide
Send from Folder
• Starting Number: Enter a value of the control number in the range from 1 to
9999. Use up and down arrows or the numeric keypad to enter a starting page
number.
• Stored Watermarks: Select the text to be printed on copies.
• User Account Number: Select this check box to print a user account number.
• Date & Time: Select this check box to print the serial number of the machine.
• Serial Number: Allows you to program text effects.
File Name
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select an option.
Select File Name.
Enter a file name using the displayed keyboard.
Output
Use this option to program stapling/hole punching/Z fold settings before merging files.
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
3. Select a file and select an option.
4. Select Output.
5. Select any option.
• Staple
• Hole Punch
• Z Fold Half Sheet
• Output Destination/Offset
Annotations
You can add a comment, date, and page numbers onto copies.
You can also select a comment, date, and page numbers, and their print positions from
preset formats.
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
3. Select a file and select an option.
4. Select Annotations.
5. Select any option.
• Comment
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
6-7
Send from Folder
• Date Stamp
• Page Numbers
• Bates Stamp
Secure Watermark
Secure Watermark is a security management feature to embed a copy protection digital
code into a document, to restrict the document to be duplicated. The digital code enables
you to analyze "when," "from which machine," and "by whom" the document was output.
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
3. Select a file and select an option.
4. Select Secure Watermark.
5. Select any option.
• Off
• On
• Protection Code
• Stored Secure Watermarks: This screen allows you to embed hidden text into
documents. With this hidden text feature, the specified text is embedded in the
entire sheet. When you copy a document that has been copied with this hidden
text feature, the embedded text on the output appears in white regardless of
whether or not the Secure Watermark Kit (optional) is installed.
Printing Files in Copy & Print Jobs
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select Change Settings/Print.
Select any option, and specify the number of print sets using the numeric keypad.
File Details
Use this option to check the content of selected files.
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
3. Select a file and select an option from this window.
4. Select File Details.
5. Select any option, and specify the number of print sets using the numeric keypad.
• Merge: Displays the Merge window.
6-8
User Guide
Send from Folder
• Merge & Print: Displays the Merge & Print window.
• Print: Merges and then prints (multiple) selected files. The merged files are not
saved.
Output
Use this option to program stapling/hole punching/Z fold settings before merging files.
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
3. Select a file and select an option.
4. Select Output.
5. Select any option.
• Staple
• Hole Punch
• Z Fold Half Sheet
• Output Destination/Offset
Covers
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select an option.
Select Covers.
Select any option.
• Front Cover: Front covers can be attached to a merged file.
• Back Cover: Back covers can be attached to a merged file.
• Front Cover Quantity: Allows you to specify the number of blank sheets to be
used as front covers.
• Back Cover Quantity: Allows you to specify the number of blank sheets to be used
as back covers.
• Paper Supply: Select the trays for front and back covers from Front Cover Tray
and Back Cover Tray.
Folding
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select an option.
Select Folding.
Select any option.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
6-9
Send from Folder
• Last Saved Settings: Holds settings at the time when the file was saved.
• No Folding: Does not fold copies
• Z Fold: Folds copies in three with the printed side inside.
• C Fold: Folds copies in three with the printed side outside.
• Single Fold: Folds copies in half.
• Image Inside Fold: Folds copies so that the image is printed inside.
• Image Outside Fold: Folds copies so that the image is printed outside.
• Trimming: When the Square Fold & Trimmer Module (optional) is installed, this
option is displayed if you select [Single Fold]. Specify whether to trim the fore
edge of booklets.
2 Sided Printing
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select an option.
Select 2 Sided Printing.
Select any option.
• Last Saved Settings
• 1 Sided
• Head to Head: Select this option when the front and back sides of the document
are in the same orientation.
• Head to Toe: Select this option when the front and back sides of the document
are in opposite orientations.
Image Shift
Use this option to set a margin of white space on the top, bottom, left, and right of your
copy. If you make 2-sided copies, you can set the image shift for Side 1 and Side 2
individually.
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
3. Select a file and select an option.
4. Select Image Shift.
5. Select options.
Booklet Creation
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
3. Select a file and select an option.
6-10
User Guide
Send from Folder
4. Select Booklet Creation.
5. Select any option.
• Last Saved Settings
• Off
• Copy Booklet
• Covers
• Fold & Staple
• Paper Supply
Annotations
You can add a comment, date, and page numbers onto copies.
You can also select a comment, date, and page numbers, and their print positions from
preset formats.
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
3. Select a file and select an option.
4. Select Annotations.
5. Select any option.
• Comment
• Date Stamp
• Page Numbers
• Bates Stamp
Watermark
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select an option.
Select Watermark.
Select any option.
• Control Number: Select whether to print control numbers.
• Starting Number: Enter a value of the control number in the range from 1 to
9999. Use up and down arrows or the numeric keypad to enter a starting page
number.
• Stored Watermarks: Select the text to be printed on copies.
• User Account Number: Select this check box to print a user account number.
• Date & Time: Select this check box to print the serial number of the machine.
• Serial Number: Allows you to program text effects.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
6-11
Send from Folder
Face Up/Down Output
Use this option to select whether prints should be output facing up or down.
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
3. Select a file and select an option.
4. Select Face Up/Down Output.
5. Select any option.
• Last Saved Settings
• Auto: Automatically determines whether the copies should be output facing up
or down.
• Face Up: Copies are output facing up and delivered from the last page.
• Face down: Copies are output facing down and delivered from the last page.
• Face Up (Reverse Order): Copies are output facing up and delivered from the
first page.
Secure Watermark
Secure Watermark is a security management feature to embed a copy protection digital
code into a document, to restrict the document to be duplicated. The digital code enables
you to analyze "when," "from which machine," and "by whom" the document was output.
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
3. Select a file and select an option.
4. Select Secure Watermark.
5. Select any option.
• Off
• On
• Protection Code
• Stored Secure Watermarks: This screen allows you to embed hidden text into
documents. With this hidden text feature, the specified text is embedded in the
entire sheet. When you copy a document that has been copied with this hidden
text feature, the embedded text on the output appears in white regardless of
whether or not the Secure Watermark Kit (optional) is installed.
Add Tab Stock
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select Copy & Print Jobs, and then select a folder.
Select a file and select an option.
Select Add Tab Stock.
6-12
User Guide
Send from Folder
5. Select any option.
• Last Saved Settings
• On
• Off
• Number of Sheets
Selecting a folder under Scan & Other
Jobs
1. Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
2. On the Send from Folder screen, select Scan & Other Jobs and then select a folder.
Checking/Operating Files in Scan & Other
Jobs
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select a folder on the Send from Folder screen.
Select the display style from List and Thumbnail.
Select a file.
Select any option.
• Refresh
• List
• Thumbnail
• Number of Files
• Select All
• Delete
• File Details
• Job Flow Settings
• Print
• Batch Print
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
6-13
Send from Folder
Checking File Details in Scan & Other Jobs
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select a file on the Folder - File List screen.
Select File Details.
Select any option.
• Whole Page
• No Rotation
• Change File Name
• Current Page
Printing Files in Scan & Other Jobs
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select files on the Folder - File List screen.
Select Print or Batch Print.
Select any option. Enter the number of print sets using the numeric keypad, if
necessary.
5. Select Print.
Configuring/Starting Job Flow
Job Flow is a feature that allows you to register transfer settings of scan data, such as
a transfer method and destination, to simplify data-transfer tasks.
Job flow sheets are categorized into two types according to the target. One type of job
flow sheet targets files stored in folders, and the other type targets scan files. This section
describes the first type of job flow sheet, targeting files stored in folders.
A job flow operates files stored in a folder, and starts in either of the following ways: 1)
automatically start a job flow when a file is stored in a folder, or 2) select a job flow to
manually operate files stored in a folder.
To automatically start a job flow, you must make a link with a folder and a job flow
sheet in advance. Files are automatically processed with the job flow sheet when they
are stored in the linked folder.
6-14
User Guide
Send from Folder
Link Job Flow Sheet to Folder
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Send from Folder on the Services Home window.
Select a job flow sheet to link to.
Select Job Flow Settings.
Select Create/Change Link.
Select any option.
Job Flow Restrictions
A job flow sheet can be used by only one user, can be shared by multiple users, or can
be used for only certain folders.
Making Backups of Files in Folders
The Back-Up Tool for restored document allows you to back up documents stored in the
machine’s folders (mailboxes) onto your computer. You cannot use the machine while
making backups.
When using backup documents on this machine, make sure that all the feature settings
of the machine and the paper sizes/orientations of the paper trays are exactly the same
as when backup documents were created. If restoring backup documents, the machine
carries optional features that are different from the machine from which backup
documents were created, backup documents may not be printed out according to the
original settings.
Setting a Password
The Back-Up Tool for restored document requires the system administrator ID and
passcode when communicating with the machine. By default, the application is configured
with factory default system administrator ID and passcode.
If the system administrator ID and password used on the machine are changed from
the default settings, ensure that the ID and password on the Back-Up Tool application
are also changed. This ensures that that both IDs and passwords (on the machine and
the Back-Up Tool application) are identical.
1. Select a machine for which password is to be set, and select Device Communication
Settings from the Edit menu.
2. Enter the system administrator ID in System Administrator ID.
3. Enter the password in Passcode/Password and Confirm Passcode/Password.
4. Select OK.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
6-15
Send from Folder
6-16
User Guide
7
Job Flow
The User Interface (UI) screens shown in this guide may or may not reflect the screens
displayed on your system. The UI screens vary from system to system and from
marketplace to marketplace. Therefore, the UI screens in this guide are a representation
of the type of screens that may be seen on your particular system.
A Job Flow Sheet allows you to process documents that are stored in private mailboxes.
A Job Flow is started in the following ways:
• Automatically when a document is linked to a mailbox
• Manually selecting a Job Flow to act on documents stored in the mailbox.
To start a Job Flow, you must first link a mailbox with a specific Job Flow Sheet. When
a Job Flow Sheet is set to start automatically, documents are processed automatically
by the Job Flow when they appear in the mailbox.
The following conditions apply to Job Flow Sheets:
• Created Job Flow Sheets can be executed, modified, duplicated, or deleted only from
the private mailbox in which it was created.
• You can register the following types of document processing in a Job Flow Sheet:
• Specifying destinations (FTP, SMB, and e-mail)
• Specifying multiple destinations and batch processing
• Printing
The document processing types that you can register in a Job Flow Sheet depend on
how the documents are stored in a private mailbox. See the following chart:
Input
Output
Printer
E-Mail
FTP
SMB
Scan
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Print Stored
Yes
No
No
No
• Only the Job Flow Sheets that you have permission to execute are displayed.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
7-1
Job Flow
• The Job Flow Sheet feature is available only when the Network Scanning Kit is installed
on the machine.
Note
For additional Job Flow Sheet information, including Authentication, and Mailboxes,
see the System Administration Guide.
Job Flow Procedures
Creating a Job Flow Sheet
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the Machine Status button.
From the tab menu, select Tools and select Create Job Flow Sheet.
Select Create.
The Create New Job Flow Sheet screen allows you to enter the data necessary to
create a new Job Flow Sheet. Each listed option can be deleted or changed.
• Change Settings: Select this to confirm or change the setting values of the
selected items.
• Delete Settings: This deletes the setting values of all selected items. You will be
asked to confirm the delete process.
5. Select the following line items and then press Change Settings. Use the keypad
screen to enter information.
a) Name: Set the name for the job flow using a maximum of 128 characters
b) Description: Set the description of the job flow using a maximum of 256 characters
c) Keyword: Used to search for a Job Flow Sheet using a maximum of 12 characters.
For example, enter Accounting as a keyword to access any Job Flow Sheets that
contain Accounting in the Job Flow name
d) Send as E-mail: Specify the recipients for the e-mail. You can specify a total of
up to 100 addresses. Select from the address book numbers or by direct input by
using the keypad.
e) Address Book: The recipients can be specified from address book. The specified
recipient appears in Recipient Name/E-mail Address in the Send E-mail screen.
6. New Recipient: Specify a new recipient. The specified recipient appears in Recipient
Name/E-mail Address in the Mail Send screen. Select the item you want to change,
and select Change Settings to set:
• Subject: If desired, set a specific subject.
• Delete: This deletes all information for the selected recipients.
• Change Settings: Confirm or change the selected recipients as shown in the
following image.
7. File Format: Specify the output file format.
8. Resend Attempts: Set the amount of times you want to resend an E-mail or to turn
off the feature:
7-2
User Guide
Job Flow
9. Transfer via FTP (1) and Transfer via FTP (2): Specify the server where documents
are sent using FTP protocols.
10. Address Book: When the server address is registered in the address book, you can
specify the address from the address book. The specified address appears in the FTP
Transfer screen. Select one of Name, Server, Save in, User Name, or Password and
press the Enter Details button to display an input screen.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Name: 18 bytes maximum
Server: 64 bytes maximum
Save in: 128 bytes maximum
User Name: 32 bytes maximum
Password: 32 bytes maximum
File Format: Specify the output file format.
You can enter the amount of times you want the information resent using Resend
Attempts.
11. Transfer via SMB (1), Transfer via SMB (2): Specify the server where documents are
sent using SMB protocols. When the server address is registered in the address book,
you can specify the address from the address book. The specified address appears
in the SMB Transfer screen. Select one of Name, Server, Save in, User Name, or
Password and press the Enter Details button to display an input screen
• Select one of Name, Server, Shared Name, Save in, User Name, or Password and
press the button to display an input screen.
• The numbers of characters you can input are as follows:
• Name: 18 bytes maximum
• Server: 64 bytes maximum
• Shared Name: 18 bytes maximum
• Save in: 128 bytes maximum
• User Name: 32 bytes maximum
• Password: 32 bytes maximum
• Enter Details: You can confirm or change the selected recipients.
• File Format: Specify the output file format.
12. Selecting Print allows you to set options to print the linked Job Flow Sheet. Select
Off to disable this feature.
13. Select Save to keep your settings. To activate the Save option, you must enter values
in any of the following fields: Send as E-mail, Transfer via FTP, Transfer via SMB, Print.
14. View the newly created Job Flow Sheets and select Exit.
Linking a Job Flow Sheet with a Mailbox
You can link a mailbox to a Job Flow Sheet, which instructs how the documents in the
mailbox are processed.
1. Select the Machine Status button on the controller.
2. From the Tools tab, select Create Mailbox.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
7-3
Job Flow
3. Select a mailbox that is “Not in Use” then select Create/Delete.
4. On the New Mailbox - Password screen, you can enter a password for mailbox access.
The password must be entered once you start the Job Flow process. Enter a password
of up to 20 digits using the Numeric Keypad, then select a password restriction option:
• Always (All Operations): A password is required for all Job Flow Sheet access to
the mailbox.
• Save (Write): The password entry screen displays when an attempt is made to
edit any document in the mailbox.
• Print/Delete (Read): The password entry screen displays when an attempt is
made to print or delete any document in the mailbox.
Note
If you prefer not using a password, select the Off button. If you do not assign a
passcode, all users will be allowed access to the mailbox.
5. Select Save.
6. Enter the following information by selecting each menu bar and pressing Change
Settings:
• Mailbox Name: Enter a mailbox name of up to 20 characters using the keypad.
• Check Mailbox Passcode: Allows you to review and edit the mailbox passcode.
• Delete Documents After Retrieval: You can delete documents in the mailbox
after they are printed or retrieved, or after they are transferred and printed
through a Job Flow Sheet.
• Delete Expired Documents: Allows you to delete documents in the mailbox after
a preset period of time elapses. This time period is set by the System
Administrator.
• Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox: Select and go to the next step.
7. At the Link Job Flow to Mailbox screen, select the Create/Change Link button.
8. Select the Job Flow Sheet that you want to link and then select Save.
9. At the Link Job Flow to Mailbox screen:
• You can place a checkmark in Auto Start if you want the Job Flow Sheet to be
automatically executed when a new document is saved to the mailbox. If you
do not select Auto Start, you will need to press the Start button on the controller
to execute the linked Job Flow Sheet.
• Select Close.
Note
Selecting Cut Link at any time to remove Job Flow Sheet linkage.
10. The Job Flow Sheet has been linked to the mailbox. Select Close to exit to the Tools
tab.
7-4
User Guide
Job Flow
Starting a Job Flow Manually
You need to start a Job Flow manually if the Job Flow Sheet was not set to automatically
release when it was assigned to a mailbox.
1. Load the original document(s).
2. Select the Services Home button on the controller.
3. Select the Job Flow Sheets icon and if enabled by the System Administrator, select
OK.
4. Select a listed Job Flow Sheet.
5. Press the Start button. The job runs and is placed in a mailbox or appropriate server.
Job Flow Sheet Filtering
Job Flows can be filtered by authorization. See “Job Flow Sheet Types” in the System
Administration Guide for more information.
1. Press the Services Home button.
2. Select Job Flow Sheets and select OK.
3. Select Sheet Filtering.
4. The following filtering options are available:
a) Owner options:
• System Administrator - If this box is checked, the only Job Flow Sheets
available to the System Administrator are displayed.
• Non-System Administrator - If this box is checked, Job Flow Sheets displayed
do not include those available to the System Administrator.
• No Filtering - When both the System Administrator and Non-System
Administrator boxes are checked, all the Job Flow Sheets are displayed.
b) Target options: Place a check in each job type you want displayed.
5. Select Save.
Confirming/Changing Job Flow
You can confirm a Job Flow and temporarily change its parameters. However, only fields
that have change permission, assigned when the Job Flow was created, can be edited.
1. Select Job Flow Sheets and select OK.
2. Select a listed Job Flow and select Change Settings.
• Select to display the previous screen and select to display the next screen.
• Select to display the first screen and select to display the last screen.
• You can sort documents in ascending or descending order by pressing either Name
or Last Updated.
• To confirm Job Flow contents, select Details.
3. Select the group to change from the Group of Items. The Group window opens
automatically.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
7-5
Job Flow
4. Select the items you want to change and make changes as instructed.
5. Close any open screens to keep your changes.
7-6
User Guide
8
Stored Programming
Frequently used features and job settings can be saved as Stored Programming, which
can be accessed using a shortcut button.
Stored Programming not only remembers feature settings, but it can record a series of
operations. This enables you to record the hierarchy of displayed screens for each step.
For example, you could use Stored Programming to record the following actions: press
the Machine Status button, and display the screen the Print Reports screen to print
reports.
•
•
•
•
You can record up to 100 consecutive operations in each stored program
Up to 40 programs can be stored.
Build Job cannot be used with Stored Programming.
There are situations where a stored program will become invalid:
-
When default values or paper tray settings are changed in the system setting
-
When buttons are added or removed from the touch screen, since stored
programming only remembers the location of a button on the screen, not the
name of the button. For example, button positions can change when a job flow
or job template is added or deleted
-
Changing the values of the Watermark feature when it is used in a stored program
-
Changing the password to the mailbox used in the stored program after it is
stored.
-
System Settings, Job Flow Sheets, Network Scanning, Address Book and the
Browse feature for the Scan to PC cannot be used with Stored Programming.
Storing a Program
1. Press the Machine Status button.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
8-1
Stored Programming
The following actions terminate the storing process:
• Pressing the Interrupt button on the control panel
• The Auto Reset feature causes a time-out
• A popup window (paper jam, for example) displays
Note
Do not perform the following while storing a program; otherwise, the program may
not be stored or may not function as programmed:
• Remove or insert a paper tray
• Load or reload paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)
2. From the Setup and Calibration, Setup, Tools section, select Stored Programming.
3. Select the following:
a) Store
b) Select a Stored Programming button from the numbered list. (Select the up and
down arrows to display the previous or next screen.)
Tips when storing a program:
• When storing a program for Tray 5, store both the paper size and the paper type
or the stored program may not be successfully called.
• Once a job is stored to a button it cannot be edited, it must be saved again.
4. Set the additional features. Features that are not available to use with Stored
Programming will be grayed out, such as Network Scanning and Job Flow Sheets.
Continue to select the Copy button and OK.
• Feature and OK button availability will depend on what buttons were enabled
by the System Administrator.
• A tone is generated while registering to job memory. To change the tone volume,
refer to “Stored Programming Tone” in the System Administration Guide.
5. From the Copy window, select 1 ->2 Sided copying.
6. From the Output window, select the Watermark button.
7. From the Watermark screen:
a) Select On.
b) Mark the Date & Time box.
c) Select Save.
8. Press the Start button to end registration and store the programming. Once you call
the copy job programming, all the screens that you programmed display prior to job
submission.
• One-touch buttons M01 to M40 are provided for Stored Programs 1-40.
8-2
User Guide
Stored Programming
Deleting Stored Programs
1. Press the Machine Status button.
2. From the Tools section, select Stored Programming.
3. Select:
a) Delete
b) Select the Stored Program number you want to delete.
4. Select Yes to confirm Stored Programming deletion.
5. Select Close.
Note
Deleted Stored Programs cannot be restored.
Naming/Renaming a Stored Program
Up to 18 characters are allowed in a Stored Program name.
1. Press the Machine Status button.
2. From the Tools section, select Stored Programming.
3. Select:
a) Enter/Change Name
b) Select the stored program that you want to rename. Select to display the previous
or next screen.
4. Enter the name, and select Save.
5. Confirm the name change.
6. Select Close to save your changes.
Stored Program icons
You can add or change a stored program icon.
1. Press the Machine Status button.
2. From the Tools section, select Stored Programming.
3. Select:
a) Assign/Change Icon
b) Select the stored program to add or change the icon. Select to display the previous
or next screen
4. Select an icon and then select Save.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
8-3
Stored Programming
The icon is added to the listed stored program.
Calling a Stored Program
When you call a specified stored program, the last screen shown when you registered
the stored program appears.
1. Press the Services Home button.
2. Select Stored Programming.
3. Select a number of a stored program containing the features you want to use. You
can only select registered numbers.
4. After the stored program is called, select other features if necessary.
5. Press the Start button.
To use a Stored Program for a Build Job, continue.
6.
7.
8.
9.
8-4
Select Change Settings.
Select Job Assembly.
Select Stored Programming.
Select a number of a stored program containing the features you want to use. You
can only select registered numbers.
User Guide
9
Media Print - Text
This chapter describes the basic procedures and features of Media Print - Text when the
optional USB Enablement Kit is installed.
Overview
The installation of the USB Enablement Kit allows the machine to retrieve and print PDF,
TIFF, and XPS document files. This feature is called the Media Print feature. When a
USB memory device is connected to the machine, the machine can print the data stored
in the USB memory device. The Media Print feature includes the Media Print - Text
mode that prints data stored in text format. It also includes index printing that prints a
list of files retrieved in the mode.
Make sure to back up data on media. Data stored on media may be lost or damaged
for the following reasons.
• When switching the machine off/on or disconnecting/connecting the USB memory
device
• When receiving the effect of electrical noise or an electrical discharge
• When a failure or repair occurs
• When damage results from a natural calamity
Supported file formats
The following file formats can be used:
• PDF - PDF 1.3 or later
Extension: pdf
• TIFF - Grayscale 4 bit/8 bit uncompressed, 8 bit/24 bit JPEG compressed, MH/MMR
compressed
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
9-1
Media Print - Text
Extension: tif
• XPS files
Extension: xps
-
If the medium contains more than 900 folders, the machine may not be able to
recognize them correctly.
PDF files or TIFF files cannot be printed if they are stored in folders.
-
PDF files saved on a MAC OS cannot be displayed on the screen and cannot be
printed.
-
If a file name contains characters that are not supported by the machine, the
file name will not be displayed on the screen.
-
Up to 255 characters can be recognized as a file name.
Notes and Restrictions
The following notes and restrictions apply to the use of the Media Print - Text feature:
• Printing speed depends on the size and number of files on the USB memory device.
• Before storing document files, format the media with a computer. In Media Print Text mode, files are printed only from the directory located directly in the USB memory
device. A file or folder name can be recognized even if it exceeds 8 characters.
• Do not connect multiple USB memory devices to the machine simultaneously.
• The machine does not support some types of USB memory devices, such as those
with an encryption function or with multiple partitions.
• Do not connect or disconnect the USB memory device while the machine is retrieving
or printing the data, or accessing the USB memory device.
Selecting media files
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory slot on the control panel of the
printer.
2. Press the Services Home button.
3. Select Media Print - Text.
Do not disconnect the USB memory device while the machine is retrieving the files.
Index numbers 001 to 900 are automatically assigned to the retrieved files.
4. When the files are retrieved, select files using Select All, Select From List, Select
Range, or Index Print.
9-2
User Guide
Media Print - Text
The Index Print option prints a list of the selected files from the USB drive with the
index numbers automatically assigned. The Index Print checkbox is enabled when
certain paper supplies are selected.
5. Once the files are selected, set the printing options on the Media Print - Text tab
and Advanced Settings tab.
Depending on the types of files stored in the USB memory device or the directory
configuration, all files selected may not print.
Inserting USB Memory Device
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory slot on the control panel.
2. The USB Device detected screen appears. Select one of the following:
• Store to USB
3. One of the following will occur:
• The USB Device Detected screen appears.
• The Store to USB screen appears.
• The Media Print - Text screen appears.
• The screen display does not change.
4. Select Media Print - Text on the Services Home screen.
Setting the Printing Options
You can set the printing options on the Media Print - Text tab.
Media Print - Text printing options
Tab
Item
Setting Value
Quantity
Specify the print quantity within the range of 1
- 999, using the numeric keypad.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
9-3
Media Print - Text
Tab
Item
Setting Value
Media Print - Text
Paper Supply
Auto Paper Select, Trays 1 - 5
Select Auto or a tray that holds any of the
following sizes of paper: A3, B4, A4, A4 short edge
feed (SEF), B5, B5 SEF, A5, A5 SEF, 8.5 x 11", 8.5
x 11" SEF, 8.5 x 14", 11 x 17"
When selecting Auto, a paper tray of the size of
the document is selected automatically, and the
document is printed at its original size.
When the tray to be used is not displayed, select
More. On the screen displayed, select the desired
tray.
If you select More and then Tray, Paper Size and
Paper Type are selectable.
Paper Size
A3, B4, A4, A4 SEF, B5, B5 SEF, A5, A5 SEF, 8.5 x
11", 8.5 x 11" SEF, 8 x 14", 11 x 17"
Paper Type
Select the paper type to be used from the list.
2 Sided Printing
Off, Long Edge Flip, Short Edge Flip
Pages per side
Off, 2 Pages Up, 4 Pages Up
Bitmap Smoothing
Off, On
Advanced Settings
Index Print
In Media Print - Text mode, the file names (maximum of 2 lines and 100 characters),
the dates the documents were stored on the USB memory device, and the total file
quantity are printed.
For Index Print, only the print quantity can be set with the numeric pad, within the range
of 1 - 999 sets.
When selecting Index Print, the following items are restricted:
Setting Item
Value
Paper Supply
Trays 1 - 5
Any of the following sizes of paper must be
loaded in the selected tray: A3, A4, A4 SEF, 8.5
x 11”, or 8.5 x 11” SEF
2 Sided Printing
Off
Pages per side
Not available
9-4
User Guide
10
Web Applications
Web Application Overview
Web Applications is a service that allows you to access to web applications via a network
using the browser on the machine in order to display and store data.
1. Select Services Home.
2. Select Web Application
3. Select an access destination.
4. Select Open from the pop-up menu displayed.
Accessing Using Buttons Registered on
the Services Home window
You can register frequently used web applications on the Services Home screen as
buttons. The following describes how to access the applications by simply selecting the
buttons.
1. Press the Services Home button.
2. Select Head Office registered on the Services Home window.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
10-1
Web Applications
10-2
User Guide
11
Computer operations
Network Printing
Print procedures vary depending on the application software you are using. For more
information, refer to the documentation provided with each application.
To learn about print features, click Help in the print driver screen and refer to the online
help.
Printing with the PS print drivers
1. Load the paper in the paper tray. See the Paper and other Media chapter in the User
Guide.
2. From your computer, open the document you want to print.
3. Select File > Print.
4. Select the desired printer.
5. Select Properties.
6. Select the Paper/Output tab.
7. Select the appropriate Paper Tray, Paper Size, and Paper Type.
8. Select the Advanced tab and select any Advanced Features.
9. Select OK to save and close the Properties window.
10. Select the desired copies/quantity and OK to print the job.
Note
For additional information, review your print driver documentation.
Printing with the PCL print drivers
1. Load the paper in the tray. See the Paper and other Media chapter in the User Guide.
2. From your computer, open the document you want to print.
3. Select File > Print.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
11-1
Computer operations
4. Select the desired printer.
5. Ensure that Auto-Rotate and Center and Choose Paper Source by PDF page size
check boxes are clear.
Note
These options may not be available with your version of Adobe Acrobat or Adobe
Reader.
6. Select Properties and select the Paper/Output tab.
7. Click the Paper Select button.
8. If Tray 3 or Tray 4 is being used, then select Paper Settings for Auto Tray and choose
the appropriate paper type.
9. Select OK twice to return to the Properties screen.
10. Select the Advanced tab and select any Advanced Features.
11. Select OK to save and close the Properties window.
12. Select the desired copies/quantity and OK to print the job.
Note
For additional information, review your print driver documentation.
Copying a job with tabs
1. Load the tab stock in Tray 5 (Bypass).
2. The Tray 5 (Bypass) screen opens automatically. Use the controller to confirm or
change the paper size.
a) Select Confirm if the paper size and type displayed are correct.
b) Select Change Settings to select the correct paper settings.
3. Select the tab stock:
• Paper Type
• Paper Size: Select Standard Size (8.5 x11 in./A4).
4. Select Save/Confirm until you return to the Copy screen.
5. Select:
a) Output Format tab.
b) The Output Orientation button.
6. Select:
a) Face Down.
b) Save
7. From the Output Format tab, select Tab Margin Shift.
8. Select:
a) Shift to Tab: Follow the tab loading instructions and review your tab stock
selections.
b) Save.
11-2
User Guide
Computer operations
9. Enter the desired output quantity using the numeric keypad.
10. Select Start to begin copying.
Network tab printing
Network printing on tabs using the PS print drivers
1. Load the tab stock in Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5 (Bypass). Refer to Loading Tab Paper
in Trays in the Paper and Other Media chapter.
2. From your computer, open the document you want to print.
3. Select File > Print.
4. Select the desired printer.
5. Select Properties.
6. Select the Paper/Output tab.
7. Select the appropriate Paper Tray, Paper Size, and Paper Type (Select Tab Stock if
using the Tray 5 manual tray, otherwise select Printer Default Type).
8. Select the Advanced tab and select Advanced Features.
9. Select Shift tab from the Tab Margin Shift feature.
10. Set the desired shift margin.
11. Select OK to save and close the Tab Margin Shift window.
12. Select OK to save and close the Properties window.
13. Select the desired copies/quantity and OK to print the job.
Note
For additional information, review your print driver documentation.
Network printing on tabs using the PCL print drivers
1. Load the tab stock in Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5 (Bypass). Refer to Loading Tab Paper
in Trays in the Paper and Other Media chapter.
2. From your computer, open the document you want to print.
3. Select File > Print.
4. Select the desired printer.
5. Ensure that Auto-Rotate and Center and Choose Paper Source by PDF page size
are unchecked.
Note
These options may not be available with your version of Adobe Acrobat or Adobe
Reader.
6. Select Properties and select the Paper/Output tab.
7. Click the Paper Select button.
8. If Tray 3 or Tray 4 is being used for the tab stock, then select Paper Settings for Auto
Tray and choose Tab Stock for the paper type.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
11-3
Computer operations
9. If Tray 5 (Bypass) is being used for the tab stock, then select Tray 5 (Bypass) Settings
and choose Tab Stock for the paper type.
10. Select OK twice to return to the Properties screen.
11. Select the Advanced tab and select the Tab Margin Shift item.
12. From the Tab Margin Shift pull-down menu, select the Shift Tab option.
13. Set the desired Tab margin Shift.
14. Select OK to save and close the Tab Margin Shift window.
15. Select OK to save and close the Properties window.
16. Select the desired copies/quantity and OK to print the job.
Note
For additional information, review your print driver documentation.
E-mail print
You can send e-mail with TIFF or PDF documents attached from a computer to the
machine. Received e-mail is automatically printed. This feature is called “E-mail Print.”
Sending e-mails
This example describes how to use Outlook Express to send e-mail from a computer to
each printer.
1. Use your e-mail client to create the e-mail body, and then attach a TIFF or PDF
document if available.
Only plain text is permitted in the e-mail body. Change the body text format to plain
text from within your e-mail client. HTML format cannot be printed.
• Attached files that do not have the “.tif” or “.pdf” extension may not print
correctly.
• Up to 31 documents can be attached.
2. Enter the mail address of the machine as the recipient.
3. Send the e-mail.
• The receiving printer prints the e-mail body and attached documents with the
following configuration:
• E-mail body: The PCL print driver for the machine is installed on the sending
computer with a default TIFF format document attachment. Default value of
logical printer configured by TIFF Memory Allocation Settings in the CentreWare
Internet Services Emulation Settings.
• PDF format document attachment: Default value of logical printer configured
by Postscript Logical Printer Number in the CentreWare Internet Services
Emulation Settings. Offset output specification is disabled in each case.
11-4
User Guide
Computer operations
Importing scanned data
There are 3 methods for importing documents from a machine mailbox to your computer.
• Importing from a TWAIN Compatible Application
• Importing from Mailbox Viewer2
• Importing using CentreWare Internet Services
Importing from a TWAIN-compatible application
The following section describes methods for using application software to import a
document stored on a machine mailbox.
The Network Scan driver is used to allow client-side application software to import
documents (scan data) stored on the mailbox in the machine via the network.
Note
To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click Help and refer to the online help.
1. Launch the application software to import the document.
Tip
The application must support TWAIN. TWAIN is a standard for scanners and other
input devices.
2.
3.
4.
5.
From the File menu, select the command used to choose the scanner (source).
From the Source, select Network Scan, and click Select.
From the File menu, select the command used to import the image from the scanner.
From the displayed list, click the scanner name of the machine, and click the Select
Scanner button.
• If no items are shown in the list, click Refresh. The application searches for
scanners.
• Click on Options to change the way scanner names are displayed.
6. In the Mailbox Number field, input the mailbox number (001 - 500) that contains
the document you wish to import, and input a password (up to 20 digits) into the
Password field.
• When you check the Save Password check box, you can skip steps 5 to 7 the next
time you select the same mailbox.
• Clicking Change Scanner returns to step 5, where you can reselect a scanner.
7. Click Open Mailbox.
8. Select a document(s) to import from the list, and click Import.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
11-5
Computer operations
Note
Import, Refresh, and Delete are available from the menu that appears when you
right-click on the list.
• When import begins, a dialog appears like the one shown at right. Scan data is
forwarded from the mailbox to the client.
• Once forwarding ends, the document is loaded into the application software and
is deleted from the mailbox.
• If importing one page at a time, documents that have pages not yet imported
are shown in the list with an asterisk (*).
• With the exception of DocuWorks, for most applications, the Network Scan driver
expands the compressed data and passes it to the application as a BMP file.
• Whether or not to delete the document in the mailbox after forwarding can be
configured.
Changing network scan driver settings
To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click Help and refer to the online help.
Configure the display method for the scanner name
You can change the display method for the scanner name shown when that scanner is
selected.
1. To change the scanner name display method, click on Options in the scanner select
dialog box and configure the display.
2. If a scanner is registered by Other Network Scanners, the scanner in a different
subnetwork can be displayed.
Configure the import method for scanned documents
You can change the display method and import method for documents when importing
them from a mailbox.
To change the import method, click Settings in the document select dialog box, and
configure the settings in the dialog box that appears.
11-6
User Guide
12
Job Status
Job Status overview
The Job Status feature allows the user to check active, pending, and completed jobs.
The ability to cancel printing or print pending-print jobs is also available from Job Status.
Active Jobs
The Active Jobs tab allows you to check or cancel current or pending jobs.
1. Select Job Status from the Control Panel.
2. Select Active Jobs.
3. From the View pull-down menu, select the desired jobs to be viewed. You can select:
• All Jobs
• Printer and Print from Folder Jobs
• Scan and Internet Fax Jobs
• Job Flow and File Transfer Jobs
4. From the displayed list, select the applicable job to view.
5. Use the up and down buttons to navigate the list.
6. If required, select Display Time to show the time required to process the selected
job.
7. To delete a job or change the execution order, select a job from the list.
8. Select Delete or Promote from the pop-up menu.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
12-1
Job Status
Completed Jobs
The Completed Jobs tab allows you to check that a print job has been completed
successfully.
1. Select Job Status from the Control Panel.
2. Select Active Jobs.
3. From the View pull-down menu, select the desired jobs to be viewed. You can select:
• All Jobs
• Printer and Print from Folder Jobs
• Scan and Internet Fax Jobs
• Job Flow and File Transfer Jobs
4.
5.
6.
7.
From the displayed list, select the applicable job to view.
Use the up and down buttons to navigate the list.
Select a job and the Print Job details will display.
Select Print this Job History Report or Print this Report if a report is desired.
Secure Print Jobs & More tab
This tab allows you to print confidential documents.
1. Press the Job Status button.
2. Select the Secure Print Jobs & More tab.
3. Select the applicable feature:
•
•
•
•
Secure Print
Sample Set
Delayed Print
Charge Print
4. Continue to the applicable procedure for instructions on that feature.
Secure Print
Use this feature to print secure documents with a pass code.
1. Press the Job Status button.
2. Select the Secure Print Jobs & More tab.
3. Select the Secure Print. The Secure Print screen is displayed.
4. Select Refresh to display the latest updated information. Use the up or down buttons
to navigate the list.
5. From the displayed list, select the applicable user.
12-2
User Guide
Job Status
6. Select Job List.
7. Use the keypad on the control panel to enter the passcode.
8. Select Confirm.
If no password code is set, the Passcode screen does not appear.
9. Use the up or down buttons to navigate the document list.
10. Select the document to print or delete.
11. If deleting a document, select Delete. Select Yes to confirm the deletion. The
document is deleted.
12. If printing a document, perform the following:
a) Using the numeric keypad, enter the number of copies to print.
b) Select Print.
c) Select what to do with the document after printing:
• Print and Delete: Starts printing the document. After printing, the document
is removed.
• Cancel: Cancels the printing of the document.
Sample Set
This feature allows you to print one set for review before printing the entire job set.
1. Press the Job Status button.
2. Select the Secure Print Jobs & More tab.
3. Select Sample Set.
The Sample Set screen is displayed.
4. Select Refresh to display the latest updated information.
Use the up or down buttons to navigate the list.
5.
6.
7.
8.
From the displayed list, select the applicable user.
Select Job List.
Select the document to print or delete.
If deleting a document, select Delete.
Select Yes to confirm the deletion. The document is deleted.
9. If printing a document, perform the following:
a) Using the numeric keypad, enter the number of copies to print.
b) Select Print.
A screen is displayed stating that the job will be deleted after printing and asking
if you still want to print the job.
c) Select Yes or No to continue printing the job.
Delayed Print
This feature allows you to print a job at a specified time and then delete the job.
1. Press the Job Status button.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
12-3
Job Status
2. Select Secure Print Jobs & More tab.
3. Select the Delayed Print. The Delayed Print screen is displayed.
4. Select Refresh to display the latest updated information. Use the up or down buttons
to navigate the list.
5. From the displayed list, select the document to print at a specified time or the delayed
print job to delete.
6. If deleting a document, select Delete. Select Yes to confirm the deletion. The
document is deleted.
7. If printing a document, perform the following:
a) Select Print.
A screen is displayed stating that the job will be deleted after printing and asking
if you still want to print the job.
b) Select Yes or No to continue printing the job.
Charge Print
The Charge Print feature allows you to print or delete documents stored for each billing
user ID.
1. Press the Job Staus button on the Control Panel.
2. From the Secure Print Jobs & More tab, select Charge Print...
3. Select Refresh to display the latest updated information.
4. Use the up or down button to navigate the list. If you know the exact number of the
document in the list, you can specify it directly with the numeric keypad, from the
Go to box.
5. Select the needed billing user ID.
6. Select Job List. The Password screen is displayed.
7. Enter the passcode and select Confirm.
8. Select a document to print or delete from the displayed list.
9. Select the required option.
10. When finished, select Close.
12-4
User Guide
13
Machine Status
Machine Status
Press the Machine Status button on the UI control panel to access the Machine Status
information and features.
The Machine Status button is used to access machine status information and features:
•
•
•
•
•
Machine information
Faults
Supplies
Billing information
Tools
Machine Information tab
Machine Information provides general information about the copier/printer and has
buttons that allow the user to view details that apply to the machine and to access other
machine information features.
Paper Tray Status
Select the Paper Tray Status button to view the current status information for each
paper tray.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
13-1
Machine Status
Machine Configuration
Select the Machine Configuration button to display a list of the various hardware
components and options that are available on the machine. The list also displays the
status of each of these components and options. Hardware components and options
include the document feeder, paper trays, and any optional feeding and finishing
devices attached to the machine.
Machine Serial Number
The Machine Serial Number is displayed in the General Information area on the Machine
Information tab. Use this number when calling Xerox for technical information or
assistance.
Current System Software
The version of the system software that is currently installed on the machine is displayed
under the Current System Software title.
Software Version
Select the Software Version button to display a list of the software versions for the
various machine components, such as the print engine, the Controller ROM (Read Only
Memory), and any optional feeding and finishing devices.
Print Reports
The Print Reports button must be enabled by the system administrator before reports
can be printed. Some features on the Print Reports screen are only available in the
system administrator mode.
To print a report, select the Various Report button to identify the desired report criteria
and then press Start.
Note
The type of reports available varies depending on machine configuration.
Maintenance Assistant
Select Maintenance Assistant to send the diagnostic information of the machine.
Overwrite Hard Disk
The Overwrite Hard Disk feature prevents the document image and registered data
that is recorded on the machine hard disk from being illegally retrieved. The number
of overwrites is set by the system administrator.
Overwriting the machine hard disk is performed after every copy job that includes more
than one set, and after each scan job is transferred to the print server. The Standby
status indicates the completion of the overwriting process.
13-2
User Guide
Machine Status
Print Mode
Select Print Mode to identify the current printing mode of the printer. Select Off-Line
or On-Line. Select one of the following:
PCL Emulation: Select Item Number and enter the number using the numeric keypad.
Select the current value and select Confirm.
PDF Select Programming: Select Item Number and enter the number using the numeric
keypad. Select the current value and select Confirm. Select a Password to save. Enter
the password and select Save.
HP-GL/2 Emulation: Select this to retrieve programming. Select Factory Defaults or
Custom Settings and select a job. Select Programming and select the item number.
Select Store/Delete Programming and select a job. Either Store the Current Selections
or Delete. Select Default Programming and select either Factory Defaults or Custom
Settings.
Faults tab
The Faults tab provides access to fault information and error messages. Access to this
tab is by pressing the Machine Status button on the control panel and selecting the
Fault tab on the UI.
Current Faults
If there are any current faults affecting the machine, select the Current Faults button
to view a list those faults. From the Current Faults screen, select a fault to view
instructions on how to fix the error.
Current Messages
Select the Current Messages button on the Faults tab to view a list of current machine
messages. These messages indicate actions that need to be taken to continue or resume
the proper operation of the machine.
Fault History
Select the Fault History button to display a list of past fault codes. This information
can be used to diagnose and solve machine problems.
Supplies tab
The Supplies tab provides status information about the customer replaceable units
(CRUs) that are used in the machine.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
13-3
Machine Status
To access supplies information, press the Machine Status button on the control panel
and then select the Supplies tab from the Machine Status screen.
Each Customer Replaceable Unit and status is displayed.
Billing Information tab
Accessing Billing Information
1. Press the Machine Status button on the control panel.
2. Select the Billing Information tab.
Billing meters/usage counters
The Billing Information feature displays the total number of prints/copies made by the
machine and also allows the user to view specific billing meter/usage counter information.
The main Billing Information screen displays:
• The Machine Serial Number
• Total Impressions: This is the total number of prints/copies made on the machine.
• The Usage Counters button
Usage Counters
Select the Usage Counters button to view individual counters and their current count
status.
From the drop-down list you can select the desired counter to view:
• Impression Counters
• Sheet Counters
• Image Sent Counters
• All Usage Counters
13-4
User Guide
Machine Status
Impression Counters
This view displays the total impression amount. In other words, impression is the image
on one side of one sheet of media. This counter shows the total impression amount
for copied and printed impressions and for large impressions.
• Black Copied Impressions: This number represents the total number of impressions
for all black/white copied/scanned jobs.
• Black Print Impressions: This number represents the total number of impressions for
all black/white network print jobs (sent from the user’s computer to the printer).
• Large Impressions: These impressions are one side of one sheet of a large document
(such as 11 x17 in./A3). Large Impressions are any documents/originals/prints that
are larger than 8.5 x14 in./B4.
Sheet Counters
This view provides information on the total number of sheets the machine feeds to
the output area. Each sheet counts as one click on the counter (regardless of whether
it is a one-sided or two-sided copy/print job).
Images Sent Counters
This view provides information on the total amounts for internet fax images, email
images, and network scanned images.
All Usage Counters
This view provides a complete total of all the counters, including the totals from the
Impression Counters, Sheet Counters, and Images Sent Counters.
User Account Billing Information
Note
This feature is available only if the Accounting feature is enabled. For more information
on the Accounting feature, refer to the System Administration Guide.
When the Accounting feature is enabled by the system administrator, the User Account
Billing Information button is displayed on the Billing Information screen. By selecting
the User Account Billing Information button, the following information then is displayed:
• The billing information of the currently logged-in user, including copy and scan jobs
• By selecting either Meter (Copy Jobs) or Meter (Scan Jobs), the following information
then is displayed:
-
Usage amount for this session
Total usage
Account Limit (set by the system administrator)
Available Balance (remaining unused amount for the account)
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
13-5
Machine Status
Tools tab
Regular users have limited access to some of the features on the Tools tab.
Stored Programming
When available to the user, this feature enhances productivity by saving a series of
programming steps and assigning them to a specified Stored Programming option.
Stored programs save frequently used features and job settings which can be accessed
using a shortcut button. Stored Programming not only remembers feature settings,
but it can record a series of operations. This enables the user to record the hierarchy
of displayed screens for each step. For example, Stored Programming can record the
following actions: press the Machine Status button, and display the Print Reports
screen to print reports.
Note
This feature is available only if the system administrator has created and saved stored
programs.
Add Address Book Entry
Select to add Address and Recipient Information. To add, select an available entry and
enter the information. To view an entry, select the entry and the information will
automatically display.
Paper Tray Attributes
The Paper Tray Attributes feature allows the user to change the attributes of a paper
tray, including size, type, and weight.
Note
The Paper Tray Attributes feature appears on the Tools tab only if the system
administrator has made it available to users.
Changing the paper tray attributes
Press the Machine Status button on the control panel.
Access the Tools tab on the UI.
Select Paper Tray Attributes on the Tools tab.
Select a tray.
Select Change Settings.
If the settings are correct, select Confirm or select Change Settings.
If necessary, make the required changes to the tray settings (such as weight, type,
and size).
8. Select Save.
The previous screen is displayed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
13-6
User Guide
Machine Status
9. Select Confirm.
The Paper Tray Attributes screen is displayed.
10. Select Close.
The main Tools screen is displayed.
11. Press the Services button on the control panel to return to the main Copy screen.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
13-7
Machine Status
13-8
User Guide
14
Maintenance
Cleaning the machine
Read and adhere to the following information when cleaning the machine:
• Before you start to clean the machine, be sure to switch off the power and unplug
the machine. Cleaning the machine without switching off the power may cause an
electric shock.
• Do not use benzene, paint thinner, other volatile liquids, or spray insect repellent on
the machine as doing so may discolor, deform, or crack covers.
• Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine
to malfunction and/or damage documents during copying.
• Document feeder, cover, and glass information:
-
-
-
-
The document cover is the flat, white surface on the underside of the DADF that
holds the document in place on the document glass.
It is recommended that you clean all components of the document cover and
document glass at the same time. These components consist of the document
cover, the document (platen) glass, and the second-side scanning lens assembly.
Cleaning the document cover and glass on a regular basis is important to
providing the best image quality possible on your printed or copy output. If the
document cover and document glass are dirty, spots may appear on copies and
the machine may not properly detect document sizes.
Perform the cleaning procedure for the document cover and document glass if
you receive this message, The Scanner may be dirty; see User Guide or label
instructions on the Document Feeder to wipe the scanning glass.
The document (or platen) glass consists of two parts: the document glass itself
and the glass strip. The document glass is the glass on which you place your
document in order to copy it. The glass strip is an approximately one-inch wide
strip of glass located to the left the document glass.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
14-1
Maintenance
Cleaning the exterior
1. Wipe the exterior with a soft cloth moistened with water. If dirt is difficult to remove,
try gently wiping with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount of neutral detergent.
2. Wipe off any excess water from the exterior with a soft cloth.
Cleaning the document cover and glass
1. Cleaning the document cover
a) Raise the document feeder.
b) To remove dirt, wipe the document cover with a soft cloth moistened with water
and then wipe it dry with a soft cloth. If dirt is difficult to remove, try gently wiping
with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount of neutral detergent.
2. Cleaning the document (platen) glass
14-2
User Guide
Maintenance
a) To remove dirt, wipe the document glass with a soft cloth moistened with water
and then wipe it dry with a soft cloth. If dirt is difficult to remove, try gently wiping
with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount of neutral detergent.
Caution
Do not press heavily on the document glass to avoid damaging the glass surface.
3. Cleaning the second-side scanning lens assembly
a) The second-side scanning lens assembly is located along the left side of the
document cover. The assembly consists of the mirrored-glass strip, a metal strip,
a white-plastic strip, and rollers. All parts of the assembly must be cleaned to
ensure the best image quality when making copies.
b) With the document feeder open, pull the lever that is located at the top of the
document cover.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
14-3
Maintenance
Part of the document cover pulls away from the assembly, which allows better
access to the second-side scanning lens assembly.
c) To remove dirt, wipe the mirrored glass, metal strip, both sides of the white-plastic
strip, and the rollers with a soft cloth moistened with water, and then wipe it dry
with a soft cloth.
Caution
Do not press heavily on the mirrored glass as this will result in damage to the film
around the glass surface.
Note
If dirt is difficult to remove, try gently wiping with a soft cloth moistened with a
small amount of neutral detergent.
14-4
User Guide
Maintenance
4. Once the second-side scanning assembly is clean, return the document cover to its
original position and ensure that the lever is locked in place.
If you touch the document cover with your bare hands, wipe it clean before closing
the document feeder.
5. Gently close the document feeder.
Cleaning the document feeder rollers
1. Gently lift the latch of the document feeder top cover until it is open completely in
a fixed position.
2. While turning the rollers, gently clean them with a soft cloth moistened with water.
Caution
Use a cloth that has been thoroughly wrung to prevent drops of water falling into
the machine. Drops of water on internal components may cause a malfunction.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
14-5
Maintenance
If dirt is difficult to remove, try gently wiping with a soft cloth moistened with a small
amount of neutral detergent.
3. Close the top cover of the document feeder until you hear it click into place.
4. Close the left cover of the document feeder until you hear it click into place.
Cleaning the Fuser Stripper Fingers
Note
It is recommended to read through all of the installation instructions before performing
this procedure.
Note
It is recommended to perform this operation prior to powering up the machine for the
day. However, if it is necessary to perform it during the day, to avoid injury, wait
approximately 50 minutes from the time the machine is powered off to allow the machine
to cool down.
Fuser oil can cause irritation upon contact with the eye. Make sure to wash your hands
thoroughly with soap and water after completing this procedure. Be careful not to touch
other areas of the machine after servicing the Fuser area.
1.
2.
Make sure that the machine has stopped copying / printing, and then power the
machine off.
Allow the machine to cool for approximately 50 minutes.
3.
Open the front door.
4.
Move handle 2 to the right and down to the unlocked position.
5.
Pull the drawer out until it stops.
6.
Lift the 2c handle.
7.
Carefully clean the six yellow stripper fingers with a clean, dry, lint free cloth by using
a pinching grip between your finger and thumb to wipe the underside of the stripper
fingers.
14-6
User Guide
Maintenance
8.
Return the 2c handle to its original position.
9.
Clean the input baffles to the Transfer and Fuser.
10. Wipe the Fuser input baffle.
11. Wipe the Transfer input baffle.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
14-7
Maintenance
12. Grasp handle 2, push in on the drawer, and then move the handle to the left and
up to the locked position.
13. Close the front door.
Replacing consumable supplies
Ordering supplies
Xerox supplies, paper, and throughput material can be ordered from Xerox by going to
www.xerox.com and clicking on either the Contact Us link for specific contact
information/telephone numbers in your area or by clicking on the Supplies and
entering/selecting your specific machine information (product family and model type).
Store supply items and Xerox parts in their original packages in a convenient location.
Note
Always refer to www.xerox.com for the latest Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs) part
numbers.
The following items are consumables for this machine. It is recommended that you have
a supply of these items available to eliminate downtime when they need to be replaced.
Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs)
• Black Toner Cartridge; reorder quantity: 1/box
• Toner Waste Bottle; reorder quantity: 1/box
14-8
User Guide
Maintenance
Checking the status of CRUs
Check the status of consumables by using the Supplies tab.
• The status of consumables is indicated by Ready, Order New, Replace Now, or other
indications.
• An indication from 0 to 100% displays the remaining amount of toner.
The machine UI will indicate when it is time to order and/or install a Customer
Replaceable Unit (CRU). With some CRUs, the UI indicates that the machine may
continue to run copy or print jobs without immediately replacing the CRU. When it is
time to replace it, a message appears on the UI, and the machine stops running.
Always recycle/dispose the used CRU according to the disposal instructions supplied
with the new CRU.
Note
If image quality (IQ) issues are on the output, refer to the problem solving chapter of
the user guide for specific IQ problems and their related corrective actions.
Replacing the toner cartridge
Warning
Replace a toner cartridge while the machine is ON. Before replacing a cartridge, ensure
that the machine is given time to cool down. Failure to do so may result in burns to the
skin if certain parts of the machine are touched.
1. Open the left cover of the machine.
2. Lay paper on the floor before removing the cartridge. This will allow any excess toner
to fall on the paper.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
14-9
Maintenance
3. Grash the handle of the toner cartridge.
4. Pull out the toner cartridge slowly (1), while holding the bottom of the cartridge with
one hand (2).
5. Dispose the old toner cartridge as normal office waste or recycle the cartridge.
6. Remove the new cartridge from the box and shake if from side to side to even out
the toner inside.
14-10
User Guide
Maintenance
7. Hold the cartridge with the arrow mark facing up.
8. Push the cartridge in slowly until it stops.
9. Close the toner cover. If the cover does not close completely, make sure the cartridge
is in the lock position and is installed into the appropriate toner location.
Caution
Never use a vacuum cleaner when cleaning up spilled toner. It can cause a small
explosion as the toner fills the vacuum cleaner and creates sparks. Use a broom,
brush, or a cloth moistened with a neutral detergent.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
14-11
Maintenance
Replacing the toner waste container
A message displays on the UI when the toner waste container is full. If you continue
copying or printing without replacing it, the machine stops after copying or printing
(approximately 18,000 sheets).
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped copying/printing, then open the front cover
on the machine.
2. Open the toner waste container cover and push the lever down.
3. Grasp the handle of the toner waste container with one hand, and pull it out of the
machine about half way.
14-12
User Guide
Maintenance
4. With the other hand, grasp the top, middle part of the bottle, and then using both
hands, pull the entire container out of the machine.
5. Hold the used container firmly with both hands and put it into the plastic bag, which
is provided with the new container. Close the bag and dispose of the container
according to your local regulations.
6. Remove the new container from its packaging.
7. Do not grip the container handle. Grasp the top, middle part of the new container
and slide it into the machine until it snaps into position.
8. Close the toner waste container cover.
9. Close the front cover.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
14-13
Maintenance
A message displays and the machine will not operate if the front cover is open even
slightly.
14-14
User Guide
15
Problem solving
Paper jams
If a paper jam occurs, a fault screen displays a message on the UI indicating in which
area the jam is situated. Follow the instructions provided for clearing the jam and
resuming machine operation.
Information about paper jams
Review the following list to address paper jams:
• When paper jams inside the machine, the machine stops and an alarm sounds.
• Follow the instructions displayed on the controller to remove the jammed paper.
• Gently remove the paper taking care not to tear it. If paper is torn, be sure to remove
all torn pieces.
• If a piece of jammed paper remains inside the machine, the paper jam message will
remain on the display.
• Paper jams can be removed with the machine still powered on. When the power is
turned off, all information stored to the machine's memory will be erased.
• Do not touch components inside the machine. This can cause print defects.
• After clearing a paper jam, printing is automatically resumed from the state before
the paper jam occurred.
• If a paper jam occurred during copying, press the Start button. Copying is resumed
from the state before the paper jam occurred.
Warning
When removing jammed paper, make sure that no pieces of jammed paper are left in
the machine. A piece of paper remaining in the machine can cause fire. If a piece of
paper is stuck in a hidden area or paper is wrapped around the fuser unit or rollers, do
not remove it forcefully. You can get injured or burned. Switch off the machine
immediately and contact the Customer Support Center.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-1
Problem solving
Document feeder jams
1. Gently lift the latch of the document feeder top cover until it is completely open.
2. Open the left cover until it comes to a stop.
3. If the document is not caught in the entry of the document feeder, then remove it.
15-2
User Guide
Problem solving
4. If instructed to open the inner cover, lift up the lever, and open the inner cover.
Remove the jammed document.
Note
If the document is stuck, do not pull on it forcefully, as this could damage the
document.
5. If the jam is inside of the left cover, remove the jammed document.
6. Close the following open covers until they click into place. Close them in the following
order:
• Inner cover
• Top cover
• Left cover
7. If a document jam cannot be found, slowly raise the document feeder, and if the
document is there, remove it.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-3
Problem solving
8. Close the document feeder.
9. If indicated, raise the feeder tray area and remove the document.
10. Gently return the feeder tray to its original position.
11. After removing the jammed document, follow the instructions to reload the entire
document set into the document feeder.
Note
Ensure that there are not any torn, wrinkled, or folded documents in the document
set. To scan torn, wrinkled or folded documents, use the Document Glass, only. The
already scanned document sheets are automatically skipped and scanning resumes
from the document sheet last scanned prior to the jam.
Document jams under the document feeder belt
1. Open the document feeder.
15-4
User Guide
Problem solving
2. Open the belt of the document cover while gripping the lever, and remove the jammed
document.
3. Gently return the belt to the original position.
4. Close the document feeder.
5. Follow the instructions to reload the entire document set into the document feeder.
Note
Ensure that there are not any torn, wrinkled, or folded documents in the document
set. To scan torn, wrinkled or folded documents, use the Document Glass, only. The
already scanned document sheets are automatically skipped and scanning resumes
from the document sheet last scanned prior to the jam.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-5
Problem solving
Lower left cover jams
Note
This procedure shows how to clear a jam without either the optional HCF (Trays 6/7) or
optional OHCF (Trays 6/7) being present. If you have either an HCF or an OHCF, open
the front cover to optional Trays 6/7 to access this area.
1. Open the lower left cover
2. Remove the jammed paper.
3. Close the lower left cover.
15-6
User Guide
Problem solving
Paper jams in the Bypass (Tray 5)
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small, ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with any copy/print jobs.
1. Remove the jammed paper and any paper that is loaded from the Bypass tray.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
2. Open the tray cover and remove jammed paper.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-7
Problem solving
3. Close the tray cover.
4. Reload paper into the tray and resume copying/printing.
Envelope jams in the Bypass tray
Note
Envelopes can be fed only from the Bypass tray. Check that the envelopes are within
specification.
Carefully read and adhere to the following guidelines when using envelopes in the Bypass
Tray:
• Always ensure that the Bypass tray guides are against the edges of the envelopes.
• Check that the attributes of the paper tray are set correctly.
• Some wrinkle is expected on the back of the fed envelope.
15-8
User Guide
Problem solving
Paper jams in Trays 1-4
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your copy/print jobs.
1. Pull out the tray where the paper jam occurred.
Note
To avoid tearing paper, review where the paper jam occurred before pulling out a
tray. Torn paper remaining inside the machine can cause machine malfunction.
2. Remove the jammed paper and any torn pieces.
3. Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-9
Problem solving
Paper jams in transport unit 4
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your copy/print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing before opening the front cover.
2. Pull out Tray 1.
3. Pull out Transport Unit 4. Tray 2 will come out as you pull out transport unit 4.
4. Lift up lever 4a and then remove the jammed paper.
15-10
User Guide
Problem solving
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
5. Return lever 4a to the original position.
6. Push Tray 2 in gently until it comes to a stop. Transport unit 4 will be inserted
simultaneously.
7. Push Tray 1 in gently until it comes to a stop.
8. Close the front cover completely. The machine will not operate if the front cover is
open even slightly.
Paper jams in duplex module 3
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your copy/print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing before opening the front cover.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-11
Problem solving
2. Pull out duplex module 3.
3. Move the release lever 3a to remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Move lever 3b to the right and then remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
5. Push the duplex module in gently until it comes to a stop.
6. Return all levers to their starting positions.
15-12
User Guide
Problem solving
7. Close the front cover completely. The machine will not operate if the front cover is
open even slightly.
Paper jams inside the main unit
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your copy/print jobs.
Warning
Never touch a labeled area (found on the fuser unit or nearby) indicating High
Temperature and Caution. Contact can lead to burns.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing before opening the front cover.
2. Turn the green lever at the center of the transfer module to the right until it is in the
horizontal position and then pull the transfer module out to the end.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-13
Problem solving
3. Lift up lever 2b to remove jammed paper. Then turn knob 2a to remove jammed
paper.
4. If paper is jammed at the top of the transfer module or inside the fuser unit, remove
the paper by pulling it out toward the left. If the paper cannot be removed, lift up
the lever 2c and then try removing it
5. Lift up the lever 2c as necessary, shift the lever 2d, and then remove the jammed
paper.
15-14
User Guide
Problem solving
6. Turn the knob 2f as necessary and then remove the jammed paper.
7. Shift lever 3b on the right of the fuser unit as necessary and then remove the jammed
paper.
If the jammed paper remains inside and it is difficult to remove, pull out the duplex
module after returning the transfer module to the original position. Then try again.
8. Insert the transfer module completely and turn the green lever 2 to the left.
Note
If the lever cannot be turned, pull the transfer module to the middle and insert it
again.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-15
Problem solving
9. Close the front cover completely. The machine will not operate if the front cover is
open even slightly.
Fault codes
Fault code
Cause and Remedy
002-770
Cause: Unable to process job template due to insufficient hard disk space.
Remedy: Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free disk space.
003-750
Cause: Unable to store any documents with 2 Sided Book Copy feature.
Remedy: Check the 2 Sided Book Copy settings.
003-751
Cause: The machine is unable to process size, because the specified document
area is too small.
Remedy: Increase resolution or scan area size.
003-753
Cause: The selected resolution was too large for scanning mixed size originals
using document feeder.
Remedy: Decrease Scan Resolution to 200dpi or less, and rescan.
003-754
Cause: An error occurred in the document scanner.
Remedy: Reprocess the job.
003-755
Cause: An error occurred in the document scanner.
Remedy: Reprocess the job.
003-760
Cause: An incompatible combination of features is specified in the document scan
conditions.
Remedy: Check the selected options.
003-761
Cause: The paper size of the tray selected for auto tray is different from the paper
size of the tray selected for Auto Repeat.
Remedy: Change the paper size for the tray, or change the Paper Type Priority
settings.
003-764
Cause: No document is scanned by Form Overlay.
Remedy: Prepare 2 documents or more.
003-795
Cause: When enlarging/reducing a scanned document to the specified paper size,
the reduction/enlargement ratio value exceeds the allowed range.
Remedy: Take one of the following actions:
Manually enter a reduction/enlargement ratio.
Change the paper size.
005-275
005-280
005-281
005-282
005-283
005-284
Cause: An error occurred in the document feeder.
Remedy: Power-cycle the machine. Contact the Customer Support Center.
15-16
User Guide
Problem solving
Fault code
Cause and Remedy
016-210
016-211
016-212
016-213
016-214
016-215
016-216
016-217
016-218
016-219
Cause: An error occurred in the software settings.
Remedy: Power-cycle the printer. Contact the Customer Support Center.
016-220
016-221
016-222
016-223
016-224
016-225
016-226
016-227
016-228
016-229
016-230
016-231
016-232
016-233
016-234
016-235
016-236
016-237
016-238
016-239
016-240
016-242
016-300
016-336
Cause: An error occurred in the document scanner.
Remedy: Power-cycle the machine. If the document scanner error is not corrected,
contact the Customer Support Center.
016-415
016-416
Cause: An error occurred in the machine.
Remedy: Power off/power on the machine. If the document scanner error is not
corrected, contact the Customer Support Center.
016-450
Cause: The SMB host name already exists.
Remedy: Change the host name.
For information about network settings, refer to the System Administration Guide.
016-453
016-454
Cause: Unable to retrieve IP address from DNS.
Remedy: Check the DNS configurations and IP address retrieve method.
For information about network settings, refer to the System Administration Guide.
016-503
Cause: Unable to resolve SMTP server name during E-mail send.
Remedy: Check that the SMTP server settings from CWIS are correct. Also, check
the DNS server settings.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-17
Problem solving
Fault code
Cause and Remedy
016-504
Cause: Unable to resolve POP3 server name during E-mail send.
Remedy: Check that the POP3 server settings from CWIS are correct. Check the
DNS server settings.
016-505
Cause: Unable to login to POP3 server during mail send.
Remedy: Check that the user name and password used in the POP3 server from
CWIS are correct.
016-506
Cause: An error occurred while running a job.
Remedy: Cancel the job and re-run it. If error continues, contact the Customer
Support Center.
016-701
Cause: PCL print data could not be processed due to insufficient memory.
Remedy: Reduce resolution, cancel 2 Sided printing or N up, and try to print again.
Refer to the online help for the print driver.
016-702
Cause: PCL print data could not be processed due to insufficient print page buffer.
Remedy: Take one of the following actions:
Set Print Mode to Speed Priority.
Use Ensure Print.
Increase the size of the print page buffer.
Add additional memory.
For information about print modes and print guarantees, refer to the online help
for the print driver.
For information about memory, refer to Allocate Memory in the System
Administration Guide.
016-703
Cause: Mail specifying a non-registered or invalid mailbox number was received.
Remedy: Take one of the following actions:
Request the sender to register the mailbox with the specified number.
Request the sender to send to a valid mailbox.
016-704
Cause: Documents stored in the mailbox have reached the hard disk capacity limit.
Remedy: Remove unnecessary documents from the mailbox, and save the
document.
016-705
Cause: Secure print documents cannot be registered because of hard disk
malfunction.
Remedy: Contact the Customer Support Center.
016-706
Cause: The maximum number of Secure Print users has been exceeded and no
space is available on the hard disk.
Remedy: Remove unnecessary documents stored on the printer, and delete
unnecessary Secure Print users.
016-707
Cause: Unable to sample print because the feature expansion kit is not installed
or has malfunctioned.
Remedy: A feature expansion kit is needed to use the Sample Print feature. If the
kit is malfunctioning, contact the Customer Support Center.
016-708
Cause: Annotation is not possible due to insufficient hard disk space.
Remedy: Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free disk space.
016-709
Cause: An error occurred during PCL processing.
Remedy: Retry printing.
15-18
User Guide
Problem solving
Fault code
Cause and Remedy
016-710
Cause: Delayed Print documents cannot be registered because of hard disk
malfunction.
Remedy: Contact the Customer Support Center.
016-711
Cause: The configured maximum e-mail size has been exceeded.
Remedy: Take one of the following actions and resend the e-mail:
•
•
•
•
Decrease document pages
Reduce the Scan Resolution
Reduce the Scan Magnification
Have the system administrator increase your Maximum Send E-mail Data Size
016-712
Refer to 003-751.
016-713
Cause: The password set to the mailbox and the inputted password were not in
agreement.
Remedy: Enter the correct password.
016-714
Cause: Specified mailbox does not exist.
Remedy: Create a mailbox or specify the existing mailbox.
016-716
Cause: Unable to spool TIFF file because of insufficient disk space.
Remedy: Remove unnecessary documents and users stored on the printer and
then attach the hard disk. When attaching a hard disk, contact the Customer
Support Center.
016-718
Cause: PCL print data could not be processed as there was insufficient memory.
Remedy: Reduce resolution, cancel 2 Sided printing or N up, and retry printing.
016-719
Cause: PCL print data could not be processed as there was insufficient memory.
Remedy: Increase the size of the print page buffer.
016-720
Cause: The PCL print data included a command which cannot be processed.
Remedy: Confirm the print data and try to print again.
016-721
Cause: An error occurred during print processing. Probable causes are as follows:
1. Printing was instructed by Automatic Tray Selection when Paper Type Priority
is set to Automatic Tray switching Off for all paper in the Common Settings.
2. ESC/P command error
Remedy: For 1, when printing by Automatic Tray Selection, set one of the paper
types to a setting other than Automatic Tray Switching Off in Paper Type Priority.
For 2, check print data.
Refer to “Paper Type Priority” in the System Administration Guide.
016-722
Cause: Unsupported staple position is specified.
Remedy: Confirm the position, and specify the print data again.
016-723
Cause: Unsupported punch position is specified.
Remedy: Confirm the position, and specify the print data again.
016-728
Cause: An unsupported tag was included in the TIFF file.
Remedy: Check the print data.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-19
Problem solving
Fault code
Cause and Remedy
016-729
Cause: Unable to print because the number of colors/resolution of the TIFF file
exceeds the allowed range.
Remedy: Change the number of colors/resolution for the TIFF file, and specify the
print data again.
016-730
Cause: Detected a command not supported by ARTIV.
Remedy: Check the print data, remove the offending command, and try to print
again.
016-731
Cause: Unable to print TIFF data because it was interrupted.
Remedy: Retry printing.
016-732
Cause: Unable to use registered form specified by Emulation with host.
Remedy: Resend the form data.
016-733
Cause:
1.
2.
Unable to retrieve IP address from text on the right side of @ of an
address during E-mail send.
Unable to resolve Internet address on the right side of @ by DNS.
Remedy:
1.
2.
Check the mail address.
Check the DNS address.
016-735
Cause: Attempted to print Job Template List while updating the job template.
Remedy: Retry printing after waiting for a period.
016-738
Cause: Booklet Creation is not applied to the specified paper.
Remedy: Specify the printable paper size for booklet creation.
016-739
Cause: The specified document and paper size are an unauthorized combination.
Remedy: Specify the combination of the printable document and paper size for
booklet creation.
016-740
Cause: Booklet Creation is not applied to the specified paper tray.
Remedy: Specify the printable paper tray for booklet creation.
016-746
Cause: An unsupported feature is included in received PDF.
Remedy: Print using printer driver.
016-748
Cause: Printing is not possible due to insufficient hard disk space.
Remedy: Reduce the number of pages of print data, for example, by dividing up
the print data or printing one copy at a time when making multiple copies.
016-749
Cause: A PJL command syntax error occurred.
Remedy: Either confirm the print settings, or correct the PJL command.
016-755
Cause: Attempted to process PDF file which was specified to printing prohibited.
Remedy: Cancel the printing prohibited specification using Adobe Reader and try
to print again.
016-756
Cause: No permissions to use the service.
Remedy: Check with your System Administrator.
016-757
Cause: Password is incorrect.
Remedy: Enter the correct password.
15-20
User Guide
Problem solving
Fault code
Cause and Remedy
016-758
Cause: No Permissions to use service.
Remedy: Check with your Auditron Administrator.
016-759
Cause: Maximum number of pages for this service has been reached.
Remedy: Check with your Auditron Administrator.
016-760
Cause: An error occurred during PostScript processing.
Remedy: Take one of the following actions:
Set Print Mode to Speed Priority.
Increase PostScript memory.
For information about Print Modes, refer to the print driver's online help.
For information about memory, refer to “Allocate Memory” in the System
Administration Guide.
016-761
Cause: An error occurred during image processing.
Remedy: Set the Print Mode to Speed Priority and start printing again. If this does
not remedy the error, print in the Ensure Print mode.
016-762
Cause: A print language not installed on the machine was specified.
Remedy: In Specify Print Mode under Port Settings, specify a print language.
016-764
Cause: Could not connect to the SMTP server.
Remedy: Contact the SMTP Server Administrator.
016-765
Cause: Could not send mail as the hard disk on the SMTP server was full.
Remedy: Contact the SMTP Server Administrator.
016-766
Cause: An error occurred on the SMTP server.
Remedy: Contact the SMTP Server Administrator.
016-767
Cause: Could not send mail as the mail address was wrong.
Remedy: Check the mail address and transmit again.
016-768
Cause: Could not connect to the SMTP server as the mail address of the machine
was incorrect.
Remedy: Check the mail address of the machine.
016-769
Cause: The SMTP server does not support confirmation of mail distribution (DSN).
Remedy: Send mail without setting confirmation of mail distribution (DSN).
016-772
Cause: Unable to retrieve scan data repository address from the CentreWare scan
service.
Remedy: Check the DNS address or define the scan data repository address by its
IP address.
016-774
Cause: Compression conversion is not possible due to insufficient hard disk space.
Remedy: Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free disk space.
016-775
Cause: Image conversion is not possible due to insufficient hard disk space.
Remedy: Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free disk space.
016-776
Cause: An error occurred during image conversion processing.
Remedy: A portion of the data might have finished image conversion processing.
Check the data via CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer to “CentreWare Internet Services” in the System Administration Guide.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-21
Problem solving
Fault code
Cause and Remedy
016-777
Cause: A hard disk error occurred during image processing.
Remedy: The hard disk might be defective. When replacing a hard disk, contact
the Customer Support Center.
016-778
Cause: Conversion processing of scanned image was interrupted because of
insufficient disk space.
Remedy: Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free disk space.
016-779
Cause: An error occurred during scanned image conversion processing.
Remedy: Retry scanning.
016-780
Cause: A hard disk error occurred during scanned image conversion processing.
Remedy: The hard disk might be defective. When replacing a hard disk, contact
the Customer Support Center.
016-786
Cause: When using the scan feature, hard disk capacity is insufficient for writing
to a file.
Remedy: Either remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free disk
space or initialize the hard disk.
016-788
Cause: Failed to load a file from the Web browser.
Remedy: Perform the following actions, and try again.
Reload the browser page
Restart the browser
Power-cycle the machine
016-792
Cause: Specified job history could not be acquired when printing Job Counter
Report
Remedy: Specified job history does not exist.
016-799
Cause: An illegal print parameter is included.
Remedy: Confirm the print data and option and specify the print data again.
021-750
021-751
021-770
021-771
021-772
Cause: During an inspection or maintenance request a transmission error occurred
and our Customer Support Center could not be contacted.
Remedy: Check that the phone lines are connected and try sending an inspection
or maintenance request again after a short time. If the error persists, contact the
Customer Support Center.
15-22
User Guide
Problem solving
Fault code
Cause and Remedy
024-340
024-341
024-342
024-343
024-344
024-345
024-346
024-347
024-348
024-349
024-350
024-351
024-352
024-353
024-354
024-355
024-356
024-357
024-358
024-359
024-360
024-361
024-362
024-363
024-364
024-365
024-366
024-367
024-368
024-367
024-370
024-371
024-372
024-373
024-374
024-375
Cause: A communication or initialization failure occurred.
Remedy: Power off/power on the machine. If the error is not corrected, contact
the Customer Support Center.
024-746
Cause: A feature (one of paper size, tray, output tray, or 2 sided printing) that is
incompatible with the specified paper quality has been specified.
Remedy: Check the print data.
024-747
Cause: An illegal print parameter combination was set. For example, a non-standard
size was specified and Tray Selection was set to Auto.
Remedy: Check the print data. In the above case, select Tray 5 (Bypass).
027-452
Cause: IP address already exists.
Remedy: Change the IP address.
For information about network settings, refer to the System Administration Guide.
027-500
Cause: Unable to resolve SMTP server name during answer E-mail send.
Remedy: Check that the SMTP server settings from CWIS are correct.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-23
Problem solving
Fault code
Cause and Remedy
027-501
Cause: Unable to resolve POP3 server name when using POP3 protocol.
Remedy: Check that the POP3 server settings from CWIS are correct.
027-502
Cause: Unable to login to POP3 server when using POP3 protocol.
Remedy: Check that the user name and password used in the POP3 server from
CWIS are correct.
027-720
Cause: Unable to find the server of an application interface destination.
Remedy: Check DNS server application or check whether an application interface
installed on the computer is registered by DNS server or not.
027-721
Cause: An application interface destination does not exist.
Remedy: Check whether an interfaced application operates correctly.
027-722
Cause: The job was timed out during connection with an application interface
destination. An application linkage destination does not exist.
Remedy: Try to process the job flow.
027-724
Cause: An application interface destination could not be accessed.
Remedy: Check whether an interfaced application operates correctly. When it is
operating, check the log. When it is not operating, check the network environments.
027-725
Cause: A job operation failed using an application interface.
Remedy: Check whether an application linked operates correctly. When it is
operating, check the log. When it is not operating, check the network environments.
027-726
Cause: The job status is unclear during an application interface.
Remedy: Check whether an application linked operates correctly. When it is
operating, check the log. When it is not operating, check the network environments.
027-727
Cause: A parameter is illegal during an application interface.
Remedy: Try to process the job flow.
027-737
Cause: An error occurred while reading data from the job template pool server.
Remedy: Check to see whether you have privileges for the directory storing the
job template.
027-739
Cause: Unable to find the specified job template server.
Remedy: Check the path name for the job template server.
027-740
Cause: Unable to login to job template server.
Remedy: Check the login user name and password.
027-741
Cause: Unable to connect to job template server.
Remedy: Have the network administrator check the network and server
environments.
027-742
Cause: Unable to store job template due to insufficient hard disk space.
Remedy: Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free disk space.
027-743
Cause: The specified job template server is incorrect.
Remedy: Check the settings for the job template server.
027-744
Cause: There is a problem in the domain name of the job template server.
Remedy: Make sure that the DNS server connection and the domain name are
registered to the DNS server.
15-24
User Guide
Problem solving
Fault code
Cause and Remedy
027-745
Cause: The address of the DNS server is not registered on the machine.
Remedy: Either register the address of the DNS server on the machine or set the
address of the job template server by an IP address.
027-746
Cause: The specified job template pool server protocol settings are incorrect.
Remedy: Set up the correct port.
027-750
Cause: Attempted to command a print job to a scanned document.
Remedy: Scanned document cannot be printed. Configure the job flow correctly.
027-751
Cause: When following the job flow, an error occurred.
Remedy: Check the settings for the job flow.
027-752
Cause: In a job flow, a job start was specified before a required item was input.
Remedy: Configure a default to input the required item in the job flow or change
the job flow to have the required item link to the mailbox.
027-753
Cause: The necessary port for the job flow is either not enabled or is unavailable.
Remedy: Have your System Administrator check the port status.
027-770
Cause: PDL (Printer Description Language) error detected by the controller while
processing a network print job.
Remedy: Cancel and resend the print job. If problem continues, reboot both the
controller and the printer and resend job. If the problem persists, call the Customer
Support Centre for further help/instructions.
027-771
Cause: Disk full error message on the controller.
Remedy: Cancel job. Delete unwanted files from the controller. Resend the network
print job.
027-796
Cause: When the machine is configured to only print attached documents when
received by mail, a message with no attachments is discarded upon receipt.
Remedy: To print the mail body or header information as well, change settings in
the CentreWare Internet Services Properties screen.
Refer to “E-mail Print” in the System Administration Guide.
027-797
Cause: Invalid received mail output destination.
Remedy: Specify a correct output destination and send the mail again.
062-277
Cause: A communications error occurred between the document scan unit and
the document feeder.
Remedy: Contact the Customer Support Center.
062-790
Cause: The scanned document is copy-protected.
Remedy: Refer to the Safety Guide, and check to see if the document can be
copied.
065-210
Cause: An error occurred with the machine.
Remedy: Contact the Customer Support Center.
071-210
Cause: Paper Tray 1 malfunctioned.
Remedy: Contact the Customer Support Center. Trays other than Paper Tray 1
can be used.
072-210
Cause: Paper Tray 2 malfunctioned.
Remedy: Contact the Customer Support Center. Trays other than Paper Tray 2
can be used.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-25
Problem solving
Fault code
Cause and Remedy
073-210
Cause: Paper Tray 3 malfunctioned.
Remedy: Contact the Customer Support Center. Trays other than Paper Tray 3
can be used.
074-210
Cause: Paper Tray 4 malfunctioned.
Remedy: Contact the Customer Support Center. Trays other than Paper Tray 4
can be used.
075-210
075-211
Cause: Paper Tray 5 (bypass) malfunctioned.
Remedy: Power-cycle the machine. If the tray error is not fixed by performing the
relevant remedy, contact the Customer Support Center.
077-142
Cause: A “Pretransfer sensor ON” indicates a jam; this jam may be caused by any
of the following conditions: An error by the Pretransfer sensor, a worn fuser roll,
foreign material (such as paper) in the machine, or using media stock that is not
supported by the machine.
Remedy: Clear jammed paper.
078-213
078-214
078-282
078-283
Cause: Paper Tray 5 (Bypass) malfunctioned.
Remedy: Power-cycle the machine. If the tray errors are not fixed by performing
the relevant remedy, contact the Customer Support Center.
078-281
Check the paper loaded in Tray 5 and then power off/on the printer.
078-282
Power off/on the printer.
091-311
Cause: Charge Corotron cleaner failure.
Remedy: Power-cycle the machine. If the error is not fixed by performing the
relevant remedy, contact the Customer Support Center.
091-320
Cause: Charge Corotron fault.
Remedy: Power off/on the machine.
116-701
Cause: 2 sided print could not be made.
Remedy: Print each side separately.
116-702
Cause: Printing was performed using a substitute font.
Remedy: Check the print data.
116-703
Cause: An error occurred during PostScript processing.
Remedy: Either confirm the print data or click Spool Settings on the Details tab in
the print driver to set bi-directional communications to off.
116-710
Cause: A probable cause is that the correct document size could not be judged as
the receive data exceeded the HP-GL/2 spool size.
Remedy: Increase the size assigned to HP-GL/2 auto-layout memory.
116-713
Cause: Job was divided and printed due to insufficient disk space.
Remedy: Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free disk space.
116-714
Cause: An HP-GL/2 command error occurred.
Remedy: Check the print data.
116-720
Cause: An error occurred during printing as there was insufficient memory.
Remedy: Stop unnecessary ports and remove unnecessary data from the hard disk
to increase free disk space.
15-26
User Guide
Problem solving
Fault code
Cause and Remedy
116-740
Cause: Numerical value operation error occurred as a value exceeding the value
limit of the printer was used in the print data.
Remedy: Check the print data.
116-747
Cause: There are too many paper margin values for the HP-GL/2 effective
coordinate area.
Remedy: Reduce the paper margin values, and instruct it to print again.
116-748
Cause: There is no plot data in the HP-GL/2 print data.
Remedy: Check the print data.
116-749
Cause: Job cancelled because the specified font was unavailable.
Remedy: Install the font or set up a font replacement on the print driver side.
116-771
116-772
116-773
116-774
116-775
116-776
116-777
116-778
116-790
Cause: There was a problem with parameters in the JBIG data. They were
automatically edited.
Remedy: If any problem occurs in job result, try to process the job again.
116-780
Cause: There is a problem with the document attached to the received mail.
Remedy: Check the attached document.
124-345
124-346
124-347
124-348
124-349
Cause: A malfunction occurred in the machine.
Remedy: Power-cycle the machine. If the machine error is not fixed by performing
the relevant remedy, contact the Customer Support Center.
127-210
Cause: Communication error between the printer and the controller. Error detected
by the printer.
Remedy: Remove and reinsert the cable connection between the printer and the
controller. Power off and on both the printer and the controller. If the problem
persists, call the Customer Support Center.
127-211
Cause: Detected a communication error between the printer and the controller.
Remedy: Remove and reinsert the cable connection between the printer and the
controller. Power off and on both the printer and the controller. If the problem
persists, call the Customer Support Center.
127-212
Cause: Detected an internal print check error by the controller.
Remedy: Remove and reinsert the command/video cable between the controller
and the printer. Power off and on both the printer and the controller. If the problem
persists, call the Customer Support Center.
127-213
Cause: Detected a mismatch with the software version of the controller.
Remedy: Contact the Customer Support Center for information and/or instructions
to remedy the problem.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-27
Problem solving
Fault code
Cause and Remedy
127-220
Cause: Detected a communication error of the video system by the controller.
Remedy: Remove and reinsert the cable connection between the printer and the
controller. Power off and on both the printer and the controller. If the problem
persists, call the Customer Support Center.
127-221
Cause: Detected a communication error by the controller.
Remedy: Remove and reinsert the cable connection between the printer and the
controller. Power off and on both the printer and the controller. If the problem
persists, call the Customer Support Center.
127-311
Cause: Detected a fatal error by the controller.
Remedy: Power on/off both the controller and the printer. If the problem persists,
contact the Customer Support Center.
Remedies are described in this section for situations in which the following messages
are displayed.
Fault Code
Message
Cause and Remedy
A malfunction occurred. Cause: An error occurred.
Power-cycle the machine. Remedy: Turn off the power, wait until the Control Panel display
(xxx-yyy)
goes dark and then turn on power again. If the message persists,
record the displayed contents for (xxx-yyy). Switch off the machine
immediately, wait for the Control Panel display to go dark and
contact the Customer Support Center.
Completed with an error. Cause: An error occurred and the job completed.
(xxx-yyy)
Remedy: Retry operation after waiting for a period.
A fault has occurred. The
machine has rebooted.
Select Close. When in
doubt, report the
malfunction to our Call
Center.
(xxx-yyy)
Cause: An auto-recoverable internal error occurred and the machine
restarted automatically.
Remedy: Select the Close button. The machine is operating normally
now. If the error persists, call or contact the Customer Support Center.
Machine troubleshooting
Basic troubleshooting
Check the machine status for machine troubleshooting.
15-28
User Guide
Problem solving
Warning
Precision components and high-voltage power supplies are used on the machine. Never
open or remove machine covers that are screwed shut unless specifically instructed in
the User Guide. A high-voltage component can cause electric shocks. When opening the
panels and covers that are screwed shut to install or detach optional accessories, be sure
to follow instructions in the User Guide. Do not try to alter the machine configuration
or modify any parts. Doing so might cause machine malfunction or fire.
Symptoms
Check
Remedy
Power is not
switched ON.
Is the power switch on the
machine turned off?
Turn the power switch on.
Is the power cord plugged
into the power outlet?
Turn the power switch off and then firmly plug
in the power cord. Then turn the power switch
on.
Is the power cord
disconnected from the
machine or the rear of the
rack?
Display is dark.
Is power of the correct
voltage being supplied?
Make sure that the power supply is 200 -240 V
(volts), 15 A (amperes).
Make sure that power of capacity compatible
with the specified maximum power
consumption of the machine (2.8 - 3.1 KVA) is
being supplied.
Is the Power Saver button
on?
The machine is in the Power Saver mode. Press
the Power Saver button on the Control Panel
to cancel the Power Saver mode.
Is the brightness dial set too Adjust display brightness using the Brightness
low?
dial.
Unable to print, Is a message displayed on Follow the instructions displayed.
or
the Control Panel?
unable to copy.
Is the printer mode Offline? Press the Machine Status button and from the
Printer Mode, select Online.
Is the power cord
disconnected from the
machine or the rear of the
rack?
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
Turn the power switch off and then firmly plug
in the power cord. Then turn the power switch
on.
15-29
Problem solving
Symptoms
Check
Online indicator Is the interface cable
does not light
disconnected?
even though you
instructed it to
print.
Remedy
Turn the power switch off, unplug the power
cord from the power outlet, and check the
interface cable connection.
For information about network settings, refer
to the System Administration Guide.
Is the environment correctly Check the print driver and other environment
set on the personal
settings on the personal computer.
computer?
Is the required interface set? Check the status of the interface port in use.
For information about network settings, refer
to the System Administration Guide.
Tray 5 (Bypass)
printing failed.
Is correct paper loaded on
the tray?
Follow the instructions displayed to load paper
of the correct size and instruct it to print again.
Unsatisfactory
print quality.
Image defect.
Refer to the image quality troubleshooting
section for more information.
Text prints
Non-standard fonts are used Check the application or print driver settings.
incorrectly (text for printing.
is corrupted).
Online indicator Data remains in machine
lights, but copies memory.
are not delivered
with Online still
lit.
Cannot open or
close trays.
15-30
Cancel printing, or purge remaining data.
Did you open a cover or turn Turn the power off without closing or opening
power off during printing? a paper tray. Wait several seconds and then
turn the power switch on. Make sure that the
machine is online (ready to receive data) and
then close or open the paper tray.
User Guide
Problem solving
Symptoms
Check
Remedy
Copies are not
made at the
desired size.
Is the document scanning Clean the document feeder glass or the
glass or the document cover document cover.
dirty?
Is the document made of
Place the document on the document glass,
highly transparent material and place a white sheet of paper on top of the
like a transparency?
document before making a copy.
Is the document at the
correct position?
Load the document correctly.
Is the document loaded
correctly?
Are the document guides at Properly set the document guides.
the correct position?
Paper is often
jammed or
wrinkled.
Is the document folded or
bent?
Straighten and properly reset the document.
Is the document a nonstandard size?
Enter the document size.
Is paper loaded properly in
the paper tray?
Load paper correctly.
Is the paper tray set
properly?
To ensure tray closure, Firmly push it in as far
as possible.
Is the paper damp?
Replace with paper from a new ream.
Is the paper curled?
Either turn the paper so that the curl is facing
down in the paper tray, or replace with paper
from a new ream.
Are the paper and paper tray Make sure the paper and paper tray selected
settings correct?
match the paper size settings.
Refer to “Paper Tray Settings” in the System
Administration Guide.
Are there any torn pieces of Open the door of the machine or slide out the
paper still remaining inside paper tray to remove the torn paper or the
the machine or is there a
foreign object.
foreign object in the
machine?
Is out-of-spec paper loaded Replace with paper that meets machine
in the tray?
specifications.
Is the paper tray loaded past Load paper in the paper tray so that it does not
its maximum fill line?
exceed the maximum fill line.
Is the paper guide set
correctly?
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
Load the paper correctly, and apply the paper
guides lightly.
15-31
Problem solving
Symptoms
Check
Remedy
Documents are
not fed into the
document
feeder.
Are the documents too
small?
The minimum size of the document that can
be loaded on the document feeder is A5 and
5.5 X 8.5.in.
An error
message is
displayed after
paper is loaded
in paper Tray 5
(Bypass) and the
Start button is
pressed.
Check the position of the
paper guides at the front
side of paper Tray 5
(Bypass).
Set the paper guides to the correct positions.
Documents jam Is the right type of
often.
paper/media being used?
Make sure the document feeder is loaded
properly with acceptable media.
Are you trying to copy
irregular shaped documents,
business cards,
transparencies, or thin
documents?
Are you trying to copy
documents affixed with
sticky labels, paper clips or
adhesive tape?
Remove sticky labels, paper clips or adhesive
tape from the document before copying.
Are the document guides at Properly set the document guides.
the correct position?
Is part of the document
Open the document feeder cover and check for
ripped, and a piece of paper pieces of paper.
remaining in the document
feeder?
When importing originals of Set Mixed Size Originals to ON.
different sizes, is the Mixed
Size Originals setting set to
ON?
Is an A5-size document
Load the A5-size document vertically.
loaded horizontally () on the
document feeder when the
Mixed Size Originals feature
is in use?
A corner of the
document is
folded.
Is the document curled?
Flatten out the curl and load the document
again.
Image quality problems
When output image quality is poor, review the following table for solutions.
15-32
User Guide
Problem solving
If image quality is not improved after performing the relevant remedy, contact the
Customer Support Center.
Symptoms
Check
Remedy
The copy is dirty. Is the document glass or
Clean the document glass or the document
the document cover dirty? cover.
Is the document made of If the document is highly transparent, marks
highly transparent material on the document cover will be copied. Place a
like a transparency?
white sheet of paper on the document and
make a copy.
Is the document colored, of Either adjust the copy density or image quality
a rough texture or a
and then retry copying.
blueprint?
Are you making copies of
glossy printing paper?
Glossy printing paper sticks easily to the
document glass and shadows are sometimes
copied and reproduced as dirt. Place a
transparency or highly transparent film under
the document and retry copying.
The copy has
black lines.
Is the scanning glass on the Clean the document glass.
feeder dirty?
The copy is too
dark.
Is the copy density set to
Dark?
The copy is too
light.
Is the copy density set to
Light?
The copy shifts
slightly.
Is the paper shifting or is Load the paper so it is flush against the paper
the leading edge of the
tray corners.
paper not loaded flush with
the tray corners?
Images on the
Is the document loaded
copy are skewed. correctly?
Adjust the copy density.
Load the document correctly.
Is paper loaded properly in Load paper correctly.
the tray?
Is the paper guide for paper Load paper correctly.
Tray 5 (Bypass) set so that
the tray touches the paper?
Are the document guides at Load the document correctly, and align the
the correct position?
document guides with the edge of the
document.
Is the paper tray set
properly?
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
Firmly push in the tray as far as possible.
15-33
Problem solving
Symptoms
Check
Remedy
Part of the image Is the paper damp?
Replace with paper from a new ream.
is missing on the
Is the loaded paper folded
copy.
or wrinkled?
Is the document pasted
together or folded in?
The pasted or folded in section may be curling
back, and risen up from the surface of the
document glass. Place a stack of white sheets
on the document to hold the document down
flat against the document glass.
A stripe pattern Is the document
appears in copies. enlargement ratio set too
large?
Some enlargement ratios can cause stripes.
Adjust the copy enlargement ratio.
Symptoms
Check
Remedy
Printing is faint
(smudged,
unclear).
Is the paper damp?
Replace with paper from a new ream.
The drum cartridge is
depleted or damaged.
Contact the Customer Support Center.
Black dots are
printed.
The drum cartridge is
depleted or damaged.
Contact the Customer Support Center.
Black lines are
printed.
The drum cartridge is
depleted or damaged.
Contact the Customer Support Center.
The scanning glass on the Clean the document feeder glass.
document feeder is dirty.
Dirt appears at
equal intervals.
Dirt on the paper feed
path.
Print a few pages.
The drum cartridge is
depleted or damaged.
Contact the Customer Support Center.
White dots appear The paper in use is
in black filled
unsuitable.
areas.
The drum cartridge is
depleted or damaged.
Load suitable paper.
- Printed toner
Is the paper damp?
smudges when
rubbed with your The paper in use is
unsuitable.
finger.
- Toner is not fused
to the paper.
- The paper is
dirtied with toner.
Replace with paper from a new ream.
The entire paper
area is printed
black.
Contact the Customer Support Center.
15-34
The drum cartridge is
depleted or damaged.
Contact the Customer Support Center.
Load suitable paper.
High-voltage power supply Contact the Customer Support Center.
malfunction.
User Guide
Problem solving
Symptoms
Check
Nothing is printed. Two or more sheets of
paper are being fed
simultaneously (doublefeed).
Remedy
Fan the paper and reset.
High-voltage power supply Contact the Customer Support Center.
malfunction.
White areas or
stripes appear.
Is the paper damp?
Replace with paper from a new ream.
The paper in use is
unsuitable.
Load suitable paper.
The entire page is If the print was made
Load paper of the correct size and type into
printed faint.
using Tray 5 (Bypass), the Tray 5 (Bypass).
size and type of the loaded Fan the paper thoroughly before loading it.
paper differed from the
setting on the print driver.
Paper becomes
wrinkled.
Text is blurred.
Two or more sheets may
be feeding at once.
Fan the paper thoroughly and reset.
The paper in use is
unsuitable.
Replace with paper from a new ream.
Paper is being added while
it is being fed.
Is the paper damp?
Outline characters The drum cartridge is
on a colored
depleted or damaged.
background
longwise.
Contact the Customer Support Center.
Text or images are The paper guide in the
Set the horizontal and vertical paper guides to
printed at an
paper tray is not set at the the correct positions.
angle.
correct position.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-35
Problem solving
Image is not what was expected
Symptoms
The image is dirty
Yes
If No, go to next symptom.
Cause and Remedy (Action)
Cause
The document glass or the document cover is dirty.
Action Clean the document glass or the document cover.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
The document is made of highly transparent
material like a transparency.
Action If the document is highly transparent, marks on
the document cover will appear on the image. Place
a white sheet of paper on the document and scan.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
The document is colored, of a rough texture or a
blueprint, for example.
Action Either adjust the copy density or image quality and
then retry scanning.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
Glossy printing paper is being scanned.
Action Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the document
glass and shadows are sometimes scanned and
reproduced as dirt. Place a transparency or highly
transparent film under the document and retry
scanning.
Image is too dark, or too Yes
light
If No, go to next symptom.
Cause
Scan density is set to Dark, or to Light.
Action Adjust the scan density.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
The Original Type is inappropriate.
Action Select an image quality appropriate for the
document.
Part of the image is
Yes
missing
If No, go to next symptom.
15-36
Cause
The document is pasted together or folded in.
Action It is possible that the folded in or pasted part of
the document is not touching the document glass.
Place a stack of white sheets on the document to
hold the document down flat against the document
glass.
User Guide
Problem solving
Symptoms
Cause and Remedy (Action)
The image is not the
Yes
desired size
If No, go to next symptom.
Cause
The document glass or the document cover is dirty.
Action Clean the document glass or the document cover.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
The document is made of highly transparent
material like a transparency.
Action Place a white sheet of paper on the document and
scan.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
The document is misaligned.
Action Load the document correctly.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
The document guides are in an incorrect position.
Action Load the document correctly, and align the
document guides with the edges of the document.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
The document is a non-standard size.
Action Enter the document size and then scan.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
The document is folded or bent.
Action Straighten and properly reset the document.
The image is coarse
Yes
Cause
Resolution is too low.
Action Set a higher resolution.
Copy troubleshooting
To use the following troubleshooting procedures:
1. Begin by reading the first symptom at the left side of the page.
2. If the description of the symptom is false (NO), move downward to the next symptom.
Continue down through the symptoms until you find the symptom that describes
the problem.
3. Refer to the Causes and Actions to the right of the correct symptom. Perform the
suggested actions until the problem is solved.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-37
Problem solving
Unable to copy
Symptoms
Yes/No
Causes and Actions
Document is not fed
properly from the
document feeder
Yes
Cause
Document size is too small.
Action
The minimum document size that can be loaded
on the document feeder is A5.
If No, go to next
symptom.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
The right type of document is not being used.
Action
The document feeder cannot be used with
irregular sized documents, business cards,
transparencies, or thin documents.
In addition, documents with tags, paper clips,
and cellophane tape cannot be used.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
The document guides are incorrectly set.
Action
Set the document guides to match the
document size.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
Part of the document is ripped, and a piece of
paper remains in the document feeder.
Action
Open the document feeder cover, and remove
the piece of paper.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
15-38
Cause
Documents of different sizes are set.
Action
When setting documents of different sizes, be
sure to specify Mixed Size Originals.
User Guide
Problem solving
The copy result is not what was expected
Symptoms
Yes/No
Causes and Actions
The copy is dirty
If No, go to next
symptom.
Yes
Cause
The document glass or the document cover is dirty.
Action Clean the document glass or the document cover.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
The document is made of highly transparent
material like a transparency.
Action If the document is highly transparent, marks on
the document cover will be copied. Place a white
sheet of paper on the document and make a copy.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
Color paper, rough paper, or blueprint paper is
being used.
Action The background color of the paper is copied. Either
adjust the copy density or image quality, or specify
suppress background color, and retry copying.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
Glossy printing paper is being used.
Action Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the document
glass, and shadows are sometimes copied and
reproduced as dirt. Place a transparency or highly
transparent film under the document and retry
copying.
The copy is too dark or
too light
If No, go to next
symptom.
Yes
Cause
Copy density is set to Dark, or to Light.
Action Adjust the copy density.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
Density of the document is too light.
Action Adjust the copy density.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
The Original Type is inappropriate.
Action Copy black text. If it is too light, select Text for
Original Type.
Symptoms
Yes/No Causes and Actions
The copy shifts slightly
If No, go to next
symptom.
Yes
Cause Paper set in the paper tray is misaligned.
Action Align the edges of the paper, and load it flush against
the front tray corners.
Refer to .
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-39
Problem solving
Symptoms
Yes/No Causes and Actions
Part of the image is
missing on the copy
If No, go to next
symptom.
Yes
Cause The paper is damp.
Action Replace with paper from a new ream.
Refer to .
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause Paper with folds or wrinkles has been set in the paper
tray.
Action Replace with paper from a new ream.
Refer to .
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause The document is pasted together or folded in.
Action The folded in or pasted part of the document may
not be touching the document glass. Place a stack of
white sheets on the document to hold the document
down flat against the document glass.
Stripes appear in the
copy
If No, go to next
symptom.
Yes
Cause The document enlargement ratio is too large.
Action Stripes can appear at some enlargement ratios. Adjust
the copy enlargement ratio.
Refer to .
Images on the copy are Yes
skewed
If No, go to next
symptom.
Cause The document is not loaded correctly.
Action Load the document correctly.
Refer to .
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause The document guides are set incorrectly.
Action Load the document correctly and align the document
guides with the edges of the document.
Refer to .
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Symptoms
Yes/No Causes and Actions
Images on the copy are Yes
skewed
If No, go to next
symptom.
Cause The paper tray is not set properly.
Action Set the tray by firmly pushing it in as far as possible.
Refer to .
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause The paper guide for Tray 5 (Bypass) is misaligned.
Action Load the paper correctly, and align the paper guide
with the edge of the paper.
15-40
User Guide
Problem solving
Symptoms
Yes/No Causes and Actions
Copies are not made at Yes
the desired size
If No, go to next
symptom.
Cause The document glass or the document cover is dirty.
Action Clean the document glass or the document cover.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause The document is made of highly transparent material
like a transparency.
Action Place a white sheet of paper on the document before
copying.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause The document is misaligned.
Action Load the document correctly.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause The document guides are in an incorrect position.
Action Load the document correctly, and align the document
guides with the edges of the document.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause The document is a non-standard size.
Action Enter the document size and then copy.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause The document is folded or bent.
Action Straighten and properly reset the document.
Print troubleshooting
This section describes solutions for problems encountered during printing.
1.
2.
Unable to print
The print result was not what was expected
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-41
Problem solving
Unable to print
Symptoms
Yes/No
Causes and Actions
Data remains in the
printer icon
If No, go to next
symptom.
Yes
Cause
The printer is not powered on.
Action Turn the power on.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
The network cable is disconnected from the
computer.
Action Connect the network cable to the computer.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
The network cable is disconnected from the
machine.
Action Connect the network cable to the machine.
For information about network settings, refer
to the System Administration Guide.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
Printer mode is set to Offline.
Action Press the Machine Status button and confirm
the Printer Mode in the Machine Status screen.
If Printer Mode is Offline, select Online in the
Printer Mode screen.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
15-42
User Guide
Problem solving
Symptoms
Yes/No
Causes and Actions
Data remains in the
printer icon
If No, go to next
symptom.
Yes
Cause
An error occurred with the printer.
Action Check the error details.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
The IP address or SMB network path is
misconfigured.
Action Configure a correct IP address or SMB network
path.
For information about network settings, refer
to the System Administration Guide.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
The network connection between the computer
and machine is abnormal.
Action Check with your system administrator.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
The port is not enabled.
Action Enable the port in use.
For information about network settings, refer
to the System Administration Guide.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
Insufficient space available on the hard disk.
Action Delete unnecessary data to increase free space.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
The printer is connected to multiple computers.
Action Wait for a while, and then try printing again.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-43
Problem solving
Symptoms
Yes/No
Causes and Actions
Sent to printer
If No, go to next
symptom.
Yes
Cause
Out of paper.
Action Supply paper to the printer.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
No paper for the specified paper size.
Action Set paper for the specified paper size.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
Copy operation is performed during interrupt,
and interrupt is performed.
Action Cancel the interrupt operation.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
An error occurred with the printer.
Action Check the error details.
The printed result is not what was expected
Symptoms
Yes/No
Causes and Actions
Printing performed with
a different paper size
If No, go to next
symptom.
Yes
Cause
The image is cut off on
the edge of the paper
If No, go to next
symptom.
Yes
Paper size provided is different from the specified
tray size.
Action Change the paper size set in the tray, or change
print options to specify a tray that contains the
appropriate size.
The printed font differs Yes
from the font specified on
the computer
If No, go to next
symptom.
Cause
Image exceeds the printable area of the machine.
Action Increase the printable area of the machine, or
decrease the document print area.
Cause
Font replacement is configured on the print driver.
Action Check the font replacement table.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
Non-standard fonts are used for printing.
Action Check the application or print driver settings.
If PostScript is being used, download the required
fonts.
15-44
User Guide
Problem solving
Symptoms
Yes/No
Causes and Actions
Printing is slow
If No, go to next
symptom.
Yes
Cause
Symptoms
Yes/No Causes and Actions
Action When printing image data that has image quality
as a priority, such as pictures, the print speed
decreases. Turn off the quality priority in the print
mode.
The settings specified for Yes
print options do not take
effect
If No, go to next
symptom.
There is no edge.
The print mode specifies Print Quality.
Yes
Cause
A print driver for another model is in use.
Action
Install the print driver for this model.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
The optional apparatus cannot be attached to the
printer.
Action
Check the options attached with this printer and
reset the printer configuration.
Cause
Image exceeds the printable area of the machine.
Action
Increase the printable area of the machine, or
decrease the document print area.
Scan troubleshooting
Note
An optional package may be necessary for this feature. For more information, contact
the Customer Support Center.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-45
Problem solving
Unable to scan with the machine
Symptoms
Yes/No
Causes and Actions
Document not fed
properly from the
document feeder
Yes
Cause
Document size is too small.
Action The minimum size of the document that can be
loaded on the document feeder is A5.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
The right type of document is not being used.
Action The document feeder cannot be used with
irregular sized documents, business cards,
transparencies, or thin documents.
In addition, documents with tags, paper clips,
and cellophane tape cannot be used.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
The document guides are in the incorrect
position.
Action Set the document guides to correctly match the
document size.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
Part of the document is ripped and a piece of
paper remaining in the document feeder.
Action Open the document feeder cover and remove
the piece of paper.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
Documents of different sizes are set.
Action When using documents of different sizes you
must specify Mixed Size Originals, otherwise, a
paper jam will result. When setting documents
of different sizes, be sure to specify Mixed Size
Originals.
15-46
User Guide
Problem solving
Unable to import the scanned document into the computer
Symptoms
Yes/No
Unable to find scanner
Yes
If No, go to next symptom.
Causes and Actions
Cause
The printer is not powered on.
Action Turn the power on.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
The network cable is disconnected from the
computer.
Action Connect the network cable to the computer.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
The network cable is disconnected from the
machine.
Action Connect the network cable to the machine.
For information about network settings, refer to
the System Administration Guide.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
The Salutation port is not enabled.
Action Enable the Salutation port.
For information about network settings, refer to
the System Administration Guide.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
The network connection between the computer
and machine is abnormal.
Action Check with your system administrator.
Unable to open Mailbox Yes
If No, go to next symptom.
Cause
No Mailbox has been created.
Action Create a Mailbox.
Refer to “Local Disk/Mailbox” in the System
Administration Guide.
If problem is not solved, go to next
Cause/Action.
Cause
Mailbox password forgotten.
Action Unable to verify password. Set the password to
Off, and then reset the password again.
Refer to “Local Disk/Mailbox” in the System
Administration Guide.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-47
Problem solving
Symptoms
Yes/No
Causes and Actions
Scanner unable to scan
Yes
data due to TWAIN
transmission error
If No, go to next symptom.
Cause
Operation halts during
scanning
Cause
Yes
The scan driver is not installed.
Action Install the scan driver.
Is the file size too big?
Action Reduce the resolution, or choose a compressed
output file format, and rescan.
Unable to send the scanned document over the network (FTP/SMB)
Symptoms
Yes/No Causes and Actions
Unable to forward over
the network
Yes
Cause
Is the server entered correctly?
Action Check the inputted server.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
Is the save location entered correctly?
Action Check the save location.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
When using SMB, is the Shared Name entered
correctly?
Action Check the Shared Name.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
When using SMB (UNC Format), is the save
location entered correctly?
Action Check the save location.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
Is the login name entered correctly?
Action Check the login name.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
Is the password entered correctly?
Action Check the password.
15-48
User Guide
Problem solving
Problems with sending Email
Symptoms
Yes/No Causes and Actions
Unable to send e-mail
Yes
Cause
Mail address is incorrect
Action Check the e-mail address.
If problem is not solved, go to next Cause/Action.
Cause
Maximum sending e-mail size is exceeded
Action Change the maximum sending e-mail size, or
reduce the resolution.
Refer to Maximum E-mail Size in the System
Administration Guide.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
15-49
Problem solving
15-50
User Guide
16
Specifications
D95 Copy specifications
Item
95
Copier Type
Console
Scanning Resolution
600 × 600dpi (23.6 × 23.6 dots/mm)
Output Resolution
600 × 600dpi (23.6 × 23.6 dots/mm)
Gradation
256 gradation
Warm-up Time
6 minutes or less (when the room temperature at 68° F/20° C)
Copy Document
The maximum size is 297 × 432 mm (A3, 11 × 17in.) for both sheets
and books
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
16-1
Specifications
Item
95
Copy Paper Size
Max: A3/11 x 17 in., 12.6 × 19.2in. (330 × 488 mm)
Min: A5/5.75 x 8.25 in. [Postcard for Tray 5 (Bypass)]
Image loss:
Lead edge/trail edge: 0.157 in./4 mm or less
Front/back 0.157 in./4 mm or less.
Paper Trays 1 - 2
8.5 x 11 in./A4
Paper Trays 3 - 4
A5, A4 LEF, A4 SEF, A3, B5, B4
8.5 × 11 in., 8.5 × 11in., 8.5 × 13 in., 8.5 × 14 in., 11 × 17 in., 12.6 ×
19.2 in. (320 x 488 mm)
8K,16K, tab paper (8.5 x 11 in./A4)
Non-standard size: X direction from 5.5-13 in./140-330 mm, Y
direction from 7-19 in./182-488 mm
Tray 5 (Bypass)
A6, A5, A4, A4, B4
8.5 × 11 in., 8.5 × 11in., 8.5 × 13 in., 8.5 × 14 in.,11 × 17 in., 12 × 18
in., 12.6 x 19.2 in. (320 x 488 mm)
8K,16K
Non-standard size: X direction from 5.8-19 in./148-488 mm, Y
direction from 4-13 in./100-330 mm
When using Trays 3, 4 and 5 (Bypass) to copy a non-standard size
document on both sides, set X direction from 5.5 x 13 in./140 to 330
mm and Y direction from 7 x 19 in./182-488 mm.
Copy Paper
Trays 1-4, 6, 7 : 13 - 57 lb./52 - 216 gsm
Tray 5 (Bypass) : 13 - 67lb./52 - 253 gsm
Use Xerox recommended papers for best results.
First Copy Output Time
Values may differ
depending on machine
configuration.
3.5 seconds (When the Document Glass, 100%
Reduction/Enlargement, Tray 1, 8.5 x 11 in./A4 are used)
5.0 seconds (A4/Document Feeder/Finisher Output Tray)
Copy Reduction /
Enlargement Ratio
100%: 1:1 ± 0.7%
Preset%: 1:0.500,1:0.707,1:0.816,1:0.866,
1:1.154,1:1.225,1:1.414,1:1.632, 1:2.000
Variable%: 1:0.25 to 1:4.00 (in 1% increments)
16-2
User Guide
Specifications
Item
95
Continuous Copy Speed
The speed may be
reduced in order to adjust
image quality.
The performance may be
reduced depending on
the paper type.
Continuous 1-sided copy/100% reduction/enlargement
7 x 10 in./B5: 95 sheets/min
8.5 x 11 in./A4: 90 sheets/min
SEF:
8.5 x 11 in./A4: 64 sheets/min
7 x 10 in./B5: 64 sheets/min
10 x 14 in./B4: 56 sheets/min
11 x 17in./A3: 50 sheets/min
Continuous 2-sided copy/100% reduction/enlargement
7 x 10 in./B5: 86 pages/min
8.5 x 11 in./A4: 81 pages/min
SEF:
8.5 x 11 in./A4: 64 pages/min
7 x 10 in./B5: 64 pages/min
10 x 14 in./B4: 56 pages/min
11 x 17 in./A3: 50 pages/min
Paper Feed Method/
Capacity
Standard:
Tray 1: 1,200 sheets
Tray 2: 1,800 sheets
Trays 3 and 4: 600 sheets each
Tray 5/Bypass: 280 sheets
Trays 6 and 7 (optional High Capacity Feeder): 2,300 sheets each.
Maximum paper capacity: 9080 pages (including Trays 6 and 7
(optional High Capacity Feeder)
The maximum paper capacity (9080) is based on 20 lb./75 gsm
Continuous Copy Pages
9,999 sheets
The machine may pause temporarily to perform an image
stabilization.
D110/D125 Copy specifications
Item
110/125
Copier Type
Console
Scanning Resolution
600 × 600dpi (23.6 × 23.6 dots/mm)
Output Resolution
600 × 600dpi (23.6 × 23.6 dots/mm)
Gradation
256 gradation
Warm-up Time
5 minutes or less (when the room temperature at 68° F/20° C)
Copy Document
The maximum size is 297 × 432 mm (A3, 11 × 17in.) for both sheets
and books
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
16-3
Specifications
Item
110/125
Copy Paper Size
Max: 12.6 × 19.2in. (320 × 488 mm), 13 x 19 (330 x 483 mm)
Min: A5/5.75 x 8.25 in. (Postcard for Tray 5 (Bypass))
Image loss:
Lead edge/trail edge: 0.157 in./4 mm or less
Front/back 0.157 in./4 mm or less.
Paper Trays 1 - 2
8.5 x 11 in./A4
Paper Trays 3 - 4
A5, A4 LEF, A4 SEF, A3, B5, B4
8.5 × 11 in. LEF, 8.5 × 11 in. SEF, 8.5 × 13 in., 8.5 × 14 in., 11 × 17 in.,
12.6 × 19.2 in. (320 x 488 mm)
8K,16K, tab paper (8.5 x 11 in./A4)
Non-standard size: X direction from 5.5-13 in./140-330 mm, Y
direction from 7-19 in./182-488 mm
Tray 5 (Bypass)
A6, A5, A4 LEF, A4 SEF, B4
8.5 × 11 in. LEF, 8.5 × 11in. SEF, 8.5 × 13 in., 8.5 × 14 in.,11 × 17 in.,
12 × 18 in., 12.6 x 19.2 in. (320 x 488 mm)
, 13 x 19 in. (330 x 483 mm)
8K,16K
Non-standard size: X direction from 5.8-19 in./148-488 mm, Y
direction from 4-13 in./100-330 mm
When using Trays 3, 4 and 5 (Bypass) to copy a non-standard size
document on both sides, set X direction from 5.5 x 13 in./140 to 330
mm and Y direction from 7 x 19 in./182-488 mm.
Copy Paper
Trays 1-4, 6, 7 : 13 - 57 lb./52 - 216 gsm
Tray 5 (Bypass) : 13 - 67lb./52 - 253 gsm
Use Xerox recommended papers for best results.
First Copy Output Time
Values may differ
depending on machine
configuration.
3.5 seconds (When the Document Glass, 100%
Reduction/Enlargement, Tray 1, 8.5 x 11 in./A4 are used)
5.0 seconds (A4/Document Feeder/Finisher Output Tray)
Copy Reduction /
Enlargement Ratio
100%: 1:1 ± 0.7%
Preset%: 1:0.500,1:0.707,1:0.816,1:0.866,
1:1.154,1:1.225,1:1.414,1:1.632, 1:2.000
Variable%: 1:0.25 to 1:4.00 (in 1% increments)
16-4
User Guide
Specifications
Item
110/125
Continuous Copy Speed
The speed may be
reduced in order to adjust
image quality.
The performance may be
reduced depending on
the paper type.
Continuous 1-sided copy/100% reduction/enlargement
7 x 10 in./B5: 116 sheets/min
8.5 x 11 in./A4: 110 sheets/min
SEF:
8.5 x 11 in./A4: 78 sheets/min
7 x 10 in./B5: 78 sheets/min
10 x 14 in./B4: 69 sheets/min
11 x 17 in./A3: 55 sheets/min
Continuous 2-sided copy/100% reduction/enlargement
7 x 10 in./B5: 116 pages/min
8.5 x 11 in./A4: 110 pages/min
SEF:
8.5 x 11 in./A4: 70 pages/min
7 x 10 in./B5: 70 pages/min
10 x 14 in./B4: 62 pages/min
11 x 17 in./A3: 55 pages/min
Paper Feed Method/
Capacity
Standard:
Tray 1: 1,200 sheets
Tray 2: 1,800 sheets
Trays 3 and 4: 600 sheets each
Tray 5/Bypass: 280 sheets
Trays 6 and 7 (optional High Capacity Feeder): 2,300 sheets each.
Maximum paper capacity: 9080 pages (including Trays 6 and 7
(optional High Capacity Feeder)
The maximum paper capacity (9080) is based on 20 lb./75 gsm
Continuous Copy Pages
9,999 sheets
The machine may pause temporarily to perform an image
stabilization.
D136 Copy specifications
Item
136
Copier Type
Console
Scanning Resolution
600 × 600dpi (23.6 × 23.6 dots/mm)
Output Resolution
600 × 600dpi (23.6 × 23.6 dots/mm)
Gradation
256 gradation
Warm-up Time
5 minutes or less (when the room temperature at 68° F/20° C)
Copy Document
The maximum size is 297 × 432 mm (A3, 11 × 17in.) for both sheets
and books
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
16-5
Specifications
Item
136
Copy Paper Size
Max: 12.6 × 19.2in. (320 × 488 mm), 13 x 19 (330 x 483 mm)
Bypass tray: A3/12.6 x 19.2 in., (320 x 488mm), 13 x 19 in. (330 x
483mm)
Min:
IOT tray: A5
Bypass (tray 5): A5/5.75 x 8.25 in. (Postcard)
Image loss:
0.197 in./5 mm or less
Paper Trays 1 - 2
8.5 x 11 in./A4
Paper Trays 3 - 4
A5, A4 LEF, A4 SEF, A3, B5, B4
8.5 × 11 in. LEF, 8.5 × 11in. SEF, 8.5 × 13 in., 8.5 × 14 in., 11 × 17 in.,
12.6 × 19.2 in. (320 x 488 mm)
8K,16K, tab paper (8.5 x 11 in./A4)
Non-standard size: X direction from 5.5-13 in./140-330 mm, Y
direction from 7-19 in./182-488 mm
Tray 5 (Bypass)
A6, A5, A4 LEF, A4 SEF, B4
8.5 × 11 in. LEF, 8.5 × 11in. SEF, 8.5 × 13 in., 8.5 × 14 in.,11 × 17 in.,
12 × 18 in., 12.6 x 19.2 in. (320 x 488 mm), 13 x 19 (330 x 483 mm)
8K,16K
Non-standard size: X direction from 5.8-19 in./148-488 mm, Y
direction from 4-13 in./100-330 mm
When using Trays 3, 4 and 5 (Bypass) to copy a non-standard size
document on both sides, set X direction from 5.5 x 13 in./140 to 330
mm and Y direction from 7 x 19 in./182-488 mm.
Copy Paper
Trays 1-4 and HCF 6, 7: 13 - 57 lb./52 - 216 gsmTray 5 (Bypass) and
OHCF 6, 7: 13 - 67 lb./52 - 253 gsmUse Xerox recommended papers
for best results.
First Copy Output Time
Values may differ
depending on machine
configuration.
A4 lateral/B & W: Platen: 3.7 seconds, DADF: 5.2 sec
Copy magnification
Magnification
1:1±0.7% 1:1.154,1:1.225,1:1.414,1:1.632, 1:2.000
Variable%: 1:0.25 to 1:4.00 (in 1% increments)
Fixed magnification
1:0.250, 1:0.500, 1:0.612, 1:0.707, 1:0.816, 1:0.866,1:1.154, 1:1.225,
1:1.414, 1:1.632, 1:2.000, 1:4.000
Arbitrary magnification
1:0.25-1:4.00 (in 1% increments)
16-6
User Guide
Specifications
Item
136
Continuous Copy Speed
The speed may be
reduced in order to adjust
image quality.
The performance may be
reduced depending on
the paper type.
A4 lateral: 136 sheet/min
B5 lateral: 136 sheet/min
A4/B5: 95 sheet/min
B4: 82 sheet/min
A3: 68 sheet/min
Paper Feed Method/
Capacity
Standard:
Tray 1: 1,200 sheets
Tray 2: 1,800 sheets
Trays 3 and 4: 600 sheets each
Tray 5/Bypass: 280 sheets
Trays 6 and 7 (optional High Capacity Feeder): 2,300 sheets each
Maximum paper capacity: 9080 pages (including Trays 6 and 7
(optional High Capacity Feeder)
The maximum paper capacity (9080) is based on 20 lb./75 gsm
Continuous Copy Pages
9,999 sheets
The machine may pause temporarily to perform an image
stabilization.
Print specifications
Type
Built-in type
Continuous Print Speed
The same as Copy.
When continuously printing a single document 8.5 x 11 in./A4:
Speed may be reduced during image quality adjustment when
High Precision] is specified for the Print Mode] of PCL driver, or
when [High Precision] or [High Image Quality] is specified for
the [Print Mode] of PostScript driver.
Performance may be reduced depending on the paper type.
Resolution
Output resolution: 600 × 600 dpi (47.2 × 47.2 dots/mm)
Data processing resolution: 2400 × 600 dpi (47.2 × 47.2
dots/mm)
Page Description Language
PCL6, PCL5, Adobe PostScript 3
Emulation
ESC/P (VP-1000), HP-GL (HP7586B), HP-GL2/RTL (HP Design
Jet 750C Plus), PCL5c/PCLXL (HP Color Laser Jet 5500), ESCP/
K, KS/KSSM
Memory Capacity
512 MB (maximum 512 MB)
Built-in Fonts
PCL: European 82 type faces, symbol 86 sets
PostScript: European 136 type faces
Interface
Standard: Ethernet (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
USB 2.0
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
16-7
Specifications
Type
Built-in type
Supported Protocol
Ethernet: TCP/IP (SMB, LPD, Port9100, IPP, WSD, Novell
Netware), NetBEUI (SMB), (IPX/SPX), (NetWare), EtherTalk
(Apple Talk)
Supported OS
PCL5c:
Microsoft Windows 7
Microsoft Windows 2000,
Microsoft Windows XP,
Microsoft Windows Server 2003,
Microsoft Windows Vista
PostScript:
Microsoft Windows 2000,
Microsoft Windows XP,
Microsoft Windows Server 2003,
Microsoft Windows Vista,
Mac OS 7.5 or later
Mac OS 8x, 9x
Mac OS X 10.x
Scan specifications
Type
Color scanner
Scan Size
Maximum size: 297 × 432 mm (A3/11 × 17in.) for both sheets
and books
Scan Resolution
600 × 600dpi, 400 × 400dpi, 300 × 300dpi, 200 × 200dpi
(23.6 × 23.6, 15.7 × 15.7, 11.8 × 11.8, 7.9 × 7.9 dots/mm)
Scan Graduation
Color: 10-bit input / 8-bit output for each RGB color
Monochrome: 1 bit input, 1 bit output
color: 10 bit input, 8 bit output for each RGB color
Document Scan Speed
200 copies/min (Scanning into mailbox for ITU-T No.1 chart
8.5 x 11 in./A4 200dpi)
Important: Scanning speed varies by the document.
Interface
Sharing with print controller
Scan to Mailbox
Supported protocol: TCP/IP (Salutation, HTTP)
Output format: Monochrome (2 colors: TIFF)
Driver: TWAIN (Salutation)
Driver supported OS: Windows 2000/XP, Microsoft Windows
Server 2003, Microsoft Windows Vista, Windows 7
16-8
User Guide
Specifications
Type
Color scanner
Scan to PC
Supported protocol: TCP/IP (SMB, FTP), NetBEUI (SMB)
Supported Operating Systems: Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista,
Windows 7, Novell NetWare 5.x
*1 SMB protocol only is supported.
*2 FTP protocol only is supported.
Output format:
Monochrome 2 colors: TIFF (compression type: MH and MMR)
DocuWorks, PDF
E-Mail
Supported protocol: TCP/IP (SMTP)
Output format
Monochrome 2 colors: TIFF (compression type: MH and MMR)
DocuWorks documents, PDF
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
(DADF) specifications
Item
Specification
Document Size/Type
Size:
Maximum: A3/11 × 17 in. (297 ×432 mm)
Minimum: A5/5.82 x 8.26” (148 x 210 mm)
Weight: 10-53 lb./38-200gsm (2 sided: 50-200 gsm)
Type:
A5, A5, A4, A4, 8.5 × 11 in., 8.5 × 14 in. (SEF), 11 × 17 in. (SEF)
Paper Capacity
250 sheets
When using Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm paper.
Document Changing Speed
(8.5 x 11 in./A4 portrait, 1sided)
Monochrome: 80 sheets/min
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
16-9
Specifications
16-10
User Guide
17
High Capacity Feeder
(HCF/Trays 6 and 7), 8.5 x
11 in./A4
The two-tray High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7) provides an extra 4,000 sheet
capacity of either 8.5 x 11 in. or A4 paper. Each tray holds 2000 sheets (from 16 lb. Bond
to 80 lb. Cover/52 gsm to 216 gsm).
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
17-1
High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7), 8.5 x 11 in./A4
Loading media into the HCF (Trays 6 and
7)
1. Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job.
2. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops.
3. To change the paper size, perform the following:
a) Remove any paper currently loaded in the tray.
b) Loosen the two screws to remove the guides.
c) Adjust the guides to fit the new paper size and retighten the two screws.
4. Open the ream of paper with the seam side facing up.
5. Fan the sheets before loading them into the tray.
6. Load and align the edge of the paper against the RIGHT edge of the tray.
7. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray settings screen may be
displayed on the UI.
17-2
User Guide
High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7), 8.5 x 11 in./A4
8. If changes have been made to the paper tray, select the Change Settings button;
otherwise, proceed to the next step.
a) Make the desired selections for Paper Type/Paper Weight, Paper Size, and Paper
Color.
b) If necessary, make the desired changes to paper curl and alignment adjustment.
Note
Refer to the System Administration Guide for detailed information on the paper
curl and alignment adjustment options.
c) Select Save until you are returned to the tray settings window.
9. Select Confirm to close the window.
Problem solving
Paper jams in Trays 6/7 (HCF)
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your copy/print jobs.
1. Pull out the tray where the paper jam occurred.
Note
To avoid tearing paper, review where the paper jam occurred before pulling out a
tray. Torn paper remaining inside the machine can cause machine malfunction.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
17-3
High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7), 8.5 x 11 in./A4
2. Remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
Paper jams inside the HCF unit
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your copy/print jobs.
This section describes how to remedy paper jams that occur at the following locations:
•
•
•
•
Paper jams in lower left cover
Paper jams at lever 1a and knob 1c
Paper jams at lever 1b and knob 1c
Paper jams at lever 1d and knob 1c
Note
Jam clearance remedies differ according to the paper jam location, so follow the displayed
instructions.
17-4
User Guide
High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7), 8.5 x 11 in./A4
Paper jams inside lower left cover
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your copy/print jobs.
1. Open the front cover of the HCF.
2. Open the lower left cover while gripping the release lever.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
17-5
High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7), 8.5 x 11 in./A4
3. Remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Close the lower left cover.
5. Close the front cover of the HCF completely.
Note
The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams at lever 1a and knob 1c
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your copy/print jobs.
1. Open the front cover of the HCF.
17-6
User Guide
High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7), 8.5 x 11 in./A4
2. Move lever 1a to the right and turn knob 1c to the right. Remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Return lever 1a to the original position.
4. Close the front cover of the HCF completely.
Note
The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
17-7
High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7), 8.5 x 11 in./A4
Paper jams at lever 1b and knob 1c
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your copy/print jobs.
1. Open the front cover of the HCF.
2. Move lever 1b to the right and turn knob 1c to the right. Remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Return lever 1b to the original position.
4. Close the front cover of the HCF completely.
Note
The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
17-8
User Guide
High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7), 8.5 x 11 in./A4
Paper jams at lever 1d and knob 1c
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your copy/print jobs.
1. Open the front cover of the HCF.
2. Move lever 1d upwards and turn knob 1c; remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Return lever 1d to the original position.
4. Close the front cover of the HCF completely.
Note
The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
17-9
High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7), 8.5 x 11 in./A4
Fault codes
If a fault causes the copying/printing to stop abnormally or a malfunction occurs in the
copier/printer, then a fault code and/or a message displays on the UI. Refer to the
following table for fault codes and information on how to rectify the problem. If a fault
code displays and it is not described in the following table, or if the problem persists
even after you have tried the recommended solutions, contact the Customer Support
Center.
Tip
If a fault code is displayed, all print data is discarded; this includes any data stored in
the built-in memory of the machine.
Fault code
Cause and Remedy
024-955
024-956
Cause: Tray 6/7 is empty/out of paper.
Remedy: Add paper to Tray 6/7.
077-210
Cause: There is a malfunction in Tray 6/7.
Remedy: Check the paper setting of paper trays 6/7 and power-cycle the machine.
If the trays errors are not fixed by performing the relevant remedy, contact the
Customer Support Center. Trays other than 6/7 may be used in the interim.
078-100
078-101
078-102
Cause: There is a malfunction in Tray 6/7.
Remedy: Check the paper setting of paper trays 6/7 and power-cycle the machine.
If the trays errors are not fixed by performing the relevant remedy, contact the
Customer Support Center. Trays other than 6/7 may be used in the interim.
078-210
078-211
Cause: There is a malfunction in Tray 6/7.
Remedy: Check the paper setting of paper trays 6/7 and power-cycle the machine.
If the trays errors are not fixed by performing the relevant remedy, contact the
Customer Support Center. Trays other than 6/7 may be used in the interim.
17-10
User Guide
High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7), 8.5 x 11 in./A4
Fault code
Cause and Remedy
078-260
078-261
078-262
078-263
078-264
078-265
078-266
078-267
078-268
078-269
078-270
078-271
078-272
078-273
078-274
078-275
078-276
078-277
078-278
078-279
078-280
Cause: Paper Tray 6/7 malfunctioned.
Remedy: Check the paper loaded in Tray 6/7. Power off and then power on the
machine. If the tray errors are not fixed by performing the relevant remedy, contact
the Customer Support Center.
078-300
078-301
078-500
078-901
078-941
078-942
078-943
Cause: Paper Tray 6/7 malfunctioned.
Remedy: Check the paper loaded in Tray 6/7. Power off and then power on the
machine. If the tray errors are not fixed by performing the relevant remedy, contact
the Customer Support Center.
Trays 6/7 (HCF) specifications
Item
Specification
Media/paper sizes
Minimum: 7.25 x 10.5 in. (Executive)/B5
Maximum: 8.5 x 11 in./A4
Media/paper weight
Weight: 16 lb. Bond to 80 lb. Cover/52 gsm to 216 gsm
Tray capacity
Each tray holds 2,000 sheets for a total of 4,000 sheets
(When using Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm paper)
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
17-11
High Capacity Feeder (HCF/Trays 6 and 7), 8.5 x 11 in./A4
17-12
User Guide
18
Oversized High Capacity
Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays
(Trays 6/7)
The Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF) is available in a 1-tray or 2-tray option. The
OHCF feeds a variety of stock sizes, including standard and oversized stock up to 13 x
19.2 in./330.2 x 488 mm. Each tray holds 2,000 sheets.
Note
The 1-tray OHCF is not available with D136 configurations.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
18-1
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
Postcard bracket
The Postcard bracket is delivered with the OHCF from manufacturing. The Postcard
bracket allows you to print on smaller size media without requiring post-processing
cutting or sorting. The Postcard bracket specifically accommodates 4 x 6 in. (101.6 x
152.4 mm) SEF media.
Using the Postcard bracket
Use the following procedure for installing and using the Postcard bracket when printing
on smaller media (4 x 6 in./101.6 x 152.4 mm).
1. Slowly open one of the paper trays until it stops and remove the paper.
2. Move the paper guides out to their largest position.
3. Open the front cover of the OHCF.
4. Remove the Postcard bracket from inside the OHCF front cover.
18-2
User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
5. Install the Postcard bracket so that it sits on the locating pins on the upper frame
and in the grooves on the bottom of the tray.
6. Tighten the thumb screw so it locks the Postcard bracket in place.
7. Load the postcard stock and adjust the paper guides against the stock.
8. Close the paper tray and confirm the new settings on the UI.
9. Run your print job.
10. Upon completion of your print job, remove the postcard stock and the Postcard
bracket from the tray.
11. Store the Postcard bracket inside the OHCF front cover area.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
18-3
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
Loading media in the 1 or 2-Tray OHCF
Loading paper in the OHCF (1 or 2 Trays)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job.
Pull out the tray slowly until it stops.
Open the ream of paper with the seam side facing up.
Fan the sheets before loading them into the tray.
Load paper into the tray.
Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the
Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray.
Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
7. If necessary, set the skew adjustment levers to the desired position for your print job.
8. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray settings screen may be
displayed on the UI.
9. If changes have been made to the paper tray, select the Change Settings button;
otherwise, proceed to the next step.
a) Make the desired selections for Paper Type/Paper Weight, Paper Size, and Paper
Color.
b) If necessary, make the desired changes to paper curl and alignment adjustment.
Note
Refer to the System Administration Guide for detailed information on the paper
curl and alignment adjustment options.
c) Select Save until you are returned to the tray settings window.
10. Select Confirm to close the window.
Loading tabs in the OHCF (1 or 2 Trays)
Note
If the optional GBC AdvancedPunch is attached to your machine, refer to the GBC
AdvancedPunch customer documentation for instructions on loading tab stock in the
trays.
1. Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job.
2. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops.
3. Fan the tab paper before loading into the tray.
18-4
User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
4. Load and align the edge of the tab paper against the right edge of the tray in the
LEF direction as shown in following illustration:
5. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the
Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray.
Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
6. If necessary, set the skew adjustment levers to the desired position for your print job.
7. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray settings screen may be
displayed on the UI.
8. If changes have been made to the paper tray, select the Change Settings button;
otherwise, proceed to the next step.
a) Make the desired selections for Paper Type/Paper Weight, Paper Size, and Paper
Color.
b) If necessary, make the desired changes to paper curl and alignment adjustment.
Note
Refer to the System Administration Guide for detailed information on the paper
curl and alignment adjustment options.
c) Select Save until you are returned to the tray settings window.
9. Select Confirm to close the window.
10. For network print jobs, refer to your print server customer documentation for
instructions on loading tab stock into a tray.
Loading transparencies in the OHCF (1 or 2 Trays)
1. Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job.
2. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops.
3. Fan the transparencies to stop them from sticking together before loading into the
tray.
4. Load transparencies on top of a small stack of same-size paper and align the edge
of the transparency against the right edge of the as shown in following illustration:
5. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the
Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
18-5
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
6. If necessary, set the skew adjustment levers to the desired position for your print job.
7. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray settings screen may be
displayed on the UI.
8. If changes have been made to the paper tray, select the Change Settings button;
otherwise, proceed to the next step.
a) Make the desired selections for Paper Type/Paper Weight, Paper Size, and Paper
Color.
b) If necessary, make the desired changes to paper curl and alignment adjustment.
Note
Refer to the System Administration Guide for detailed information on the paper
curl and alignment adjustment options.
c) Select Save until you are returned to the tray settings window.
9. Select Confirm to close the window.
Loading pre-drilled stock into the OHCF (1 or 2 Trays) for 1-sided
print jobs
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job.
Pull out the tray slowly until it stops.
Open the ream of paper with the seam side facing up.
Fan the sheets before loading them into the tray.
Load and register the paper against the right side of the tray as depicted below for
LEF direction:
6. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the
Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray.
Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
7. If necessary, set the skew adjustment levers to the desired position for your print job.
8. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray settings screen may be
displayed on the UI.
9. If changes have been made to the paper tray, select the Change Settings button;
otherwise, proceed to the next step.
18-6
User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
a) Make the desired selections for Paper Type/Paper Weight, Paper Size, and Paper
Color.
b) If necessary, make the desired changes to paper curl and alignment adjustment.
Note
Refer to the System Administration Guide for detailed information on the paper
curl and alignment adjustment options.
c) Select Save until you are returned to the tray settings window.
10. Select Confirm to close the window.
Loading pre-drilled stock into the OHCF (1 or 2 Trays) for 2-sided
print jobs
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job.
Pull out the tray slowly until it stops.
Open the ream of paper with the seam side facing up.
Fan the sheets before loading them into the tray.
Load and register the paper against the right side of the tray as depicted below for
LEF direction:
6. Load and register the paper against the right side of the tray as depicted below for
SEF direction:
7. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the
Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray.
Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
8. If necessary, set the skew adjustment levers to the desired position for your print job.
9. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray settings screen may be
displayed on the UI.
10. If changes have been made to the paper tray, select the Change Settings button;
otherwise, proceed to the next step.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
18-7
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
a) Make the desired selections for Paper Type/Paper Weight, Paper Size, and Paper
Color.
b) If necessary, make the desired changes to paper curl and alignment adjustment.
Note
Refer to the System Administration Guide for detailed information on the paper
curl and alignment adjustment options.
c) Select Save until you are returned to the tray settings window.
11. Select Confirm to close the window.
Skew adjustment levers
The skew adjustment levers are found in all paper trays. These levers are used to improve
paper feed accuracy and to reduce paper skew problems.
1.
Rear skew adjustment lever
2.
Right-side skew adjustment lever
• These levers should remain in their default position. The position of these levers
should be changed only when there is a skew problem when running a specific print
job and/or specific media type.
• Changing the skew adjustment levers from their default position may cause more
skew problems when running certain media types, such as coated, label, transparency,
and film.
Use the following procedure to set the skew adjustment levers.
1. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops.
2. Slide the rear skew adjustment lever to the right.
3. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
4. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size,
type, weight, and if necessary, paper curl and/or alignment option.
5. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
18-8
User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
6. Run your print job.
• The paper is fed accurately without skew and the printed output is satisfactory;
your task is complete.
• The paper is skewed and the printed output is unsatisfactory; proceed to the next
step.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Pull out the tray slowly until it stops.
Return the rear skew adjustment lever to its left, default position.
Slide the right-side skew adjustment lever toward the front of the paper tray.
Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size,
type, weight, and if necessary, paper curl and/or alignment option.
12. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
13. Run your print job.
• The paper is fed accurately without skew and the printed output is satisfactory;
your task is complete.
• The paper is skewed and the printed output is unsatisfactory; proceed to the next
step.
14. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops.
15. Return the right-side skew adjustment lever toward the rear of the paper tray; this is
its default position.
16. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
17. If you are still having skew adjustment problems, refer to the Advanced Stock Setup
information located in the System Administration Guide.
OHCF problem solving
Clearing OHCF jams
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs.
Note
Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed
to remove the jammed paper.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
18-9
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
Paper jams inside the OHCF trays
1. Pull out the tray where the paper jam occurred.
2. Remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
OHCF paper jams at lever 1a and knob 1c
1. Open the front cover of the OHCF.
18-10
User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
2. Move the lever 1a to the right and turn the knob 1c to the right. Remove the jammed
paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Return the lever 1a to the original position.
4. Close the front cover of the OHCF.
Note
If the front cover of the OHCF is not completely closed, a message will appear and
the machine will not operate.
OHCF paper jams at lever 1b and knob 1c
1. Open the front cover of the OHCF.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
18-11
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
2. Move the lever 1b to the right and turn the knob 1c to the right. Remove the jammed
paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Return the lever 1b to the original position.
4. Close the front cover of the OHCF.
Note
If the front cover of the OHCF is not completely closed, a message will appear and
the machine will not operate.
OHCF paper jams at lever 1d and knob 1c
1. Open the front cover of the OHCF.
18-12
User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
2. Move the lever 1d upward and remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. If the paper cannot be removed, turn the knob 1c clockwise, and then remove the
jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 1d to the original position.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
18-13
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
5. Close the front cover of the OHCF.
Note
If the front cover of the OHCF is not completely closed, a message will appear and
the machine will not operate.
OHCF fault codes
024-955
Cause: An OHCF tray is empty or out of paper.
Remedy: Add paper to correct OHCF Tray.
024-956
Cause: An OHCF tray is empty or out of paper.
Remedy: Add paper to correct OHCF Tray.
077-210
Cause: An OHCF tray is broken.
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Power Off/On the machine.
• If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-100
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check the paper in the malfunctioning tray.
• Power Off/On the machine.
• If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-101
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check the paper in the malfunctioning tray.
• Power Off/On the machine.
• If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
18-14
User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-101
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check the paper in the malfunctioning tray.
• Power Off/On the machine.
• If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-210
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check the paper setting of the paper trays and power Off/On the machine.
• If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-211
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check the paper setting of the paper trays and power Off/On the machine.
• If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-260
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
18-15
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
078-261
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-262
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-263
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-264
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-265
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
18-16
User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-266
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-267
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-268
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-269
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
18-17
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-270
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-271
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-272
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-273
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
18-18
User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-274
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-275
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-276
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-277
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
18-19
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
078-278
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-279
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-280
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-300
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-301
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
18-20
User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-500
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-901
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-941
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-942
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
18-21
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), 1 or 2 trays (Trays 6/7)
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-943
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Check the paper loaded in the trays.
2.
Power Off/On the machine.
3.
If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
OHCF specifications
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF/Trays A1-1 and A1-2)
Item
Specification
Sheet size
SEF: 8.5 x 11 in./A4, 8.5 x 13 in., 8.5 x 14 in., 10 x 14 in./B4, 11 x 17 in./A3,
12 x 18 in., 12.6 x17.7 in./SRA3, 13 x 18 in., 13 x 19 in., 12.6 x 19.2 in., B5
LEF: B5, 7.25 x 10.5 in. (executive), A4, 8.5 x 11 in., 8.0 x 10 in.
Custom sizes: 182-330 mm (7.2-13 in.) width and 182-488 mm (7.2-19.2
in.) length
Paper weight
18 lb. to 130 lb. cover/55-350 gsm
Paper capacity
2000 sheets/drawer
Important
When using up to Xerox 24 lb./90 gsm paper.
18-22
User Guide
19
Interface Module/Interface
Cooling Module
The Interface Module or Interface Cooling Module is an optional finishing device that
is used in conjunction with other optional finishing devices.
What is the difference between the two modules?
Both modules enable communication and provide a paper path between the print engine
and any attached finishing device/devices. The Interface Cooling Module goes a step
further in that it contains additional fans and associated duct work. These fans and duct
work aid in cooling the outgoing printed media.
The correct module for your machine configuration
The specific type of module available depends on the machine configuration:
• The Interface Module is available with a machine configuration that is either D110
or D125 (either Copier/Printer or Printer only).
• The Interface Cooling Module is available only with the D136 configuration (either
Copier/Printer or Printer only).
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
19-1
Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module
Note
The Interface Module is not available with the D95 Copier/Printer configuration.
D110/D125 configurations
For either Copier/Printer or Printer only, the Interface Module is required with the
following finishing devices:
•
•
•
•
•
GBC AdvancedPunch
Perfect Binder (available only with the Copier/Printer with integrated controller)
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Standard Finisher Plus
All third-party, DFA devices
Note
The Interface Module is NOT required when the only finishing device is the Standard
Finisher or Booklet Maker Finisher. The SquareFold Trimmer Module is available only
with the Booklet Maker Finisher.
D136 configuration
For either Copier/Printer or Printer only, the Interface Cooling Module is required with
ALL following finishing devices, which include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
GBC AdvancedPunch
Perfect Binder (available only with the Copier/Printer with integrated controller)
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Standard Finisher
Booklet Maker Finisher
SquareFold Trimmer Module (available only with the Booklet Maker Finisher)
Standard Finisher Plus
All third-party, DFA devices
19-2
User Guide
Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module
Module overview
Control panel
The Control Panel consists of the following:
1.
Auto Curl button: This button selects the Auto Decurl function.
2.
Manual Curl Up button: This button selects the three values of manual up curl.
3.
Manual Curl Down button: This button selects the three values of manual down curl.
4.
Curl Up/Down indicators: These indicate the amount of manual curl (up or down)
that is selected.
5.
Auto Curl indicator: This indicates that the Auto Curl Mode is selected.
If you want to quickly and at the point-of-need adjust the paper curl on the printed
output, you may use the Manual Curl Up or Down buttons. If the printed output contains
too much curl after using these buttons, refer to the System Administration Guide for
information on adjusting the paper curl. The paper curl buttons are discussed in more
detail later in this section.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
19-3
Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module
Paper path
As media enters the module, it is fed to the module decurler for paper curl correction.
The module decurler has both upper and lower decurler rolls that apply pressure to the
media based upon the following:
• System default
• Manual selections made at the module control panel
Based on the paper curl (decurl) settings, the module decurler gate routes the paper to
either the up-curl (cupped) path, or the down-curl (bridged) path. The degree of pressure
is applied independently to the upward and downward decurler arms.
From the module decurler, the print media is cooled and routed from the module to the
optional finishing device(s) that is/are connected to your machine.
Paper curl settings on the module
Preset decurler settings
The module is designed with several automated presettings for controlling paper curl.
When using these settings, the amount of curl correction is automatically set by the
module decurler. Therefore, if paper curl is a problem, use one of the preset module
decurler settings in order to eliminate the problem.
When the media passes through the module decurler, you are notified of the current
amount of curl correction through the various LEDs on the module Control Panel. If you
require more curl correction, you can manually select curl correction from the module
Control Panel.
Manual decurler buttons
The module manual decurler mode has seven levels of curl correction that are available
at the module Control Panel: three levels of Up-curl correction and three levels of
Down-curl correction, and no correction level.
19-4
User Guide
Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module
The amount of curl correction is changed by selecting a related button. The current
selected amount of curl correction is displayed by the Control Panel LEDs.
Problem solving
Clearing jams
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs.
Note
Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed
to remove the jammed paper.
Paper jams at lever 1a
1. Open the front cover of the module.
2. Move the lever 1a downward and remove the jammed paper.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
19-5
Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module
3. Return the lever 1a to the original position.
4. Close the front cover of the module.
5. Follow the instructions on the UI to clear other areas or to resume your print job.
Paper jams at lever 2a
1. Open the front cover of the module.
19-6
User Guide
Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module
2. Move the lever 2a upward, turn the knob 2c counterclockwise, and remove the
jammed paper.
3. Return the lever 2a to the original position.
4. Close the front cover of the module.
5. Follow the instructions on the UI to clear other areas or to resume your print job.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
19-7
Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module
Paper jams at lever 2b
1. Open the front cover of the module.
2. Move the lever downward, turn the knob 2c counterclockwise, and remove the jammed
paper.
3. Return the lever 2b to the original position.
19-8
User Guide
Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module
4. Close the front cover of the module.
5. Follow the instructions on the UI to clear other areas or to resume your print job.
Fault codes
The fault code table lists problems and suggested solutions that apply to the Interface
Module/Interface Cooling. If the problem persists after following all instructions, call
your Xerox Customer Support Center.
048-100
Cause: Paper jam:
• A jam occurred during feeding.
• A jam notification is displayed on the UI.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from the jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the front door. Verify the paper used is within the approved paper
specifications.
048-101
Cause: Paper jam:
• A jam occurred during feeding.
• A jam notification is displayed on the UI.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from the jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the front door. Verify the paper used is within the approved paper
specifications.
048-102
Cause: Paper jam:
• A jam occurred during feeding.
• A jam notification is displayed on the UI.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
19-9
Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from the jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the front door. Verify the paper used is within the approved paper
specifications.
048-103
Cause: Paper jam:
• A jam occurred during feeding.
• A jam notification is displayed on the UI.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from the jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the front door. Verify the paper used is within the approved paper
specifications.
048-300
Cause: The Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door is open.
Remedy: Close the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door.
048-310
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module decurler sensor or belt problem
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
048-311
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module decurler sensor or belt problem
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
048-312
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module decurler sensor or belt problem
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
048-313
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module decurler sensor or belt problem
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
048-314
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module decurler sensor or belt problem
19-10
User Guide
Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
048-315
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module decurler sensor or belt problem
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
048-316
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module decurler sensor or belt problem
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
048-317
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module cooling fan failure
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
048-318
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module cooling fan failure
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
048-319
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module cooling fan failure
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
048-320
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module communication failure or
connection failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check the connection between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and
the connected finishing device or devices.
• Fully clear any jams between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and
the connection finishing device or devices.
• Ensure all jam clearance handles/levers are returned to their closed positions.
• After clearing all jams, remove any ejected paper from the finishing output area.
• Power Off/On the machine.
048-321
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module communication failure or
connection failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
19-11
Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module
• Check the connection between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and
the connected finishing device or devices.
• Fully clear any jams between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and
the connection finishing device or devices.
• Ensure all jam clearance handles/levers are returned to their closed positions.
• After clearing all jams, remove any ejected paper from the finishing output area.
• Power Off/On the machine.
048-322
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module communication failure or
connection failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check the connection between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and
the connected finishing device or devices.
• Fully clear any jams between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and
the connection finishing device or devices.
• Ensure all jam clearance handles/levers are returned to their closed positions.
• After clearing all jams, remove any ejected paper from the finishing output area.
• Power Off/On the machine.
048-324
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module communication failure or
connection failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check the connection between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and
the connected finishing device or devices.
• Fully clear any jams between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and
the connection finishing device or devices.
• Ensure all jam clearance handles/levers are returned to their closed positions.
• After clearing all jams, remove any ejected paper from the finishing output area.
• Power Off/On the machine.
048-325
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module communication failure or
connection failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check the connection between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and
the connected finishing device or devices.
• Fully clear any jams between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and
the connection finishing device or devices.
• Ensure all jam clearance handles/levers are returned to their closed positions.
• After clearing all jams, remove any ejected paper from the finishing output area.
19-12
User Guide
Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module
• Power Off/On the machine.
048-326
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module communication failure or
connection failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check the connection between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and
the connected finishing device or devices.
• Fully clear any jams between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and
the connection finishing device or devices.
• Ensure all jam clearance handles/levers are returned to their closed positions.
• After clearing all jams, remove any ejected paper from the finishing output area.
• Power Off/On the machine.
048-327
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module communication failure or
connection failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check the connection between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and
the connected finishing device or devices.
• Fully clear any jams between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and
the connection finishing device or devices.
• Ensure all jam clearance handles/levers are returned to their closed positions.
• After clearing all jams, remove any ejected paper from the finishing output area.
• Power Off/On the machine.
048-900
Cause: Paper jam:
• A jam occurred during feeding.
• A jam notification is displayed on the UI.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from the jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the front door. Verify the paper used is within the approved paper
specifications.
048-901
Cause: Paper jam:
• A jam occurred during feeding.
• A jam notification is displayed on the UI.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
19-13
Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module
1.
Open the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from the jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the front door. Verify the paper used is within the approved paper
specifications.
048-903
Cause: Paper jam:
• A jam occurred during feeding.
• A jam notification is displayed on the UI.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from the jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the front door. Verify the paper used is within the approved paper
specifications.
19-14
User Guide
20
High Capacity Stacker
(HCS)
Overview
The High Capacity Stacker (HCS) is an optional finishing device that provides stacking
and offsetting capabilities for output to a Stacker Tray.
1.
2.
Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Note
The HCS is not available with the D95 Copier/Printer configuration.
Important
The HCS requires the Interface Module or the Interface Cooling Module. Module type
depends on your product and machine configuration. The module acts as a
communication device and paper path between the machine and the HCS.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
20-1
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Tip
Your system may accommodate a maximum of two High Capacity Stackers at one time.
If your system has two stackers attached, they are referred to as B1 and B2. Also, with
two stackers attached, and when one of them is full, automatic switching occurs between
the two stackers to ensure maximum productivity for your system.
Note
Depending on your product and machine configuration, two tandem High Capacity
Stackers may not be supported. For specific information, contact Customer Support.
Identifying the components
The HCS consists of the following components:
1.
Control Panel: Provides manual control of the various HCS functions.
2.
Top Tray: Holds a maximum of 500 sheets.
Note
Labels must be delivered to the Top Tray.
3.
Bypass: Used only when a second stacking/finishing device is installed. This path
transports media through the HCS to another connected finishing device.
4.
Stacker Tray/Cart: Collated sets (up to a total of 5000 sheets) are transported to
the Stacker Tray, which is located on a movable Stacker Cart.
Note
The Stacker Tray/Cart capacity may be less than 5000 sheets if the media being
used is heavyweight or thicker sheets.
20-2
User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Control panel
The HCS control panel consists of:
1.
Top Tray jam: This indicator blinks when there is a jam in the top tray area (E7).
2.
Sample indicator: This indicator blinks until a sample print is delivered to the top
tray.
3.
Sample button: Press this button to have the HCS deliver an additional sample print
such that the stack integrity is maintained. A single-page sample is provided to the
output area.
4.
Unload button: Press once to lower the Stacker Tray and unlock the HCS front door.
5.
Unload indicator: This indicator lights when the Stacker Tray has reached the down
position and the front door can be opened.
6.
Exit jam: This indicator blinks where there is a jam in the exit area (E8).
7.
Stacker Transport jam area: These indicators blink when there is a jam in Areas E4,
E5, and/or E6.
8.
Stacker Entrance jam area: These indicators blink when there is a jam in Areas E1,
E2, and/or E3.
HCS top tray
The Top Tray offers the following:
• Copies/prints are aligned easily without folds or wrinkles in the output.
• To enable easier pick-up of the output, the HCS can be stopped by selecting the Stop
button on the machine’s UI.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
20-3
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Unloading the Stacker Tray
1. Press the Unload button on the HCS control panel.
Wait until the Unload indicator lights and then open the HCS front door.
2. Open the front door after the Unload indicator lights.
3. Position the securing bar on top of the stacked paper.
4. Pull the Stacker Cart straight out of the HCS.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove the securing bar.
Remove the paper from the Stacker Tray.
Push the empty Stacker Cart straight into the HCS.
Position the securing bar on the fixed area inside the HCS.
Close the front door; the tray will rise to the operate position.
20-4
User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Problem solving
General problems
HCS tampers no longer in contact with paper
Cause: Problem occurs when printing with Clear dry ink/toner and using media that
is 120 gsm, coated, and large stock sizes (such as 12 x 18 in./304.8 x 457.2 mm).
Remedy: Adjust the paper curl before printing the job. Refer to the System
Administration Guide for specific information on paper curl settings and adjustment.
Jam clearance
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs.
Note
Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed
to remove the jammed paper.
HCS entrance jams (E1, E2, and E3)
Perform the following steps to clear the jam and resume printing:
1. Open the HCS Front Cover.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
20-5
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
2. Lift the green handle(s) and/or rotate the green knob and remove all paper in the
entrance area.
3. Close the green handle(s).
4. Close the HCS Front Cover.
5. If the UI indicates there is a jam in the print engine, follow the instructions on the
screen to remove any paper in the area indicated.
6. Follow the instructions displayed on the UI to resume printing.
HCS transport jams (E4, E5, and E6)
Perform the following steps to clear the jam and resume printing:
1. Open the HCS Front Cover.
2. Lift the green handle(s) and/or rotate the green knob and remove all paper in the
entrance area.
3. Close the green handle(s).
20-6
User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
4. Close the HCS Front Cover.
5. Press the Unload button on the HCS control panel.
Wait until the Unload indicator lights and then open the HCS front door.
6. Open the front door after the Unload indicator lights.
7. Pull out the stacker cart and gently remove the jammed paper.
8. Push the stacker cart straight into the HCS.
9. Close the front door.
10. If the UI indicates there is a jam in the print engine, follow the instructions on the
screen to remove any paper in the area indicated.
11. Follow the instructions displayed on the UI to resume printing.
HCS top tray jam (E7)
Perform the following steps to clear the jam and resume printing:
1. Remove any output delivered to the Top Tray.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
20-7
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
2. Open the HCS Front Cover.
3. Lift the green handle(s) and/or rotate the green knob and remove all paper in the
entrance area.
4. Close the green handle(s).
5. Close the HCS Front Cover.
6. If the UI indicates there is a jam in the print engine, follow the instructions on the
screen to remove any paper in the area indicated.
7. Follow the instructions displayed on the UI to resume printing.
HCS exit jam (E8)
Perform the following steps to clear the jam and resume printing:
1. Open the HCS Front Cover.
20-8
User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
2. Lift the green handle and/or rotate the green knob and remove all paper in the
entrance area.
3. Lift the green handle and/or rotate the green knob and remove all paper in the
entrance area.
4. Close the green handle(s).
5. Close the HCS Front Cover.
6. If the UI indicates there is a jam in the print engine, follow the instructions on the
screen to remove any paper in the area indicated.
7. Follow the instructions displayed on the UI to resume printing.
Hints and tips for using the HCS
Refer to the following hints and tips when using the HCS:
1.
Check the paper in the Stock Tray for curl.
a) If no curl is present and if the output is acceptable (meets customer satisfaction),
you are finished.
b) If no curl is present and if the output is NOT acceptable, call for service.
c) If curl IS present, continue to the next step.
2.
3.
Check the paper in the Stock Tray for curl.
Adjust the paper curl by using the decurler controls on the top of the Interface
Module/Interface Cooling Module.
If the output has not improved, adjust the paper curl again.
If the output still has not improved, call the Customer Support Center.
4.
5.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
20-9
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Loss of power
If power is interrupted to the HCS:
• Ensure that the power cord is plugged in to the proper wall receptacle.
• Ensure that the machine power is switched on.
• Ensure that the Ground Fault Indicator is in the On position.
• If the power has not been restored by checking the above items, then call for service.
Fault codes
049-100
Cause: There is a top tray sensor fault in the HCS.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-101
Cause: There is a top tray sensor fault in the HCS.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-102
Cause: There is a top tray sensor fault in the HCS.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-104
Cause: HCS bypass exit sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
20-10
User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-105
Cause: HCS bypass exit sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-106
Cause: HCS bypass exit sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-108
Cause: HCS bypass exit sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-113
Cause: Stacker sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-114
Cause: Stacker sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
20-11
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
049-115
Cause: Stacker sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-116
Cause: Stacker sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-117
Cause: Bypass path sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-119
Cause: Bypass path sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-121
Cause: Stacker exit sensor jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-210
Cause: HCS front door sensor fault
20-12
User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Open the HCS front door.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
• Close the HCS front door.
049-211
Cause: HCS front door sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Open the HCS front door.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
• Close the HCS front door.
049-212
Cause: Stacker up/down failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-213
Cause: Stacker up/down failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-214
Cause: Stacker cart sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-215
Cause: Stacker cart sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
20-13
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-216
Cause: Stacker cart sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-217
Cause: Stacker full sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-218
Cause: Stacker full sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-219
Cause: HCS front door fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-220
Cause: Stacker upper/lower limit fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-221
Cause: Stacker upper/lower limit fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
20-14
User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-224
Cause: Paper in/out sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-225
Cause: Paper in/out sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-228
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-229
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-232
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-233
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
20-15
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-234
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-235
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-236
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-237
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-238
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
20-16
User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-239
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-240
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-241
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-242
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-243
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
20-17
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
049-248
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-251
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-252
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-253
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-280
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-281
Cause: HCS sensor failure
20-18
User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-282
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-283
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-284
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-285
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-286
Cause: HCS communication or software fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
20-19
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check the connection between the Interface Cooling Module and the HCS.
049-287
Cause: HCS communication or software fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check the connection between the Interface Cooling Module and the HCS.
049-288
Cause: HCS communication or software fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check the connection between the Interface Cooling Module and the HCS.
049-300
Cause: HCS communication or software fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check the connection between the Interface Cooling Module and the HCS.
049-310
Cause: HCS communication or software fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check the connection between the Interface Cooling Module and the HCS.
049-500
Cause: HCS communication or software fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check the connection between the Interface Cooling Module and the HCS.
20-20
User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
049-700
Cause: HCS communication or software fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check the connection between the Interface Cooling Module and the HCS.
049-900
Cause: The HCS detects paper at the HCS top tray, HCS bypass, or at the HCS stacker
tray. However, no paper is present; HCS sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-901
Cause: The HCS detects paper at the HCS top tray, HCS bypass, or at the HCS stacker
tray. However, no paper is present; HCS sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-902
Cause: The HCS detects paper at the HCS top tray, HCS bypass, or at the HCS stacker
tray. However, no paper is present; HCS sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-903
Cause: The HCS detects paper at the HCS top tray, HCS bypass, or at the HCS stacker
tray. However, no paper is present; HCS sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
20-21
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
049-905
Cause: The HCS detects paper at the HCS top tray, HCS bypass, or at the HCS stacker
tray. However, no paper is present; HCS sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-907
Cause: The HCS detects paper at the HCS top tray, HCS bypass, or at the HCS stacker
tray. However, no paper is present; HCS sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-908
Cause: The HCS detects paper at the HCS top tray, HCS bypass, or at the HCS stacker
tray. However, no paper is present; HCS sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-940
Cause: HCS front door fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-941
Cause: Stacker Cart fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-945
Cause: HCS detects Top Tray as always full
20-22
User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-960
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-964
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-965
Cause: Stacker height limit or full detection fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-966
Cause: Stacker height limit or full detection fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-967
Cause: The HCS detects paper still remaining on stacker cart after the front door was
opened/closed.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Open the HCS front door.
• Remove any paper from the stacker cart.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
20-23
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
• Close the HCS front door.
049-968
Cause: Mix size, stacker full detection fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Open the HCS front door.
• Remove any paper from the stacker cart.
• Close the HCS front door.
049-969
Cause: Stacker cart elevator motor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Open the HCS front door.
• Remove any paper from the stacker cart.
• Close the HCS front door.
049-970
Cause: Stacker limit or full sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Open the HCS front door.
• Remove any paper from the stacker cart.
• Close the HCS front door.
049-971
Cause: Stacker limit or full sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Open the HCS front door.
• Remove any paper from the stacker cart.
• Close the HCS front door.
20-24
User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
049-972
Cause: Stacker limit or full sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Open the HCS front door.
• Remove any paper from the stacker cart.
• Close the HCS front door.
049-973
Cause: HCS falsely detects that the Paper Unload button is pressed.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Open the HCS front door.
• Remove any paper from the stacker cart.
• Close the HCS front door.
Specifications
Paper guidelines
• Stacker Tray will accept 55-350 gsm (either coated or uncoated stock) with the
possibility of degraded stock quality and increased jam rate for stocks that are heavier
than 300 gsm.
• Transparencies may be run to either the Top Tray or the Stack Tray. Stack height
should be limited to 100 transparencies.
• Coated paper lighter than 100 gsm may not run as reliably as coated paper heavier
than 100 gsm.
• Non-standard papers longer than 305 mm (12 in.) in the feed direction require 210
mm (8.3 in.) minimum measurement across the feed direction.
• Non-standard papers shorter than 254 mm (10 in.) in the cross-feed direction require
330 mm (13 in.) minimum measurement in the feed direction.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
20-25
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
20-26
User Guide
21
Perfect Binder
(D110/D125/D136 with
integrated controller)
The Perfect Binder is an optional finishing device that takes the printed output and binds
it into a finished book; a front and back cover is included with the bound output.
Important
The Perfect Binder is available with the D110, D125, and D136 Copier/Printer. The
copier/printer must use the integrated controller and not a separate print server.The
Interface Module is not available with the D95 Copier/Printer configuration. The Perfect
Binder also requires an optional finisher, such as High Capacity Stacker, Standard Finisher,
or Booklet Maker Finisher.
Note
Depending on your machine configuration, the Perfect Binder requires either the Interface
Module or the Interface Cooling Module.The D110/D125 configurations require the
Interface Module, while the D136 configuration requires the Interface Cooling Module.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-1
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Perfect binding is a process in which the leaves (pages) are bound by using an adhesive
and trimming off the excess edges. The adhesive holds the interior sheets of the book
together. Front and back covers may be included if desired. The final output is a finished,
perfect bound book with a wrap-around cover.
The Perfect Binder can be used in three modes:
• Manual mode: Load the preprinted book block into the Perfect Binder compiler tray
and covers into Tray 9. Program the Perfect Binder settings using the copier/printer
UI and press Start to complete the job.
• Copy mode: Copy the book block and cover. Program the Perfect Binder settings using
the copier/printer UI and press Start to complete the job.
• Print mode: From the user’s computer, the book block and cover are programmed
using the print driver. Information and steps for submitting the job are available
through the print driver help screens.
21-2
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Binder components
External components
1 Compiler tray LED
This LED lights when the compiler tray cover is locked indicating that the binder is in
operation. This safety feature prevents access to the internal components.
Note
The LED also lights when the printer and Perfect Binder are powering on. Upon
completion of the power-on process, the LED switches off.
2 Compiler tray cover
Open this cover to clear jams or to add a book block (printed, finished book) for manual
mode operations.
3 Top cover
Open this cover to clear paper jams.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-3
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
4 Compiler tray
This tray gathers the finished sheets into a book block, and the book block is used to
make the final finished book.
5 Cover inserter
Load paper here for covers or inserts.
6 Adhesive filling tray
Open this tray to insert adhesive pellets for the binding process.
7 and 8 Left and right front doors
Open these doors to clear paper jams or to access internal components.
9 Front doors LED
When a binding operation is in progress the LED changes to orange; this indicates that
the front doors are locked. When no binding is in process, the LED is not illuminated,
and the front doors may be opened to clear jams and to access the internal components.
Note
The LED also lights when the printer and Perfect Binder are powering on. Upon
completion of the power-on process, the LED switches off.
10 Trimmer waste tray
Excess paper trimmed from the book block sheets is stored in this tray. The tray is easily
removed to recycle the waste trimmings.
11 Book stacker tray
Finished (completed) bound books are transported to this area.
12 Book stacker tray release button and LED
Press this button to open the book stacker tray. A flashing green light indicates that
the tray is in the process of being opened or closed. A steady green light indicates that
the tray is open, and completed books may be removed.
13 Book stacker tray Full indicator
This LED flashes when a binding operation is in process. A steady green light indicates
that the Book stacker tray is full.
14 Entrance transport front door
Open this door to clear jams from the incoming paper path area (E4). Also, the adhesive
pellet scoop is stored in this area.
21-4
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Cover inserter
1 Cover inserter tray
This tray is for loading cover media and inserts that will be bound to the book block
during the binding process.
2 Paper width guide
Adjust this guide so that it touches the loaded media in the tray.
3 Inserter cover
Open this cover to access internal components.
4 Inserter inner cover
Open this cover to clear jams.
5 Right inserter baffle
Open this baffle to clear jams.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-5
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Internal components
1 Cover transport
This moves the cover sheets from the cover inserter to the binding area.
2 Bypass transport
This transport moves the cover media to the binding area; the cover media may come
either from the cover inserter tray or from the printer (network print job). If book binding
is not required, the printed output is transferred from the incoming paper path (from
the left of the Perfect Binder) directly through the binder and to the next finishing
device in line.
3 Adhesive unit
Applies adhesive to the book block in order to bind the spine of the pages together.
4 Binding area
This area binds the book block to the cover material.
5 Cutter area
This area is where the book block pages are cut/trimmed. Finished books then are
transported to the book stacker tray.
21-6
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Binder control panel
1 Fault indicators/location
These indicators light when a fault or a jam occurs in a particular area of the binder.
2 Adhesive temperature indicator
This indicator displays the status of the adhesive temperature:
Indicator flashing on/of
The binder is warming up; adhesive is warming up.
Indicator is off (no light)
The binder is in power saver mode.
Indicator is on (steady light)
The binder is ready for operation.
3 Start/Adhesive temperature button
Press this button to warm up the adhesive or to start the manual mode process for a
job.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-7
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Binder circuit breaker
1 Circuit breaker
Located on the rear of the binder. Power to the machine is automatically interrupted
when a circuit is overloaded or when a short circuit is detected. The overload causes
the power switch to move to the Off position. The overload condition is reset by flipping
the switch to the On position.
2 Circuit breaker Test button
This button may be activated with a pencil point to test the circuit breaker.
21-8
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Book binding path
Bypass path
The bypass path is used when an incoming job does not require the binder. The job
enters from the printer’s paper path, is fed through the binder, and is delivered to the
next finishing device in line.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-9
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Standard path
1 Incoming print job
This paper path moves the incoming paper to the compiler tray.
2 Compiler tray
Upon arrival to the compiler tray, the paper is then assembled into a book block.
3 Sub-grip/main grip
The sub-grip and main grip move the book block to the adhesive unit.
4 Bypass transport
If designated, an incoming cover is moved along the bypass transport to the adhesive
unit and awaits the book block.
5 Adhesive unit
Adhesive is applied to the spine of the book block.
6 Binding area
The adhesive-coated book block and cover media are bound together and then continue
to the next phase of the binding process. If no cover media was specified, the book
block continues through the paper path for trimming and delivery to the book stacker
tray.
7 Trimming
The three unbound edges of the book are trimmed to size by the cutter unit.
21-10
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
8 Trimmer waste tray
Once the book edges are trimmed, the paper cuttings are deposited in the trimmer
waste tray.
9 Book stacker tray
Finally, the finished books are stacked in the book stacker tray.
Cover inserter path
1 Incoming print job
This paper path moves the incoming paper to the compiler tray.
2 Compiler tray
Upon arrival to the compiler tray, the paper is then assembled into a book block.
3 Sub-grip/main grip
The sub-grip and main grip move the book block to the adhesive unit.
4 Cover inserter
If desired, cover media is loaded into this tray.
5 Bypass transport
The bypass transport moves the cover media to the adhesive unit where it awaits the
book block.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-11
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
6 Adhesive unit
Adhesive is applied to the spine of the book block.
7 Binding area
The adhesive-coated book block and cover media are bound together and then continue
to the next phase of the binding process. If no cover media was specified, the book
block continues through the paper path for trimming and delivery to the book stacker
tray.
8 Trimming
The bound book edges are trimmed to size by the cutter unit.
9 Trimmer waste tray
Once the book edges are trimmed, the paper cuttings are deposited in the trimmer
waste tray.
10 Book stacker tray
Finally, the finished books are stacked in the book stacker tray.
Power on/off
Important
The binder’s power is controlled by the system. When the system powers on, the binder
also powers on. When the system powers off, the binder does the same.
Power Saver mode
The binder’s power saver mode is independent from that of the system’s power saver.
However, if desired, it is possible to set both power saver modes to the same interval.
The binder’s default time is 10 minutes; after 10 minutes of inactivity, the binder enters
power saver (and the heater unit for the adhesive switches off). This time may be changed
to reflect a value of 10-120 minutes; you must enter the Administrator mode to change
it.
If the system’s power saver is set to a time interval that is less than the binder’s, then
when the system enters power saver, the binder also enters power saver. By default the
system automatically enters power saver after 15 minutes of inactivity.This time may
be changed to reflect a value of 10-120 minutes; you must enter the Administrator mode
to change it.
Note
To keep the binder at maximum running efficiency, it is recommended that the power
saver time interval for the binder is kept at the default 10 minutes.
21-12
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Loading media in the cover inserter tray
This tray provides an alternate source for cover stocks. Covers may be printed and
supplied by the printer, or they may be manually loaded into this tray. This is especially
useful if you have pre-printed covers that you want to use for the book job.
Caution
Do not use paper that is torn, crimped, stapled, or taped.
Note
• Do not load paper of different sizes.
• A maximum of 200 sheets of cover stock may be loaded in the tray.
• Available paper sizes for the cover inserter tray are:
-
Paper width (front-to-back): 10.5-13 in. (B4/257-330.2 mm)
Paper length (lead-to-trail edge): 14.33 (B4)-19.187 in. (364-488 mm)
1. Open the ream of paper with the seam side facing up.
2. Fan the sheets before loading them into the tray.
3. Load the paper into the inserter tray and adjust the guide to the width of the paper.
Note
Ensure that there are no defects in the paper and that all edges of the paper are
aligned prior to inserting the paper into the Inserter.
a) Load the paper with the outside facing upwards and the top towards the rear of
the tray.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-13
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
b) Align the sheets against the back wall of the tray.
4. From the printer’s UI, enter the correct paper information, including size, type, and
weight from the Tray Properties window.
5. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
Removing books from the binder
1. The book stacker tray LED lights indicating that a finished book was delivered to book
stacker tray.
2. Press the button to open the book stacker tray.
3. Remove the book and close the tray.
Using the Perfect Binder
The Perfect Binder can be used in three modes:
• Manual mode: Load the preprinted book block into the Perfect Binder compiler tray
and covers into Tray 9. Program the Perfect Binder settings using the copier/printer
UI and press Start to complete the job.
• Copy mode: Copy the book block and cover. Program the Perfect Binder settings using
the copier/printer UI and press Start to complete the job.
• Print mode: From the user’s computer, the book block and cover are programmed
using the print driver. Information and steps for submitting the job are available
through the print driver help screens.
21-14
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Tip
Before using the Perfect Binder, always refer to the hints and tips section of this chapter.
Perfect Binder hints and tips
The following hints and tips will optimize your time and efficiency when using the Perfect
Binder.
• Blank Cover (Copy mode): Select this option either for blank covers (front and back)
or when using preprinted covers.
• If some of your originals are being used for the front/back covers, you may want to
copy these originals from the document glass.
• When copying originals for the front/back covers, the Layout Adjustment > Original
Orientation > Sideways Images option may be useful. Depending on the other
options selected, the Sideways Images option may ensure that the images are copied
in the correct orientation for the copied output.
• Remember to start the glue heating process as soon as possible. This ensures that
the Perfect Binder begins immediately after you press Start or send a network print
job to the copier/printer.
• If you are unfamiliar or inexperienced with using the Perfect Binder, you may want
to adjust the default energy saver mode for the Perfect Binder.
-
By default the Perfect Binder enters energy saver mode after 10 minutes of
inactivity.
Adjusting the default time to a higher setting (such as 60 minutes), ensures that
the Perfect Binder will be ready to start after the various options for your job
have been selected. This is applicable for all three modes.
• For paper size and trim recommendations always refer to the table located later in
this chapter.
• When applicable, select other options (for example Layout Adjustment and/or 1-2
Sided options) before starting the perfect bound job.
Copy mode
For the copy mode, the Perfect Binder options are accessed from the copier/printer UI
by selecting Services Home > Copy > Output Format > Perfect Binding.
When the optional Perfect Binding feature is On, the following options are available:
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-15
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Covers
Choose one of three options:
• Blank Cover: Select this option either for blank covers (front and back) or when using
preprinted covers.
• Print on Both: Select this option when printing on front and back covers and on both
the inside and outside of the covers.
• 1 Sided Covers, Print on Outside: Select this option to print only on the outside of
the front and back covers.
Cover & Book Block Size/Paper Supply
This option allows you to set the size of both the Cover and the Book Block pages and
to select from which tray the paper will be supplied.
• Cover Size: Select the paper size of the book cover from either the standard sizes
(such as 11 x 17 in./A3) or set a custom size.
• Book Block Size: Select the paper size of the book block pages from the standard
sizes (such as 11 x 17 in./A3) or set a custom size.
• Paper Supply: Select the tray to use for both the cover and book block pages; these
will be two different trays (one for the cover and another for the book block pages).
Cut to Size
Select the trim amount to use for the printed and bound book; options include (refer
to the UI screens to indicate the default trim amount for each option):
• No Trim: The book is not trimmed
• Minor Trim: 7 mm (0.275 in.) is removed from all three sides of the book
• Standard Size: Oversized stock is trimmed to 8.5 x 11 in. or A4
• Custom Size: Select the trim amounts in 0.1 mm (0.003 in.) increments, starting at
7 mm (0.275 in.) to 27 mm (1.062 in.) for the top and bottom, and 7 mm (0.275 in.)
to 34 mm (1.338 in.) for the face.
Refer to the Perfect Binder chapter of the User Guide for specific trim and size
recommendations for perfect bound books.
Fine Adjustment
Use this option to fine tune the adjustment to the cover and/or the book block pages;
options include:
• Adjust Trim Size
• Adjust Trim Position
• Trim Angle
• Adjust Cover Position
Note
Refer to the UI screen information when using one of these options.
21-16
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Add As/Edit Preset
This option allows you to add a new preset that contains specific perfect binding
information for a frequently-run perfect-bound job. Once a new preset is added, it
remains in the system’s memory and is available for recall and reuse when required.
This option also allows you to edit or delete already-existing perfect bound presets.
Use Preset
As the name indicates, this option allows you to select a preexisting, perfect bound
preset.
Selecting the Perfect Binding options
1. Press the Services Home button.
2. Select Copy on the Services Home screen.
3. From the Copy screen, select the Output Format tab.
The Output Format screen displays.
4. Select Perfect Binding.
The Perfect Binding screen displays.
5. Select On.
The Perfect Binding options are available now for selection.
6. Select the desired Cover option:
a) Select the Cover button.
b) Select one of the three Cover options: Blank Cover, Print on Both, or 1 Sided
Covers, Print on Outside.
c) Select Save.
The main Perfect Binding screen displays.
7. Select Cover & Book Block/Paper Supply.
8. Select Cover Size.
a) Select the output size of the cover either from the Standard Size options or enter
a Custom Size.
b) Select Save.
The Cover & Book Block/Paper Supply screen displays.
9. Select Book Block Size.
a) Select the output size of the book block pages from the Standard Size options or
enter a Custom Size.
b) Select Save.
The Cover & Book Block/Paper Supply screen displays.
10. Select Paper Supply.
a) If using preprinted covers, select Tray 9 for the cover paper supply.
Ensure that the blank or preprinted cover stock is loaded into the Perfect Binder
Tray 9.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-17
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
b) Select the desired tray for the book block pages.
Ensure that the correct paper stock is loaded into the selected tray.
c) Select Save.
The Cover & Book Block/Paper Supply screen displays.
11. Select Cut to Size.
a) Select the desired option: No Trim, Minor Trim, Standard Size, or Custom Size.
b) Select Save.
The Cover & Book Block/Paper Supply screen displays.
12. If necessary, select the desired Fine Adjustment options and select Save.
The main Perfect Binding screen displays.
13. Select Save.
The Output Format screen displays.
14. Select other copy options as applicable (such as Original Orientation or 2 Sided
Copying).
15. Enter the desired quantity.
16. Press Start to begin the perfect bound copy job.
17. Follow the instructions provided on the copier/printer UI to complete the perfect
bound job.
Manual mode
This procedure describes how to use the binder’s manual mode for both covers and book
blocks to create a finished book. Both covers and the book block (book pages) are
preprinted prior to using the binder’s manual mode.
1. Press the Start button on the Perfect Binder; this heats the glue.
2. Preprint covers and book block (pages) separately and place them within reach of
the Perfect Binder.
3. Load the preprinted covers into the binder’s cover inserter tray. Adjust the paper
guides to gently touch the edges of the paper.
4. At the copier/printer UI, confirm/change the Tray 9 properties for the preprinted
covers.
5. From the copier/printer UI, press the Services Home button.
6. Select Perfect Binder Manual Mode.
7. Select Perfecting Binding.
8. Select Create Top/Left Bound Booklet.
9. Select Cover/Book Block Size.
10. Select Cover Size.
a) Select the output size of the cover either from the Standard Size options or enter
a Custom Size.
b) Select Save.
The Cover & Book Block/Paper Supply screen displays.
21-18
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
11. Select Book Block Size/Paper.
a) Select the output size of the book block pages from the Standard Size options or
enter a Custom Size.
b) Select the Paper Type.
c) Select Save.
12. Select Cut to Size.
a) Select the desired option: No Trim, Minor Trim, Standard Size, or Custom Size.
b) Select Save.
The Cover & Book Block/Paper Supply screen displays.
13. If necessary, select the desired Fine Adjustment options and select Save.
The main Perfect Binding screen displays.
14. Select Save.
The Output Format screen displays.
15. Select other copy options as applicable (such as Original Orientation or 2 Sided
Copying).
16. Follow the instructions provided on the copier/printer UI.
• The cover is printed first.
• The book block pages are printed next.
• The UI displays a message that the booklet is being created.
Print mode
1. If using preprinted covers, load them in the Perfect Binder Tray 9.
2. At the copier/printer UI, confirm/change the Tray 9 properties for the preprinted
covers.
3. For the book block pages, load the desired stock into one of the copier/printer trays
and confirm the settings on the UI.
4. From your computer, open a PDF file in Adobe® Acrobat Reader.
5. Select File > Print.
6. Select the desired printer.
7. Select the printer’s properties.
8. From the Properties window, select Perfect Binder for the finishing device.
9. Select the desired Perfect Binder options.
10. Select Save.
11. Select OK to send the job to the printer.
12. Retrieve the completed job from the copier/printer output area.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-19
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Maintenance
While performing maintenance activities, always keep the following items in mind:
• It is recommended that you perform all cleaning procedures on a daily basis,
preferably at the start of the day before the system is switched on and while the
fuser is cool.
• If the system is switched on and the fuser is hot, be sure to switch off the system
power and allow 30 minutes for the fuser to cool before performing any cleaning
procedures.
• Only clean the recommended areas of the paper path as described in the cleaning
procedures.
Cleaning the binder
1. Switch off the system by pressing the power button (which is located on the Print
Engine, Right Side).
2. Disconnect the power cord at the back of the binder.
3. Use a damp, water-moistened (not wet), lint-free cloth to clean the covers and doors.
4. Open each green-handle area and clean the surfaces of these areas.
5. Remove any residual moisture with a dry, lint-free cloth.
6. Return all the green levers to their original positions.
7. Reconnect the power cord to the binder.
8. Power on the system.
Empty the trimmer waste tray
Read the following before performing this procedure:
• Do not open the trimmer waste tray while the binder is in operation. Wait until the
completion of a job before opening and emptying the tray.
• Do not place a plastic bag into the tray. This reduces the capacity of the tray and
may cause equipment damage or fault codes to be generated.
• When the trimmer waste tray is full, the printer stops running and a message displays
stating that the bin is full and will resume after it is emptied.
21-20
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Tip
During larger binding jobs, the trimmer waste tray may require emptying more
frequently.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open the trimmer waste tray.
Lift and remove the inside tray/bin.
Empty the contents of the tray/bin into a waste container.
Visually check to ensure that all scraps are removed from the tray area of the machine.
Reinstall the tray/bin into the trimmer waste tray.
Gently close the trimmer waste drawer.
Adhesive filling tray
Read the following before performing this procedure:
• The adhesive supply may be replenished while the binder is in operation.
• Use only the specified adhesive for use in the binder. Any other adhesive may result
in binder malfunction.
• Store the adhesive in a cool, well-ventilated area and away from high temperature
and humidity. The adhesive may combust if placed in an area with open flame or
high temperature.
• Do not over-fill the adhesive replenishment hopper; otherwise the covers may not
close properly and adhesive pellets may get into other areas of the binder causing
malfunctions.
• Do not use adhesive pellets that have fallen on the floor as they may contain dirt
and dust which may cause binder malfunctions.
• Do not place anything other than the adhesive pellets into the adhesive replenishment
hopper as this may cause a fire in the binder.
• The adhesive pellets are transferred to the binder as the supply in the binder is
consumed. The binder can contain about 0.8 pounds (380 grams) of adhesive.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-21
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Replenishing the adhesive filling tray
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the adhesive filling tray.
Open the outer cover.
Open the inner cover.
Using the supplied scoop, add adhesive pellets to the replenishment hopper until the
height of the pellets is even and level and just below the adhesive limit line.
5. Close the inner and outer covers.
6. Close the adhesive filling tray; an audible click is heard when the tray locks into
position.
Binder problem solving
Note
• Paper jams are displayed on both the printer’s UI and the binder control panel.
• Clear multiple paper jams in the sequence indicated on the printer UI and on the
binder’s control panel.
Paper jams in areas E1 and E2
1. Open the compiler tray cover.
21-22
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
2. Move handle 1b to the left and remove any jammed paper.
3. Move handle 1a to the left, rotate the knob 1c, and remove any jammed paper.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Lift handle 2 to the right and remove any jammed paper.
Return handles 2, 1a, and 1b their original positions.
Close the compiler tray cover.
Follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart your print job.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-23
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Paper jams in area E3
Note
If a jam occurs after the book block leaves the compiler area, the paper is purged with
the spine glued to the book block but without a cover attached.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Open the inserter cover.
Open the inserter inner cover (3a).
Open the right guide (3b).
Remove any jammed paper.
Close the areas 3b, 3a, and the inserter cover.
If desired, reload paper into the cover inserter tray.
Follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart your print job.
21-24
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Paper jams in area E4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open the entrance transport front door.
Open area 4a and remove any jammed paper.
Open area 4b and remove any jammed paper.
Return handles 4b and 4a to their original positions.
Follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart your print job.
Paper jams in areas E5 and E6
Note
The binder’s left and right front doors will not open when the front cover LED is lit.
1. Open the left and right doors.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-25
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
2. Lift handle 5a and remove any jammed paper.
3. Return handle 5a to its original position.
4. Lift handle 5b, rotate knob 6d, and remove any jammed paper.
5. Return handle 5b to its original position.
6. Open areas 6a and 6b.
21-26
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
7. Remove any paper jammed paper.
8. Return handles 6a and 6b to their original positions.
9. Open area 6c and remove any jammed paper.
10. Return handle 6c to its original position.
11. Close the binder’s left and right front doors.
12. Follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart your print job.
General problems
Power interruption during operation
Note
When power is interrupted to the binder during a print job, the book trimmings may
remain in the paper path. Perform the following steps to clear the paper path.
1. Switch off the system by pressing the power button (which is located on the Print
Engine, Right Side).
2. Open the book stacker tray.
3. Check for the presence of paper cuttings/trimmings the tray.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-27
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
If cuttings/trimmings are present, remove them.
4. Close the book stacker tray.
5. Run a test job to ensure that the binder performs correctly.
Adjusting the printed image and trim
If the printed book is not within the desired parameters, you can adjust the settings
from the system UI.
Fault codes
053-100, 053-101, 053-102, 053-103, 053-104, 053-105, 053-106, 053-107, 053-108,
053-109, 053-110, 053-111, 053-112, 053-113, 053-114, 053-115, 053-116, 053-117,
053-118, 053-119, 053-120, 053-121, 053-122, 053-123, 053-124, 053-125, 053-126,
053-127, 053-128, 053-129, 053-130, 053-131, 053-132, 053-133, 053-134, 053-135,
053-136, 053-137, 053-138, 053-139, 053-140, 053-141, 053-142, 053-143, 053-144,
053-145, 053-146, 053-147, 053-148
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Remove the jammed paper; follow the instructions displayed on the system
UI to restart your job.
053-210, 053-211, 053-212, 053-213, 053-214, 053-215, 053-216, 053-217, 053-218,
053-219, 053-220, 053-221, 053-222, 053-223, 053-224, 053-225, 053-226, 053-227,
053-228, 053-229, 053-230, 053-231, 053-232, 053-233, 053-234, 053-235, 053-236,
053-237, 053-238, 053-239, 053-240, 053-241, 053-242, 053-243, 053-244, 053-245,
053-246, 053-247, 053-248, 053-249, 053-250, 053-251, 053-252, 053-253, 053-254,
053-255, 053-256, 053-257, 053-258, 053-259, 053-260, 053-261, 053-262, 053-263,
053-264, 053-265, 053-266, 053-267, 053-268, 053-269, 053-270, 053-271, 053-272,
053-273, 053-274, 053-275, 053-276, 053-277, 053-278, 053-279, 053-280, 053-281,
053-282, 053-283, 053-284, 053-285, 053-286, 053-287, 053-288, 053-289, 053-290,
053-291, 053-292, 053-293, 053-294, 053-295, 053-296, 053-297, 053-298, 053-299
Cause: Internal component failure
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support
Center.
053-301, 053-302, 053-303, 053-304, 053-305
Cause: A cover or door is open
Remedy: Close the opened cover or door; follow the instructions displayed on the
system’s UI to restart your job.
053-310, 053-311, 053-312, 053-313, 053-314
Cause: Internal component failure
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support
Center.
21-28
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
053-315, 053-316
Cause: Software problem
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support
Center.
053-326
Cause: Software problem
Remedy: Recheck the thickness of the incoming job; resend job. If fault continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
053-327, 053-328
Cause: Internal component failure
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support
Center.
053-332
Cause: Software problem
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support
Center.
053-333, 053-334
Cause: Internal component failure
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support
Center.
053-335
Cause: Software problem
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support
Center.
053-400
Cause: Book stacker tray is open
Remedy: Close the tray.If fault continues, power on/off the system.If fault continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
053-401
Cause: Top cover is open
Remedy: Close the cover.If fault continues, power on/off the system.If fault continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
053-404
Cause: Adhesive filling tray is open
Remedy: Close the tray.If fault continues, power on/off the system.If fault continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-29
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
053-405
Cause: Trimmer waste tray is full
Remedy: Empty the tray.Follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart
your print job.
053-406
Cause: Book stacker tray is full
Remedy: Empty the tray.Follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart
your print job.
053-407, 053-408
Cause: Cutter blade is nearing or at end of life
Remedy: Contact your service representative.
053-409
Cause: Adhesive level is low or empty
Remedy: Add more adhesive pellets to the adhesive filling tray.
053-410
Cause: Cutter blade is nearing or at end of life
Remedy: Contact your service representative.
053-411
Cause: Trimmer waste tray is full
Remedy: Empty the tray.
053-412
Cause: Adhesive level is low or empty
Remedy: Add more adhesive pellets to the adhesive filling tray. Follow the instructions
displayed on the system UI to restart your print job.
053-900, 053-901, 052-902, 052-903, 052-904, 052-905, 052-906, 052-907, 052-908,
052-909, 052-910, 052-911, 052-912, 052-913, 052-914, 052-915, 052-916
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Remove the jammed paper; follow the instructions displayed on the system
UI to restart your job.
053-922
Cause: Cannot detect the size loaded in the cover inserter tray or the amount loaded
in the tray exceeds maximum quantity.
Remedy: Remove contents from the tray; reload media into the tray, and ensure that
the correct tray programming information is reflected on the system’s UI.
054-210, 054-211, 054-212, 054-213, 054-214, 054-215, 054-216, 054-217, 054-218,
054-219, 054-220, 054-221, 054-222, 054-223, 054-224, 054-225, 054-226, 054-227,
054-228, 054-229, 054-230, 054-231, 054-232, 054-233, 054-234, 054-235, 054-236,
21-30
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
054-237, 054-238, 054-239, 054-240, 054-240, 054-241, 054-242, 054-243, 054-244,
054-245, 054-246, 054-247, 054-248, 054-249, 054-250, 054-251, 054-252, 054-253,
054-254, 054-255, 054-256, 054-257, 054-258, 054-259, 054-260, 054-261, 054-262,
054-263, 054-264, 054-265, 054-266, 054-267, 054-268, 054-269, 054-270, 054-271,
054-272, 054-273, 054-274, 054-275, 054-276, 054-277, 054-278, 054-279, 054-280,
054-281, 054-282, 054-283, 054-284, 054-285, 054-286, 054-287, 054-288, 054-289,
054-290, 054-291, 054-292, 054-293, 054-294, 054-295, 054-296, 054-297, 054-298,
054-299
Cause: Internal component failure
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support
Center.
055-210, 055-211, 055-212, 055-213, 055-214, 055-215, 055-216, 055-217, 055-218,
055-219, 055-220, 055-221, 055-222, 055-223, 055-224, 055-225, 055-226, 055-227,
055-228, 055-229, 055-230, 055-231, 055-232, 055-233, 055-234, 055-235, 055-236,
055-237, 055-238, 055-239, 055-240, 055-241, 055-242, 055-243, 055-244, 055-245,
055-246, 055-247, 055-248, 055-249, 055-250, 055-251, 055-252, 055-253, 055-254
Cause: Internal component failure
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support
Center.
153-700
Cause: Cutter blade is nearing or at end of life
Remedy: Contact your service representative.
153-701
Cause: Book stacker tray is full
Remedy: Empty the tray.Follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart
your print job.
153-702
Cause: Book stacker tray is open
Remedy: Close the tray.If fault continues, power on/off the system.If fault continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
153-703, 153-704
Cause: Defective books which were not trimmed or a book job that was cancelled in
the middle of the job, were delivered to the book stacker tray.
Remedy: Open the book stacker tray and remove the defective books. Dispose of
accordingly. Close the tray. If fault continues, power on/off the system.If fault continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
153-705
Cause: Trimmer waste tray is open
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-31
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Remedy: Close the tray.If fault continues, power on/off the system.If fault continues,
contact the Customer Support Center.
Paper size and trim recommendations for
perfect bound books
Finished size
Untrimmed book block
size
Letter
(8.5 x 11 in.)
A4
Untrimmed cover
size
Top trim
setting
Face trim
setting
9 x 12 in.
12 x 18 in.
(half sheet of 12 x 18 in.)
.50 in.
.50 in.
225 x 320 mm
(half sheet of SRA3)
SRA3
11.5 mm
15 mm
Undersize Letter Letter
(8.22 x 10.44 in.) (8.5 x 11 in.)
12 x 18 in.
.28 in.
.28 in.
Undersize A4
A4
(203 x 283 mm) (210 x 297 mm)
SRA3
7 mm
7 mm
6 x 9 in.
Executive or Monarch
sheet
(7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Custom cut US
Standard Fanfold
(11 x 14.62 in.)
.75 in.
1.25 in.
5.5 x 8.5 in.
Too small: Finished size is beyond Perfect Binder capabilities
A5
JIS B5
(182 x 257 mm)
Custom cut JIS B4
(257 x 364 mm)
23.5 mm
34 mm
8 x 8 in.
Custom cut
(minimum size: 8.28 x
10.13 in.)
Custom cut
(minimum size:
10.13 x 16.91 in.)
1.06
.28
Binder specifications
Binding type
Perfect binding is a process in which the leaves (pages) are bound by using an adhesive
and trimming off the excess edges. The adhesive holds the interior sheets of the book
together. Front and back covers may be included if desired. The final output is a finished,
perfect bound book with a wrap-around cover.
Cutting type
Full Bleed, Face cut, and No cut
21-32
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Cutting distance
Top/bottom: Minimum: 0.55 in./14 mm; maximum: 2.125 in./54 mm
Fore Edge: Minimum: 0.275 in./7 mm; maximum: 1.34 in./34 mm
Book thickness
Minimum: 0.118 in./3 mm
Maximum: 1 in./23 mm
Book dimensions
1 Book width
Minimum: 8 in./203 mm
Maximum: 11.7 in./297 mm
2 Book block (body pages)
Minimum: 5.8 in./148 mm
Maximum: 8.5 in./216 mm
3 Cover
Minimum: 11.8 in./299 mm
Maximum: 17.9 in./455 mm
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-33
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Book block (body pages)
Book pages are fed into the binder in the long edge feed (LEF) direction.
Acceptable paper sizes:
8.5 x 11 in./A4 (LEF); 6.93 x 9.84 in./B5 (LEF); SRA4/8.85 x 12.59 in. (LEF)
Acceptable paper weights:
17-43.5 lb. bond (64-163 gsm)
Note
Paper stock weights 106-163 gsm are limited to interleaf, a maximum of 10 sheets
per book, evenly distributed.
Approximate number of sheets per book (thickness)
10-200 sheets of 17 lb./64 gsm - 20 lb./80 gsm bond paper with a maximum thickness
of 1 in./25.4 mm or less for coated stocks
10-150 sheets of 20 lb./80 gsm - 28 lb. 105 gsm bond paper; maximum thickness of
1 in./25.4 mm or less for coated stocks
1-10 sheets of 28 lb./106 gsm - 43.5 lb./163 gsm for all stocks
Note
The number of pages listed is an approximation. The book block must be between 3
mm and 23 mm (0.118 in. and 1 in.).
Cover
Maximum number of 1 sheet per book and the sheet is fed into the binder in the short
edge feed (SEF) direction.
Acceptable paper sizes:
11 x 17 in./A3 (SEF), 9.84 x 13.90 in./B4 (SEF), SRA3/12.59 x 17.71 in. (SEF)
Acceptable paper weights:
24-80 lb. bond (90-300 gsm), 350 gsm Xerox Colotech
Binder’s bypass mode
Refer to the printer’s specifications for acceptable paper sizes and weights. These paper
types can be transported through the binder’s bypass mode directly to the next inline
finishing device. The printer’s specifications can be found earlier in this user guide.
Adhesive container capacity
Approximately 0.8 lb./380 grams; contains approximately enough adhesive for 135
books at 100 pages per book for 8.5 x 11 in./A4, 17 lb. (64 gsm) paper.
Cover inserter tray capacity
200 sheets of 20 lb./80 gsm
21-34
User Guide
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
Trimmer waste tray capacity
Approximately enough space for paper cuttings from approximately 15 books (when
binding 100 sheets of 8.5 x 11 in./A4 paper and trimming them to 6.93 x 9.84 in./B5
size).
Book stacker tray capacity
Approximately 4.17 in./106 mm width capacity
Warm-up time
Approximately 440 seconds (7 minutes) or less
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
21-35
Perfect Binder (D110/D125/D136 with integrated controller)
21-36
User Guide
22
Standard/Booklet Maker
Finisher
The Standard Finisher or Booklet Maker Finisher provides a wide range of finishing and
folding options. The following illustration shows the Booklet Maker Finisher.
Note
The Interface Cooling Module is required with D136 configurations.
Note
The Standard Finisher or Booklet Maker Finisher may be referred to simply as the finisher.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-1
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
The Standard/Booklet Maker finisher is comprised of the following components:
No.
Component
Function
1
Staple cartridge
Contains staples; remove this cartridge to replace staples
and clear staple jams.
2
Staple waste container
Container for staple waste; remove this container when full.
3
Top tray
The Top Tray is used for stacked output and can receive up
to 500 sheets of 20 lb./80 gsm paper. Copies are delivered
here when specific output features are selected, such as
Automatic sorting, Collated, Uncollated, or Normal.
4
Stacker (middle) tray
The Stacker Tray is used for offset and/or stapled output,
and can hold up to 2000 sheets of 20 lb./80 gsm paper. This
tray also receives copies when you punched and Z-folded
copies.
Note
Both the Top and Stacker Trays can be used for hole punched
output (optional)
5
Booklet output tray
6
Booklet output tray button This is available only with the Booklet Maker Finisher. When
you press this button, the booklet output tray is raised so you
can retrieve booklets from the output area.
7
Right cover
Open to clear paper jams, replace staples, clear jammed
staples, or remove the scraps from the puncher.
8
Staple cartridges for
booklet
This is available only with the Booklet Maker Finisher. There
are two staple cartridge for booklet. Remove this cartridge
to replace staples and clear staple jams.
9
Punch scrap container
Collects the scraps from the puncher. Open to remove the
scraps.
22-2
This is available only with the Booklet Maker Finisher. The
Booklet tray receives saddle-stitched booklets when you select
C-Fold or C-Fold + Stapling.
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
No.
Component
Function
10
C/Z-Fold output tray
(optional)
The optional Folder tray receives copies when you select Cfolding or Z-folding of 8.5 x 11 in./A4 output and 11 x 17
in./A3 media.
11
Left cover.
Open this cover to access the machine and to clear paper
jams.
12
Post-process inserter (Tray This is tray is called either Tray 8 or Tray T1. Its name
8/Tray T1)
depends on which machine to which the finisher is attached.
Features of Tray 8/T1 include the following:
• This tray is standard on this finisher and is used to load
paper that will be used as separators and covers.
• Paper loaded here is not printed on; use this tray for preprinted stock and for insertion into the printed output.
(This tray is also known as the Interposer).
• Tray 8 holds a maximum of 200 sheets when using 20
lb./75 gsm paper.
• Paper can be loaded in the LEF or SEF direction.
13
C/Z-Fold output tray
button
Press this button to open C/Z-Fold output tray.
14
Manual decurl button
When you press this button, it activates a decurling feature
for the output material. This applies especially to lighter
weight paper.
Manual decurling feature on the finisher
The finisher provides a manual decurling feature, which allows you to adjust the curl of
the print output at point of need.
Pressing the Decurler button on the finisher switches the decurl feature between the
Auto, On, and Off modes.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-3
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
1.
Auto button: When this indicator is lit, the appropriate curl correction is automatically
performed depending on the sizes and orientation of the printed output. The button
should be set to Auto for most situations. The button automatically switches to the
Auto mode when:
• The machine is switched on
• The machine exits the Power Saver mode
2.
3.
When this button is pressed and the downward curl indicator is lit, downward curl
correction is performed on all printed output. If your output is curled downward,
press this button to prevent downward curls.
When this button is pressed and the upward curl indicator is lit, upward curl correction
is performed on all printed output. If your output is curled upward, press this button
to prevent upward curls.
Note
When no indicator is lit, the machine does not perform any curl correction to the printed
output.
Folding feature
If your machine is equipped with the Booklet Maker Finisher and/or the C/Z Folder, you
can make prints using the folding option. The option folds your prints in half (single or
bi-folding) or in thirds (C-fold or Z-fold types). The folding option is selected from the
print driver.
Note
In order to use the folding option, the orientation of documents must be short-edge
feed (SEF). You must select a paper tray that contains SEF stock.
Fold types
Important
The Single Fold (Bi-Fold) option is available only with the Booklet Maker Finisher. The
C-Fold and Z-Fold options are available only with the C/Z Folder.
These fold types are available:
22-4
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Single Fold (Bi-Fold)
A Bi-Fold has one fold which creates two panels to the output.
C-Fold
A C-Fold has two folds which creates a three-panel output.
Z-Fold
A Z-Fold has two folds that are folded in opposite directions, resulting in a type of fan
fold.
Z-Fold Half Sheet (shown here with 3-hole punch)
As with a regular Z-Fold, it has two folds that are folded in the opposite directions. The
difference between a regular Z-Fold and a Z-Fold Half Sheet is that the Z-Fold Half
Sheet is not folded in two equal folds. The two folds are unequal which allows one edge
of the Z-Fold Half Sheet to have a longer edge, and the longer edge allows for stapling
or hole punching.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-5
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Loading paper/tabs in Tray 8/T1
(Post-Process Inserter)
1. If necessary, remove any remaining media that is currently loaded in Tray 8/T1.
2. Hold the center of the paper guides and slide them to their desired paper size.
3. Load the paper/tabs, aligning it to the front side of the tray.
a) If the paper is preprinted, load the paper with the printed side facing up.
b) If the media is tab stock, load the tab side to be fed first (in the direction of the
arrow as shown in the above illustration).
4. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size,
type, weight, and if necessary, decurler and/or alignment option
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray Properties screen may be
displayed on the UI.
5. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
22-6
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Maintenance
Standard/Booklet Maker consumable supplies
Xerox supplies, including staples, staple cartridges, and staple waste containers can be
ordered from Xerox by going to www.xerox.com and clicking on either the Contact Us
link for specific contact information/telephone numbers in your area or by clicking on
the Supplies and entering/selecting your specific machine information (product family
and model type).
Note
Always refer to www.xerox.com for the latest Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs) part
numbers.
Store supply items and Xerox parts in their original packages in a convenient location.
Supply Item
Supply Unit Shipped with finisher/Reorder Quantity
Staple cartridge/staple waste
container
4 staple cartridges (5000 staples per cartridge) and 1
staple waste container per carton
Booklet Maker Finisher staple cartridge 4 pack: 5000 staple refills each
Replace the standard staple cartridge
A message displays on the UI when it is time to replace a staple cartridge.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-7
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
3. Grasp the Staple Cartridge handle located at R1, and pull out the staple cartridge
from the finisher.
4. Hold the positions as indicated by the arrow and remove the staple cartridge from
the unit.
5. Push a new staple cartridge into the unit.
6. Reinstall the cartridge unit to its original position in the finisher.
7. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
22-8
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Replace the booklet staple cartridge
In addition to the standard stapler, the Booklet Maker Finisher is equipped with a booklet
stapler. When this booklet stapler needs to be replaced, a message appears on the UI.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. While pressing the lever to the right, pull out the booklet staple cartridge unit.
4. Hold the tabs of the staple cartridge unit by the tabs and lift to remove it.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-9
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
5. While holding the tabs of a new staple cartridge, push it into the unit.
6. Push the staple cartridge unit to its original position in the machine.
7. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Replacing the Staple Waste Container on the finisher
The machine displays a message indicating that the Staple Waste Container is full. To
replace the container:
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
22-10
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
3. Locate the Staple Waste Container ( R5) in the finisher, and move the lock lever to
the unlock position.
4. Hold R5 as shown in the figure and remove the staple waste container from the
machine.
5. Place the used staple waste container into a supplied plastic bag.
Note
Do not return a disassembled (used) container to the Customer Support Center.
6. Hold the new staple waste container by the R5 handle area and push it into the
machine.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-11
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Note
To prevent injury, do not put your fingers on top of the container.
7. Push R5 until the lock lever moves to the locked position.
8. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Empty the Punch Waste Container
The UI displays a message indicating when it is time to empty the Punch Waste
Container.
Caution
Only remove the Punch Waste Container while the system is powered ON. If you switch
off the power when emptying the container, the machine cannot detect that the
container was emptied.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
22-12
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
3. Pull the container out of the finisher ( R4).
4. Discard all the punch scraps in an appropriate container.
5. Reinsert the empty container into the machine.
6. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Finisher problem solving
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-13
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Note
Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed
to remove the jammed paper.
Paper jams in Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter)
1. Press the Cover button.
2. Open cover 1e and then remove the jammed paper and all paper loaded in the tray.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Fan the paper you removed, making sure that all four corners are neatly aligned, and
then load them again.
4. Push cover 1e until you hear it click into place.
Note
A message is displayed and the machine does not operate if the cover is open even
slightly.
22-14
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 1a and knob 1c
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the finisher left cover.
3. Move lever 1a downward and turn knob 1c left. Remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return lever 1a to the original position.
5. Close the finisher left cover completely.
Note
The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-15
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 1d
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the finisher left cover.
3. Move lever 1d upwards and remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Move the lever 1d to the original position.
5. Close the finisher left cover completely.
Note
The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
22-16
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 1b
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the finisher left cover.
3. Move the lever 1b to the right and remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Move the lever 1b to the original position.
5. Close the finisher left cover completely.
Note
The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-17
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 3b and 3d
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the levers 3b and 3d; remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the levers 3b and 3d to their original positions.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
22-18
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 3e and knob 3c
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 3e and turn the knob 3c; remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 3e its original position.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-19
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 3g and knob 3f
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 3g and turn the knob 3f and remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 3g to its original position.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
22-20
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 4b and knob 3a
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 4b and turn the knob 3a; remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 4b to its original position.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-21
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 2a and knob 3a
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 2a and turn the knob 3a; remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 2a to its original position.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
22-22
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 2b and knob 2c
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 2b and turn the knob 2c; remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 2b to its original position.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-23
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at 2c, 2e, 2f, and 2d
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Pull out the folder output tray ( 2d), swing lever 2e/2f to the right, and remove the
jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. If you cannot remove the paper, return the lever 2e/2f to its original position. Swing
the lever 2e/2f, turn the knob 2c to the right, and remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
22-24
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
5. Return the opened lever ( 2f) or ( 2e) to its original position, and close the output
tray ( 2d).
6. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Paper jams at 2d and lever 2g
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Pull out the folder output tray ( 2d), swing lever the 2g, and remove the jammed
paper.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-25
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the opened lever ( 2g) to its original position, and close the output tray ( 2d).
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Paper jams at unit 4 and knob 4a
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Pull out unit 4.
22-26
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
4. Turn the knob 4a to remove the jammed paper from the left side of unit 4.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
5. Return unit 4 to its original position.
6. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Paper jams at finisher top tray
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Remove jammed paper from the finisher top tray.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-27
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
3. Open and close the finisher right cover.
Note
The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams at finisher stacker tray
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Remove jammed paper from the finisher stacker tray.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Open and close the finisher right cover.
Note
The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
22-28
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at the optional booklet maker tray
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Turn knob 4a and remove any jammed paper from the optional booklet maker tray.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-29
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Stapler faults
Follow the procedures provided when the output is not stapled or the staples are bent.
Contact our Customer Support Center if the problem persists after you have tried the
following solutions. Stapler faults on output may look similar to the ones shown in the
following illustration.
1.
No staple
2.
Bent staple
3.
One side of staple rising up
4.
Staple bent in reverse direction
5.
Flattened staple
6.
Entire staple rising up
7.
Staple rising up with the center pressed in
If the output is stapled as shown in the figure above, contact our Customer Support
Center.
Note
Depending on the type of paper that is being stapled, the stapled nails may be bent. If
the bent nails are stuck inside the machine, they may eventually cause paper jams.
Remove the bent staple when opening the staple cartridge cover. If you do not remove
the bent staple, a staple jam may occur as a result. Use the staple cartridge cover only
when removing the bent staple.
Staple jams in the standard staple cartridge
Note
Always check inside the finisher for any individual staples or staple remnants.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
22-30
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Grasp the Staple Cartridge handle located at R1, and pull out the staple cartridge
from the finisher.
4. Check the inside of the finisher for any remaining staples, and if necessary, remove
them.
5. Open the staple cartridge unit as shown and remove the jammed staple.
Warning
To avoid injury to your fingers, carefully remove the jammed staples from the
cartridge.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-31
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
6. Reinstall the cartridge unit to its original position in the finisher.
7. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Staple jams in the booklet maker cartridge
Note
Always check inside the finisher for any individual staples or staple remnants.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. While pressing the lever to the right, pull out the booklet staple cartridge unit.
22-32
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
4. Hold the tabs of the staple cartridge unit by the tabs and lift to remove it.
5. Remove the jammed staples from the cartridge.
Warning
To avoid injury to your fingers, carefully remove the jammed staples from the
cartridge.
6. While holding the tabs of a new staple cartridge, push it into the unit.
7. Push the staple cartridge unit to its original position in the machine.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-33
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
8. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Reinserting the standard staple cartridge
Use this procedure if the standard staple cartridge is inserted incorrectly into the machine.
Note
Always check inside the finisher for any individual staples or staple remnants.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Grasp the Staple Cartridge handle located at R1, and pull out the staple cartridge
from the finisher.
22-34
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
4. If necessary, open the staple cartridge unit as shown and remove the jammed staple.
5. Move the lever on the rear of the staple cartridge unit in the downward direction.
6. While holding the lever down, turn over the unit and remove the staple cartridge from
the unit.
7. Detach the outside staples along the line.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-35
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
8. Push a new staple cartridge into the unit.
9. Reinstall the cartridge unit to its original position in the finisher.
10. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Fault codes
If an error caused the printing to end abnormally, or a malfunction occurred in the
Booklet Maker Finisher, then an error code is displayed.
If an error code appears that is not listed in the table below, or if an error persists after
following the listed solution, then contact your Xerox Customer Support Center.
If an error code is displayed, all print data of the machine as well as print data stored
in the machine’s built-in memory is discarded.
012-125
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-132
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
22-36
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-211
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-212
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-213
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-214
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-215
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-37
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-216
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-217
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-218
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-219
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-221
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
22-38
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
012-223
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-225
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-226
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-227
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-228
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-229
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-39
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-230
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-235
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-236
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-237
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-238
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
22-40
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-239
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-240
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-241
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-243
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-246
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-41
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
012-247
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-248
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-250
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-251
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-252
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-253
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
22-42
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-254
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-255
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-260
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-263
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-264
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-43
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-265
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-282
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-283
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-291
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-296
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
22-44
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
012-400
Cause: Staple Waste Container near full
Remedy: Follow the procedures to remove and replace the staple waste container in
the finisher.
012-949
Cause: Punch Waste Container is not attached
Remedy: Check that the punch waste container is installed in the finisher and inserted
correctly.
024-931
Cause: The Staple Waste Container is full or near full
Remedy: Remove the Staple Waste Container and install a new one.
024-932
Cause: The Staple Waste Container is not attached
Remedy: Check that the Staple Waste Container is installed in the finisher and inserted
correctly.
024-943
Cause: The booklet staple cartridge is empty or stapling error occurred.
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check the staple cartridge and reset correctly.
• If necessary, replace with a new cartridge.
• Resume job.
024-957
Cause: Post-Process Inserter Tray (Tray 8/T1) is empty or out of paper
Remedy: Add paper to the paper tray.
024-974
Cause: When feeding paper from the Post-Process Inserter Tray, the designated paper
size and the actual size of paper in the tray differ.
Remedy: Reset/change the paper or cancel the job.
024-976
Cause: Finisher staple fault
Remedy: Check staples and reset correctly.
024-977
Cause: Finisher staple feeding is not ready.
Remedy: Check staples and reset correctly.
024-978
Cause: Booklet maker finisher staple operation is not ready.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-45
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Remedy: Check staples and reset correctly.
024-979
Cause: The staple cartridge is empty
Remedy: Check staples. Follow procedures to remove and replace staple cartridge.
024-980
Cause: The stacker tray is full
Remedy: Remove all paper from the stacker tray.
024-981
Cause: The top tray is full.
Remedy: Remove all paper from the finisher top tray.
024-982
Cause: The finisher stacker tray lower safety warning in on
Remedy: Remove all paper from the stacker tray and remove any other obstructions.
024-983
Cause: The finisher booklet tray is full
Remedy: Remove all paper from the booklet tray.
024-984
Cause: The booklet stapler low staple signal is on
Remedy: Remove all paper from the booklet tray.
024-985
Cause: The booklet stapler low staple signal is on
Remedy: Remove all paper from the booklet tray.
024-987
Cause: The booklet folder tray is full
Remedy: Remove all paper from the tray. Set the output tray for three fold.
024-988
Cause: The booklet folder tray is full
Remedy: Check that the folder tray is correctly attached and set.
024-989
Cause: There is a problem with the booklet maker stapler
Remedy: Check the staple cartridge and reset correctly.
047-320
Cause: A communication error has occurred with the finisher
Remedy: Perform the following:
22-46
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
112-700
Cause: The Punch Waste Container is full or near full
Remedy: Remove and empty the waste container, then reinstall it.
116-790
Cause: The settings for stapling are canceled and prints the data
Remedy: Confirm the staple position and try to print again.
124-705
Cause: The settings for punching are canceled
Remedy: Confirm the punching position and try to print again.
124-706
Cause: The settings for folding are canceled
Remedy: Confirm the folding settings and try to print again.
124-709
Cause: The number of pages exceeds the number of pages that can be stapled
Remedy: Decrease the number of pages, or cancel the stapling settings, then try to
print again.
Specifications
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Item
Tray Type
Specification
• Top Tray: Collated/Uncollated
Note
Transparencies can be sent to the TOP tray of the finisher ONLY.
Transparencies cannot be sent to the stacker (middle) tray.
• Stacker (middle) Tray: Collated/Uncollated (Offset available)
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-47
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Item
Supported Paper Size
Specification
Top Tray:
• Maximum: SRA3, 13 x19 in., 12.6 x19.2 in., 330 x 488 mm (custom
size)
• Minimum: 100 x 148 mm (SEF), 4 x 6 in. (SEF), A6 (SEF) postcards
Stacker (middle) Tray:
• Maximum: 13 x 19 in. (330 x 488 mm), SRA3
• Minimum: B5, Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Optional C/Z Folder tray: Supports A4 (SEF) and 8.5 x 11 in. (SEF)
Delivery to a supported third-party, DFA device:
• Maximum: 13 x 19 in., SRA3
• Minimum: B5, Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Supported Paper Weight Trays:
• Top Tray: 55-350 gsm
• Stacker (middle) Tray: 55-300 gsm
• Optional C/Z Folder tray: 64-90 gsm
Delivery to a supported third-party, DFA device: 55-350 gsm
Tray Capacity
• Top Tray: 500 sheets
• Optional C/Z Folder tray: Minimum 30 sheets
*When using A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 8.5 x 11 in. LEF, 8 x 10 in. LEF, 7.5 x 10.5
in. LEF only. When using paper of other sizes, tray capacity is 1,500
sheets and 100 sets.
**Tray may not support some paper types.
Stapling (variable length) Maximum staple sheets: 100 sheets
• When using paper of size larger than A4 or 8.5 x 11 in., the
maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is 65.
• Staple nails may bend when using certain paper types.
Paper size:
• Maximum: A3/11 x 17 in.
• Minimum: B5, Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Staple position:
• 1 location: (front: angled stapling, center: parallel stapling, back:
parallel stapling*)
• 2 locations: (parallel stapling)
• 4 locations: A4 (LEF) and 8.5 x 11 in. (LEF) parallel stapling
*: Angled stapling for A3 and A4
22-48
User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Item
Hole Punching
Specification
Supported paper size:
• Maximum: A3/11 x 17 in.
• Minimum: B5 LEF (2 holes), A4 LEF (4 holes)
Number of holes: 2, 4, 3 (optional)
Paper type: 55-220 gsm
Booklet Creation/Single
Fold
Maximum number of sheets:
• Fold and Staple: 25 sheets
• Fold only: 5 sheets
When using Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm paper, only 14 sheets can be stapled
if adding a cover.
Paper size:
• Maximum: A3, 13 x 18 in.
• Minimum: A4 SEF, 8.5 x 11 in. SEF
Note
When using light-weight stocks, media jams may occur with Booklet
Creation, Single Fold, and stapling for output that is 25 sheets or
more. If media jams do occur, it is recommended that a different
media type is selected for the job.
Paper type: Fold only or Fold and Staple: 55-350gsm uncoated, 106300gsm coated
Paper Weights/Booklet Capacity:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Folding
Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process
Inserter; also called
Interposer)
64-80 gsm, Uncoated: 25 sheets
81-90 gsm, Uncoated: 20 sheets
91-105 gsm, Uncoated: 10 sheets
106-128 gsm, Uncoated: 10 sheets, Coated: 10 sheets
129-150 gsm, Uncoated: 10 sheets, Coated: 10 sheets
151-176 gsm, Uncoated: 10 sheets, Coated: 10 sheets
177-220 gsm, Uncoated: 5 sheets, Coated: 5 sheets
221-256 gsm, 4 sheets max. coated or uncoated
257-350 gsm, 3 sheets max, coated or uncoated
Note
Non-stapled fold sets are limited to 5 sheets of paper.
Paper size:
• Maximum: A3/11 x 17 in.
• Minimum: B5, Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
The machine does not print on paper loaded in Tray 8/T1.
Capacity: 200 sheets when using Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm paper.
Paper type: 64-220 gsm
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
22-49
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Optional C/Z Folder
Item
Z-Fold Half Sheet
Specification
• Z-paper size: 11 x 17 in./A3, 10 x 14 in./B4, 8K
• Capacity:
-
Maximum: 80 sheets (A3/11 x 17 in. Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm paper
Z folding)
20 sheets for 8K and 10 x 14 in./B4
• Paper type: 16-24 lb./64-90 gsm
• Output tray: Stacker (middle) tray
C-Fold
Z-Fold
Single Fold
22-50
• Paper size: A4/8.5 x 11 in.
• Number of sheets to be folded: 1 sheet
• Capacity: Minimum 30 sheets (When using Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm
paper.)
• Paper type: 16-24 lb./64-90 gsm
• Output tray: C/Z Folder tray
Refer to Booklet Creation/Single Fold specifications for more
information
User Guide
23
SquareFold Trimmer
Module
Overview
The SquareFold Trimmer Module is an optional finishing device that is used in conjunction
with another optional finishing device that contains a booklet maker.
Note
The SquareFold Trimmer Module requires a finisher with a booklet maker attached.
The SquareFold Trimmer Module:
• Receives the booklet from the booklet maker area of the finisher
• Flattens the booklet spine, thereby reducing the booklet thickness and giving it the
appearance of a perfect-bound book
• Trims/cuts away the face (edge) of the booklet, resulting in a neat finished edge
The booklet is assembled and stapled in the booklet area of the finisher; therefore, the
booklet enters the SquareFold Trimmer Module already assembled. Any adjustments to
the image of the original and its placement on the booklet page must be done from the
machine UI, your print driver, or from the print server.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
23-1
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Note
Always refer to the SquareFold Trimmer Module Hints and Tips section before using the
SquareFold Trimmer Module. The hints and tips section provides valuable information
about setting up your jobs, which in turn ensures the best possible output for your
print/copy jobs.
You may want to run one or more test prints/copies before running larger jobs.
Identifying the components
Main components
The main components consist of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Top Left Cover: Open this cover to remove paper jams. The square fold mechanism
is found in this area.
Top Right Cover: Open this cover to remove paper jams. The trimming mechanism
is found in this area.
Booklet Output Tray: This tray receives square-fold booklet output from the finisher.
Control Panel: The Control Panel consists of a mimic display, buttons, and various
indicator lights.
Trimmer Waste Container: Collects scrap/waste from the trimmer. Pull open to
remove and dispose of trimmer waste scraps.
Note
The top covers cannot be opened during normal operation or when the machine is idle.
The covers can be opened only when an indicator is lit and a jam/fault occurs within the
SquareFold Trimmer Module.
23-2
User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Paper path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The booklet leaves the booklet area of the finisher and enters the SquareFold
Trimmer Module.
The Booklet Exit sensor (in the SquareFold Trimmer Module) detects the lead edge
(spine) of booklet and moves the booklet to the square fold area.
Once the booklet spine reaches the square fold area, the booklet is clamped and
the square-folding operation begins.
The booklet is flattened and the spine squared according to the square-fold setting
indicated on the control panel.
After the booklet is flattened and the spine squared, it is moved to the trimmer area.
a.
b.
6.
Based on the finished booklet size, the booklet is moved until the trail edge
reaches the trimmer cutter.
The trail edge is trimmed/cut (based on the finished booklet size entered for
the Trimmer Mode Setting).
The booklet is then moved to the exit area where it is transported to the Booklet
Output Tray.
Note
Booklets exiting/leaving the SquareFold Trimmer Module may contain trim
remnants/scraps from the previously trimmed booklet. This is due to static electricity
build-up and is normal. If booklets contain trim remnants/scraps, simply remove and
discard them.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
23-3
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Control panel
The control panel consists of the following:
1.
Fault indicators: These indicators light when a fault or jam occurs in a particular
area of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
a.
b.
c.
This indicator lights when a jam occurs as the booklet is leaving the exit area
of the finisher.
This indicator lights when a jam occurs in the square fold area.
This indicator lights when a jam occurs in the trimmer area.
Note
If one of these indicators (1a, 1b, 1c) is lit, the top covers can be opened, and
the jam/fault cleared; otherwise, during normal operation or when the machine
is idle, the top covers cannot be opened.
d.
2.
This indicator lights when the Trimmer Waste Container is pulled out or when
it is full.
Square Fold options: This area of the control panel contains the following:
Note
The Square Fold options are available from your computer print driver, from your
print server, or from your machine UI (if it is a copier/printer). This is discussed in
more detail in the section entitled Square Fold options.
a.
b.
Settings button: Press this button to adjust the Square Fold setting; refer to the
next item.
Square Fold options: Select the desired setting; these settings are discussed in
more detail in the section entitled Square Fold options.
Square Fold feature
The Square Fold feature can be selected or accessed from your computer print driver,
the machine UI, or from the print server.
23-4
User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Note
The Square Fold feature is available only when your machine is connected to both a
finisher with a booklet maker and the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
Note
The term Book Pressing is used synonymously with the terms Square Fold or Square
Folding.
Square fold options
The Square Fold (Book Pressing) feature can be switched on or off based on user
preference. When the feature is switched on, you can select one of five options depending
on your requirements for the finished booklet job.
Note
For the remainder of this section, the SquareFold Trimmer Module Control Panel and
the machine UI screens are shown. The individual print server and print driver screens
are not shown. The descriptions given for each of the Square Fold options are applicable
for network print jobs and apply to any print server/print driver connected to the machine.
1.
2.
3.
Square Fold/Book Pressing options on the machine UI; the illustration shown is a
representation only. The actual images on the machine UI may vary depending on
the machine to which it is connected.
SquareFold Trimmer Module control panel
+2/Higher/High 2: Use this setting when you want the most amount of pressure
applied to the spine of the booklet. The more pressure applied to the booklet, the
more square the booklet spine will be. The greatest amount of pressure that can be
applied to the booklet is +2.
Additionally, you may want to select this setting when your finished booklet is five
pages or less and on heavier weight paper (200 gsm or greater).
4.
5.
+1/High/High 1: Use this setting when you want a greater amount of pressure
applied to the spine of the booklet, but not as much pressure as the +2 setting uses.
Auto/Normal: This is the machine default setting and is used for most jobs.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
23-5
SquareFold Trimmer Module
6.
-1/Low/Low 1: Use this setting when you want less pressure applied to the spine of
the booklet. The less pressure applied to the booklet, the more rounded the booklet
spine will be.
-2/Lower/Low 2: Select this setting when your finished booklet is five pages or less
and on lighter weight paper (100 gsm or lower). The least amount of pressure that
can be applied to the booklet is -2.
7.
Choose the setting that best fits your needs for the booklet output.
Note
You may want to run one or more test prints before running larger jobs.
The following illustration shows two different booklets: one booklet which was
square-folded and one booklet that was not square-folded.
1.
This booklet was not square-folded. It has a more rounded, thicker appearance to
the spine of the booklet.
This booklet was square-folded. The booklet spine is flattened and squared, giving
it the appearance of a perfect-bound book.
2.
Accessing the Square Fold options
Accessing the Square Fold options for network print jobs
For network print jobs, the Square Fold feature and its related options can be accessed
either from your computer’s print driver (before the job is submitted) for printing or at
the print server (after the job is submitted for printing). To access the Square Fold
feature/options for network print jobs, perform the following:
1. For jobs being sent from your computer, continue to the next step.
• For jobs already at the print server, continue to Step 3.
2. From your computer, open the desired job in its appropriate application (for example,
Microsoft Word® or Adobe Reader).
a) Select File and Print.
23-6
User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
b) From the Print window, select the desired machine (with the SquareFold Trimmer
Module attached to it), and then select Properties for that machine.
c) Continue to Step 4.
3. From the print server, if applicable, open the Properties of the desired job:
a) Double click on the job (from either the Hold or Printed Jobs queues).
b) From the Properties window, go to the Finishing/Output tab.
c) Continue to the next step.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Ensure that the correct output tray is selected (Booklet Maker Tray).
If necessary, ensure that the correct Stapling/Finishing/Folding features are selected.
Select the desired Square Fold (Book Pressing) option.
Select OK to save selections and close any Properties windows.
Send the job to the machine.
Accessing the Square Fold options for copy jobs
1. From the machine UI select Copy and the Output Format tab.
2. Select either Booklet Creation or Folding.
3. From the Booklet Creation screen perform the following:
a) Select On.
b) Select Fold & Staple.
c) From the Booklet Creation - Fold & Staple screen, select either Fold Only or Fold
& Staple.
To access the Square Fold feature, select the Booklet Trimming/Pressing button.
4. From the Folding screen, select Single Fold.
a) Select Fold as a Set.
b) Select Booklet Trimming/Pressing button to access the Square Fold (Book Pressing)
feature.
Trimmer feature
The Trimmer feature can be selected/accessed from your computer print driver, the
machine UI, or from the print server.
Note
The Trimmer feature is available only when your machine is connected to both a finisher
with a booklet maker and the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
Trimmer options
When using the Trimmer options, always consider the following:
• Booklets exiting/leaving the SquareFold Trimmer Module may contain trim
remnants/scraps from the previously trimmed booklet. This is due to static electricity
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
23-7
SquareFold Trimmer Module
build-up and is normal. If booklets contain trim remnants/scraps, simply remove and
discard them.
• The Trimmer feature can be switched on or off based on user preference. When the
feature is switched on, you can adjust the trim setting in 0.1 mm/0.0039 in. increments
depending on your requirements for the finished booklet job.
Note
For the remainder of this section, the machine UI screen is shown. The individual print
server and print driver screens are not shown. The descriptions given for each of the
Trimmer options are applicable for network print jobs, and apply to any print server/print
driver connected to the machine.
1.
2.
Select the arrow buttons to decrease or increase the trimmer setting. Adjustments
are made in 0.1 mm/0.0039 in. increments.
The trimmer setting is based on:
•
•
•
•
The number of sheets in the finished booklet
The finished booklet width size (such as 8.5 in./210 mm or 5.5 in./149 mm)
The media type (for example coated/uncoated, glossy)
The media weight
Note
Important! You may have to experiment with various settings in order to determine the
best settings for your particular job. Also, you may want to run one or more test prints
before running larger jobs in order to ensure the best possible booklet output.
Note
Trim settings cannot be adjusted to remove less than 2 mm (0.078 in.) or more than 20
mm (0.787 in.) of edge material from the booklet. Adjustments less than 2 mm (0.078
in.) may produce poor trim quality, and adjustments greater 20 mm (0.078 in.) result in
no trimming to the booklet edge.
23-8
User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Choose the setting that best fits your needs for the booklet output.
Trim guidelines
The following table shows various scenarios using different paper weights, media types,
and trim setting selections. Use this table as a guideline when selecting a trim setting
for your specific job.
Note
The settings shown in the following table are provided as examples and are not meant
to represent every possible job scenario; again, use this table as a guideline only.
Number of
Approximate
Finished booklet Paper weight
pages in
trim setting
size
(lbs./gsm)
finished
(mm)
booklet
Scenario
number
Paper Size
1
8.5 x 11 in./A4 (210 5.5 x 8.5 in./149 x 20 lbs./75
x 298 mm)
210 mm
gsm
130
20
2
8.5 x 11 in./A4 (210 5.5 x 8.5 in./149 x 24 lbs./90
x 298 mm)
210 mm
gsm
125
14
3
8.5 x 11 in./A4 (210 5.5 x 8.5 in./149 x 32 lbs./120
x 298 mm)
210 mm
gsm
135
10
4
8.5 x 11 in./A4 (210 5.5 x 8.5 in./149 x 20 lbs./75
x 298 mm)
210 mm
gsm
125
10
5
8.5 x 11 in./A4 (210 5.5 x 8.5 in./149 x 80 lbs./120
x 298 mm)
210 mm
gsm
135
12
6
8.5 x 14 in./B4 (250 8.5 x 7 in./250 x
x 353 mm)
176.5 mm
20 lbs./75
gsm
172
6
7
8.5 x 14 in./B4 (250 8.5 x 7 in./250 x
x 353 mm)
176.5 mm
24 lbs./90
gsm
170
6
8
11 x 17 in./A3 (297 8.5 x 11 in./A4
x420 mm)
210 x 297 mm)
24 lbs./90
gsm
200
14
9
11 x 17 in./A3 (297 8.5 x 11 in./A4
x420 mm)
210 x 297 mm)
80 lbs./216
gsm
205
5
10
11 x 17 in./A3 (297 8.5 x 11 in./A4
x420 mm)
210 x 297 mm)
20 lbs./80
gsm
210
22
11
11 x 17 in./A3 (297 8.5 x 11 in./A4
x420 mm)
210 x 297 mm)
24 lbs./90
gsm
210
8
12
11 x 17 in./A3 (297 8.5 x 11 in./A4
x420 mm)
210 x 297 mm)
80 lbs./120
gsm
205
10
13
12 x 18 in./305 x
458 mm
6 x 9 in./152 x
229 mm
80 lbs./120
gsm
220
6
14
12 x 18 in./305 x
458 mm
6 x 9 in./152 x
229 mm
80 lbs./120
gsm
215
5
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
23-9
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Paper Size
Number of
Approximate
Finished booklet Paper weight
pages in
trim setting
size
(lbs./gsm)
finished
(mm)
booklet
15
12 x 18 in./305 x
458 mm
6 x 9 in./152 x
229 mm
80 lbs./120
gsm
210
4
16
12 x 18 in./305 x
458 mm
6 x 9 in./152 x
229 mm
28 lbs./105
gsm
220
16
17
12 x 18 in./305 x
458 mm
6 x 9 in./152 x
229 mm
80 lbs./120
gsm
210
14
Scenario
number
Accessing the Trimmer options
Accessing the Trimmer options for network print jobs
For network print jobs, the Trimmer feature and its related options can be accessed
either from your computer’s print driver (before the job is submitted for printing) or at
the print server (after the job is submitted for printing). To access the Trimmer
feature/options for network print jobs, perform the following:
1. For jobs being sent from your computer, continue to the next step.
• For jobs already at the print server, continue to Step 3.
2. From your computer, open the desired job in its appropriate application (for example,
Microsoft Word® or Adobe Reader).
a) Select File and Print.
b) From the Print window, select the desired machine (with the SquareFold Trimmer
Module attached to it), and then select Properties for that machine.
c) Continue to Step 4.
3. From the print server, if applicable, open the Properties of the desired job:
a) Double click on the job (from either the Hold or Printed Jobs queues).
b) From the Properties window, go to the Finishing/Output tab.
c) Continue to the next step.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Ensure that the correct output tray is selected (Booklet Maker Tray).
If necessary, ensure that the correct Stapling/Finishing/Folding features are selected.
Select the desired Trimmer option.
Select OK to save selections and close any Properties windows.
Send the job to the machine.
Accessing the Trimmer options for copy jobs
1. From the machine UI, select Copy and the Output Format tab.
2. Select either Booklet Creation or Folding.
3. From the Booklet Creation screen, perform the following:
a) Select On.
23-10
User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
b) Select Fold & Staple.
c) From the Booklet Creation - Fold & Staple screen, select either Fold Only or Fold
& Staple.
To access the Trimmer feature, select the Booklet Trimming/Pressing button.
4. From the Folding screen, select Single Fold.
a) Select Fold as a Set.
b) Select Booklet Trimming/Pressing button to access the Trimming feature.
Hints and tips
Printing full-page images on booklets
When using full-page images, ensure that the finished booklet size accommodates any
full-page images, and that when the booklet is trimmed, these images are not truncated.
Refer to the illustration.
1.
2.
This booklet has preprinted front and back covers with a full-page image. It was
printed on 8.5 x 14 in./B4 paper. The front cover, which was trimmed, displays the
entire image.
This same booklet was printed on 8.5 x 11 in./A4 paper. The image on the front
cover is truncated after trimming it.
Before you print any booklet job, you should consider your whole job, including the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
What is the desired size of the finished booklet?
Does the booklet contain full-page images?
Are you using preprinted covers with full-page images?
Are you trimming the booklet?
Do you need to shift any full-page images in order to ensure they fit on the finished
booklet?
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
23-11
SquareFold Trimmer Module
These are important questions which can affect the output of your booklet jobs, especially
if you are using full-page images and trimming the booklet edges.
Follow these tips
Follow these tips to ensure you get your desired output:
• Always run one or more test prints of your job before running a larger output quantity.
• Review your test prints for truncated images/text.
• If any images or text need shifting, use the various selections from your application’s
print driver; refer to your print driver’s Help information.
• Remember: it may take one or more test prints before you achieve your desired
output.
Problem solving
Jam clearance
Note
The top covers cannot be opened during normal operation or when the machine is idle.
The covers can be opened only when an indicator is lit and a jam/fault occurs within the
SquareFold Trimmer Module. For indicator details, refer to the control panel information
earlier in this section.
The paper path is shown in the above illustration. Clear any paper jams that may occur
along the paper path. If a jam occurs, the machine stops printing, and a message may
be displayed on the User Interface (UI).
Note
To determine if the jam/fault is within the finisher or with the SquareFold Trimmer
Module, always begin your troubleshooting with the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
23-12
User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Clearing jams
Use the following procedure to clear jams or faults and then resume printing:
1. Follow the instructions displayed on the machine's UI.
2. If instructed by the machine UI, open the Top Left Cover and the Top Right Cover
of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
3. Look for any jammed booklets within the SquareFold Trimmer Module paper path
and remove them.
4. Check for loose trim scraps along the paper path and remove them.
5. Close the Top Left and Right Covers.
6. Empty the Trimmer Waste Container.
7. Ensure that the Trimmer Waste Container is completely pushed in/closed.
8. Ensure that all covers on the SquareFold Trimmer Module are closed.
9. If the SquareFold Trimmer Module Control Panel and/or the machine’s UI indicate
there is a still a jam, recheck the SquareFold Trimmer Module (steps 1-8).
10. If necessary, open the finisher to look for jams/faults along the finisher path.
11. Follow the instructions displayed on the machine UI to resume printing.
Clearing E1/E2 jams
Use the following procedure to clear jams when the E1 and/or E2 LED is lit on the
SquareFold Trimmer Module control panel.
1. Make sure that the machine is not in operation, and press the button on the left cover
of the Trimmer unit to open the cover.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
23-13
SquareFold Trimmer Module
2. Remove the jammed paper.
3. If you cannot remove the paper in Step 2, open the right cover of the finisher.
4. Turn the knob 4a to the right, and then remove the jammed paper.
5. Close the left cover of the Trimmer unit.
6. If you opened the right cover of the finisher in Step 3, close the cover.
23-14
User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Note
A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the right cover of
the finisher is even slightly open.
Clearing E3 jams
Use the following procedure to clear jams when the E3 LED is lit on the SquareFold
Trimmer Module control panel.
1. Make sure that the machine is not in operation, and press the button on the right
cover of the Trimmer unit to open the cover.
2. Remove the jammed paper.
3. Close the right cover of the Trimmer unit.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
23-15
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Fault codes
If a jam/fault occurs in the SquareFold Trimmer Module, the machine’s UI displays a
jam/fault message. The following table provides a list of fault codes for the SquareFold
Trimmer Module and a list of related finisher fault codes.
Note
The top covers cannot be opened during normal operation or when the machine is idle.
The covers can be opened only when an indicator is lit and a jam/fault occurs within the
SquareFold Trimmer Module. For indicator details, refer to the control panel information
earlier in this section.
012-115
Cause: Finisher jam or fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
If machine UI continues to reflect a fault/jam, go to the finisher:
• Open the finisher.
• Remove any jams
• Close the finisher cover(s).
2.
Follow the instructions shown on the machine UI to resume printing.
3.
If fault persists, power off/on the machine.
4.
If fault persists, call for service.
012-264
Cause: Finisher jam or fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
If machine UI continues to reflect a fault/jam, go to the finisher:
• Open the finisher.
• Remove any jams
• Close the finisher cover(s).
2.
Follow the instructions shown on the machine UI to resume printing.
3.
If fault persists, power off/on the machine.
4.
If fault persists, call for service.
012-302
Cause: Finisher jam or fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
If machine UI continues to reflect a fault/jam, go to the finisher:
• Open the finisher.
23-16
User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
• Remove any jams
• Close the finisher cover(s).
2.
Follow the instructions shown on the machine UI to resume printing.
3.
If fault persists, power off/on the machine.
4.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-100
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers.
4.
Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
• If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
• If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5.
If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machine’s UI.
6.
If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-101
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers.
4.
Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
• If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
• If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5.
If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machine’s UI.
6.
If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-102
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers.
4.
Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
• If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
23-17
SquareFold Trimmer Module
• If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5.
If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machine’s UI.
6.
If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-103
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers.
4.
Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
• If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
• If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5.
If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machine’s UI.
6.
If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-104
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers.
4.
Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
• If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
• If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5.
If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machine’s UI.
6.
If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-105
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers.
4.
Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
• If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
• If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5.
If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machine’s UI.
23-18
User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
6.
If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-106
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers.
4.
Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
• If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
• If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5.
If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machine’s UI.
6.
If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-208
Cause: The Trimmer Waste Container is full or has a fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Pull open the container and empty any trimmer scraps from it.
2.
Reinsert the container into the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
3.
Ensure that the container is fully pushed in, and that the indicator light is not lit.
4.
If fault persists, repeat the previous steps.
5.
If fault persists, power off/on the machine.
6.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-221
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-222
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-223
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
23-19
SquareFold Trimmer Module
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-224
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-225
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-226
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-227
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-228
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-229
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-230
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
23-20
User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-231
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-232
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-233
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
0013-234
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-235
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-236
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-237
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
23-21
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-238
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-239
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-240
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-241
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-242
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-243
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
23-22
User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
013-246
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Power off/on the machine.
2.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-303
Cause: A top cover is open or a jam/fault occurred with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers.
4.
Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
• If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
• If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5.
If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machine’s UI.
6.
If fault persists, repeat the previous steps.
7.
If fault persists, power off/on the machine.
8.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-304
Cause: A top cover is open
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
2.
Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers.
3.
If fault persists, power off/on the machine.
4.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-915
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers.
4.
Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
• If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
• If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5.
If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machine’s UI.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
23-23
SquareFold Trimmer Module
6.
If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-916
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers.
4.
Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
• If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
• If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5.
If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machine’s UI.
6.
If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-917
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers.
4.
Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
• If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
• If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5.
If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machine’s UI.
6.
If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-918
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers.
4.
Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
• If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
• If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5.
If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machine’s UI.
6.
If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
23-24
User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
013-919
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
2.
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
3.
Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers.
4.
Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
• If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
• If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5.
If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machine’s UI.
6.
If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-940
Cause: The Trimmer Waste Container is full or has a fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Pull open the container and empty any trimmer scraps from it.
2.
Reinsert the container into the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
3.
Ensure that the container is fully pushed in, and that the indicator light is not lit.
4.
If fault persists, repeat the previous steps.
5.
If fault persists, power off/on the machine.
6.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-941
Cause: The Trimmer Waste Container is full or has a fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Pull open the container and empty any trimmer scraps from it.
2.
Reinsert the container into the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
3.
Ensure that the container is fully pushed in, and that the indicator light is not lit.
4.
If fault persists, repeat the previous steps.
5.
If fault persists, power off/on the machine.
6.
If fault persists, call for service.
013-943
Cause: Booklet Tray on the SquareFold Trimmer Module is full
Remedy: Perform the following:
1.
Remove any booklets from the tray.
2.
If fault persists, power off/on the machine.
3.
If fault persists, call for service.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
23-25
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Technical data
Specifications
Item
Paper size
Specifications
• Maximum: 13 x 18 in./330 x 457 mm
• Minimum: 8.5 x 11 in./A4 SEF
Note
The SquareFold Trimmer Module requires both the Interface Cooling
Module and the Booklet Maker Finisher.
Trim capacity
• 5-20 sheet booklet (up to 80 imaged sides) at 24 lb./90 gsm
• 5-25 sheet booklet (up to 100 imaged sides) at 200 lb./80 gsm
Cut amount: 2-20 mm, adjustable in 0.1 mm increments
Paper weights
23-26
16 lb. bond-90 lb. cover (60-220 gsm)
User Guide
24
Standard Finisher Plus
The Standard Finisher Plus acts as a communication device and provides a paper path
between the print engine, the required Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module, and
any third-party, Document Finishing Architecture (DFA) device that is attached to the
machine.
The Standard Finisher Plus supports a number of optional finishing devices ranging from
light-production print engines to futuristic devices that utilize other communication and
physical interfaces.
Overview
Note
The Standard Finisher Plus requires either the Interface Module or the Interface Cooling
Module (depending on your product and machine configuration).
Note
The Standard Finisher Plus is not available with the D95 Copier/Printer configuration.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-1
Standard Finisher Plus
The Standard Finisher Plus consists of these two modules:
1.
Finisher Module
2.
Finishing Transport
Output prints are fed from the machine (and any attached optional finishing device) to
the Finisher Module. The Finishing Transport serves as an interface to transfer paper
from the Finisher Module and the attached third-party output device. The Finishing
Transport moves the paper from the Finisher Module to one of the three Finishing
Transport exits. The height of the paper entry on the third-party, DFA device must align
with the Finishing Transport exit 1 or exit 2.
The Finishing Transport is built to support a number of finishing operations ranging
from light-production print engines to futuristic devices that utilize other communication
and physical interfaces.
Finisher Module
Finisher Module main components
The Finisher Module includes the following components:
No.
1
24-2
Component
Finisher Module
Function
Output prints are fed from the machine through the
required Interface Module or Interface Cooling Module
(depending on product and machine configuration) to
the Finisher Module which then feeds the prints to the
Finishing Transport for delivery to a third-party output
device.
The Finisher Module is shown here with the optional C/Z
Folder.
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
No.
Component
Function
2
Post-process inserter (Tray
8/Tray T1)
3
Punch scrap container
Collects the scraps from the puncher. Open to remove
the scraps.
4
Staple cartridge
Contains staples; remove this cartridge to replace staples
and clear staple jams.
5
Staple waste container
Container for staple waste; remove this container when
full.
6
Top tray
The Top Tray is used for stacked output, and can receive
up to 500 sheets of 20 lb./80 gsm paper. Copies are
delivered here when specific output features are selected,
such as Automatic sorting, Collated, Uncollated, or
Normal.
7
Stacker (middle) tray
The Stacker Tray is used for offset and/or stapled output,
and can hold up to 2000 sheets of 20 lb./80 gsm paper.
This tray also receives copies when you punch and Z-fold
copies.
• This tray is standard on this finisher and is used to
load paper that will be used as separators and covers.
• Paper loaded here is not printed on; use this tray for
pre-printed stock and for insertion into the printed
output. (This tray is also known as the Interposer).
• Tray 8 holds a maximum of 200 sheets when using
20 lb./75 gsm paper.
• Paper can be loaded in the LEF or SEF direction.
Note
Both the Top and Stacker Trays can be used for hole
punched output (optional).
8
Right cover
Open to clear paper jams, replace staples, clear jammed
staples, or remove the scraps from the puncher.
9
C/Z-Fold output tray
(optional)
The optional Folder tray receives copies when you select
C-folding or Z-folding of 8.5 x 11 in./A4 output and 11 x
17 in./A3 media.
10
Left cover.
Open this cover to access the machine and to clear paper
jams.
Folding feature
If your machine is equipped with the Booklet Maker Finisher and/or the C/Z Folder, you
can make prints using the folding option. The option folds your prints in half (single or
bi-folding) or in thirds (C-fold or Z-fold types). The folding option is selected from the
print driver.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-3
Standard Finisher Plus
Note
In order to use the folding option, the orientation of documents must be short-edge
feed (SEF). You must select a paper tray that contains SEF stock.
Fold types
Important
The Single Fold (Bi-Fold) option is available only with the Booklet Maker Finisher. The
C-Fold and Z-Fold options are available only with the C/Z Folder.
These fold types are available:
Single Fold (Bi-Fold)
A Bi-Fold has one fold which creates two panels to the output.
C-Fold
A C-Fold has two folds which creates a three-panel output.
Z-Fold
A Z-Fold has two folds that are folded in opposite directions, resulting in a type of fan
fold.
24-4
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Z-Fold Half Sheet (shown here with 3-hole punch)
As with a regular Z-Fold, it has two folds that are folded in the opposite directions. The
difference between a regular Z-Fold and a Z-Fold Half Sheet is that the Z-Fold Half
Sheet is not folded in two equal folds. The two folds are unequal which allows one edge
of the Z-Fold Half Sheet to have a longer edge, and the longer edge allows for stapling
or hole punching.
Loading paper/tabs in Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter)
1. If necessary, remove any remaining media that is currently loaded in Tray 8/T1.
2. Hold the center of the paper guides and slide them to their desired paper size.
3. Load the paper/tabs, aligning it to the front side of the tray.
a) If the paper is preprinted, load the paper with the printed side facing up.
b) If the media is tab stock, load the tab side to be fed first (in the direction of the
arrow as shown in the above illustration).
4. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size,
type, weight, and if necessary, decurler and/or alignment option
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-5
Standard Finisher Plus
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray Properties screen may be
displayed on the UI.
5. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
Finishing Transport
Finishing Transport main components
The Finishing Transport is comprised of the following components:
No.
Component
Function
1
Finishing Transport
The Finishing Transport serves as an interface to
transfer paper from the Finisher Module and the
attached third-party output device.
2
Finishing Transport status display This display indicates the status of the Finishing
Transport and shows the locations of any paper jams.
3
Finishing Transport front door
24-6
Open to clear paper jams and clean the paper path
areas.
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Finishing Transport status indicators
The mimic display indicates the status of the Finishing Transport and the location of
the paper jams.
Refer to the following table for detailed information on the
Location
Power indicator
Fault indicator
LED Color
Status
Reason
Green
ON
The Finishing Transport power is on and
functioning properly.
OFF
The Finishing Transport power is off.
ON
May be one of the following:
Red
• Paper jam indication
• Open front door
Area 1
Red
ON
Paper jam in Area 1
Area 2
Red
ON
Paper jam in Area 2
Area 3
Red
ON
Paper jam in Area 3
Area 4
Red
ON
Paper jam in Area 4
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-7
Standard Finisher Plus
Standard Finisher Plus maintenance
Standard Finisher Plus consumable supplies
Xerox supplies, paper, and throughput material can be ordered from Xerox by going to
www.xerox.com and clicking on either the Contact Us link for specific contact
information/telephone numbers in your area or by clicking on the Supplies and
entering/selecting your specific machine information (product family and model type).
Note
Always refer to www.xerox.com for the latest Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs) part
numbers.
Store supply items and Xerox parts in their original packages in a convenient location.
Supply Item
Supply Unit Shipped with finisher/Reorder Quantity
Staple cartridge/staple waste
container
4 staple cartridges (5000 staples per cartridge) and 1 staple
waste container per carton
Replace the standard staple cartridge
A message displays on the UI when it is time to replace a staple cartridge.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
24-8
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
3. Grasp the Staple Cartridge handle located at R1, and pull out the staple cartridge
from the finisher.
4. Hold the positions as indicated by the arrow and remove the staple cartridge from
the unit.
5. Push a new staple cartridge into the unit.
6. Reinstall the cartridge unit to its original position in the finisher.
7. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-9
Standard Finisher Plus
Replacing the Staple Waste Container on the finisher
The machine displays a message indicating that the Staple Waste Container is full. To
replace the container:
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Locate the Staple Waste Container ( R5) in the finisher, and move the lock lever to
the unlock position.
4. Hold R5 as shown in the figure and remove the staple waste container from the
machine.
24-10
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
5. Place the used staple waste container into a supplied plastic bag.
Note
Do not return a disassembled (used) container to the Customer Support Center.
6. Hold the new staple waste container by the R5 handle area and push it into the
machine.
Note
To prevent injury, do not put your fingers on top of the container.
7. Push R5 until the lock lever moves to the locked position.
8. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-11
Standard Finisher Plus
Empty the Punch Waste Container
The UI displays a message indicating when it is time to empty the Punch Waste
Container.
Caution
Only remove the Punch Waste Container while the system is powered ON. If you switch
off the power when emptying the container, the machine cannot detect that the
container was emptied.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Pull the container out of the finisher ( R4).
4. Discard all the punch scraps in an appropriate container.
24-12
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
5. Reinsert the empty container into the machine.
6. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Problem solving
Paper jams in the Finisher Module
Paper jams in Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter)
1. Press the Cover button.
2. Open cover 1e and then remove the jammed paper and all paper loaded in the tray.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-13
Standard Finisher Plus
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Fan the paper you removed, making sure that all four corners are neatly aligned, and
then load them again.
4. Push cover 1e until you hear it click into place.
Note
A message is displayed and the machine does not operate if the cover is open even
slightly.
Paper jams inside the finisher left cover
Paper jams at lever 1a and knob 1c
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the finisher left cover.
24-14
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
3. Move lever 1a downward and turn knob 1c left. Remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return lever 1a to the original position.
5. Close the finisher left cover completely.
Note
The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams at lever 1d
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the finisher left cover.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-15
Standard Finisher Plus
3. Move lever 1d upwards and remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Move the lever 1d to the original position.
5. Close the finisher left cover completely.
Note
The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams at lever 1b
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the finisher left cover.
24-16
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
3. Move the lever 1b to the right and remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Move the lever 1b to the original position.
5. Close the finisher left cover completely.
Note
The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams inside the finisher right cover
Paper jams at lever 3b and 3d
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-17
Standard Finisher Plus
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the levers 3b and 3d; remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the levers 3b and 3d to their original positions.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
24-18
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Paper jams at lever 3e and knob 3c
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 3e and turn the knob 3c; remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 3e its original position.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-19
Standard Finisher Plus
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Paper jams at lever 3g and knob 3f
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 3g and turn the knob 3f and remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
24-20
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
4. Return the lever 3g its original position.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Paper jams at lever 4b and knob 3a
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 4b and turn the knob 3a; remove the jammed paper.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-21
Standard Finisher Plus
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 4b its original position.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Paper jams at the optional C/Z Folder
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs.
This section describes how to remedy paper jams that occur at the following locations:
•
•
•
•
Paper jams at lever 2a and knob 3a
Paper jams at lever 2b and knob 2c
Remove jams at knob 2c, levers 2e and 2f, and the folder output tray (2d)
Paper jams at the folder output tray (2d) and at lever 2g
Note
Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed
to remove the jammed paper.
Paper jams at lever 2a and knob 3a
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
24-22
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 2a and turn the knob 3a; remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 2a to its original position.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-23
Standard Finisher Plus
Paper jams at lever 2b and knob 2c
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 2b and turn the knob 2c; remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 2b to its original position.
24-24
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Paper jams at 2c, 2e, 2f, and 2d
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Pull out the folder output tray ( 2d), swing lever 2e to the right, and remove the
jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-25
Standard Finisher Plus
4. If you cannot remove the paper, return the lever 2e to its original position. Swing
the lever 2e, turn the knob 2c to the right, and remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
5. Return the opened lever ( 2f) or ( 2e) to its original position, and close the output
tray ( 2d).
6. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Paper jams at 2d and lever 2g
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
24-26
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Pull out the folder output tray ( 2d), swing lever the 2g, and remove the jammed
paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the opened lever ( 2g) to its original position, and close the output tray ( 2d).
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-27
Standard Finisher Plus
Paper jams in areas 4b and 4c
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the levers 4b and 4c; remove the jammed paper.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the opened levers ( 4b and 4c) their original positions.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
24-28
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Paper jams at the finisher output area
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs.
This section describes how to remedy paper jams that occur at the following locations:
• Paper jams at the finisher top tray
• Paper jams at the finisher stacker tray
Note
Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed
to remove the jammed paper.
Paper jams at finisher top tray
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Remove jammed paper from the finisher top tray.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Open and close the finisher right cover.
Note
The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-29
Standard Finisher Plus
Paper jams at finisher stacker tray
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
2. Remove jammed paper from the finisher stacker tray.
Note
If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Open and close the finisher right cover.
Note
The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams in the Finishing Transport
Paper jams in area 1
Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed
to remove the jammed paper.
24-30
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs. If paper is torn, check inside the Finishing
Transport and remove it.
1. Open the Finishing Transport front door.
2. Grasp the green handle 1 and gently pull downwards.
3. Remove the jammed paper.
For a paper jam at the exit of the Finisher Module and the entry of the Finishing
Transport, remove it by pulling the paper towards the Finishing Transport.
4. Return the green handle 1 to its original position.
5. Close the Finishing Transport front door.
6. Ensure that the paper jam indication is cleared from the Finishing Transport status
display.
7. Follow the instructions on the UI to restart your print job.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-31
Standard Finisher Plus
Paper jams in area 2
Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed
to remove the jammed paper.
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs. If paper is torn, check inside the Finishing
Transport and remove it.
1. Open the Finishing Transport front door.
2. Grasp the green handle 2 and gently pull down and toward the right.
3. Remove the jammed paper.
4. If necessary, rotate the green knob in the direction shown to remove any jammed
paper in this area.
5. Return the green handle 2 to its original position.
6. Close the Finishing Transport front door.
7. Ensure that the paper jam indication is cleared from the Finishing Transport status
display.
24-32
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
8. Follow the instructions on the UI to restart your print job.
Paper jams in area 3
Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed
to remove the jammed paper.
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs. If paper is torn, check inside the Finishing
Transport and remove it.
1. Open the Finishing Transport front door.
2. Grasp the green handle 3 and gently pull toward the left.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the jammed paper.
Return the green handle 3 to its original position.
Close the Finishing Transport front door.
Ensure that the paper jam indication is cleared from the Finishing Transport status
display.
7. Follow the instructions on the UI to restart your print job.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-33
Standard Finisher Plus
Paper jams in area 4
Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed
to remove the jammed paper.
Tip
Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared
before proceeding with your print jobs. If paper is torn, check inside the Finishing
Transport and remove it.
1. Open the Finishing Transport front door.
2. Grasp the green handle 4 and gently pull toward the right.
3. Remove the jammed paper.
4. Check for and remove any jammed paper between the Finishing Transport exit and
the entrance to the attached third-party device.
5. Return the green handle 4 to its original position.
6. Close the Finishing Transport front door.
7. Ensure that the paper jam indication is cleared from the Finishing Transport status
display.
24-34
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
8. Follow the instructions on the UI to restart your print job.
Stapler faults
Follow the procedures provided when the output is not stapled or the staples are bent.
Contact our Customer Support Center if the problem persists after you have tried the
following solutions. Stapler faults on output may look similar to the ones shown in the
following illustration.
1.
No staple
2.
Bent staple
3.
One side of staple rising up
4.
Staple bent in reverse direction
5.
Flattened staple
6.
Entire staple rising up
7.
Staple rising up with the center pressed in
If the output is stapled as shown in the figure above, contact our Customer Support
Center.
Note
Depending on the type of paper that is being stapled, the stapled nails may be bent. If
the bent nails are stuck inside the machine, they may eventually cause paper jams.
Remove the bent staple when opening the staple cartridge cover. If you do not remove
the bent staple, a staple jam may occur as a result. Use the staple cartridge cover only
when removing the bent staple.
Staple jams in the standard staple cartridge
Perform the following procedure to clear staple jams in the standard staple cartridge.
Note
Always check inside the finisher for any individual staples or staple remnants.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-35
Standard Finisher Plus
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Grasp the Staple Cartridge handle located at R1, and pull out the staple cartridge
from the finisher.
4. Check the inside of the finisher for any remaining staples, and if necessary, remove
them.
5. Open the staple cartridge unit as shown and remove the jammed staple.
Warning
To avoid injury to your fingers, carefully remove the jammed staples from the
cartridge.
24-36
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
6. Reinstall the cartridge unit to its original position in the finisher.
7. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note
A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open
even slightly.
Standard Finisher Plus fault codes
Finisher Module fault codes
If an error code appears that is not listed in the table below, or if an error persists after
following the listed solution, then contact your Xerox Customer Support Center.
013-108
Cause: The transport in sensor in the Finishing Transport did not switch ON within a
specified amount of time.
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
013-109
Cause: The transport exit sensor in the Finishing Transport did not switch ON within
a specified amount of time.
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-37
Standard Finisher Plus
013-110
Cause: The transport exit sensor in the Finishing Transport did not switch OFF within
a specified amount of time.
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
013-910
Cause: Paper jam at the transport in sensor (Finishing Transport)
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
013-911
Cause: Paper jam at the transport exit sensor (Finishing Transport)
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Finishing Transport fault codes
If an error code appears that is not listed in the table below, or if an error persists after
following the listed solution, then contact your Xerox Customer Support Center.
051-100
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
24-38
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
051-101
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-102
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-103
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-104
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-105
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-39
Standard Finisher Plus
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-106
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-107
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-108
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-109
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-110
Cause: Paper jam
24-40
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-111
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-210
Cause: Registration clutch solenoid fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-211
Cause: Diverter solenoid fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-300
Cause: Finishing Transport front door is open
Remedy: Close the front door of the Finishing Transport.
051-310
Cause: Finishing Transport firmware fault upgrade
Remedy: Perform the following:
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-41
Standard Finisher Plus
051-900
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing
Transport paper paths and clear them.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Third-party DFA fault codes
The following table provides a list of fault codes that indicate that a jam or fault has
occurred in the attached third-party, Document Finishing Architecture (DFA) device.
If an error code appears that is not listed in the table below, or if an error persists after
following the listed solution, then contact your Xerox Customer Support Center.
051-910
Cause: Either the DFA device is not ready or other fault has occurred with it
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Refer to any user documentation that came with your DFA device and follow the
instructions to bring the device back online.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-911
Cause: Either the DFA device is not ready or other fault has occurred with it
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Refer to any user documentation that came with your DFA device and follow the
instructions to bring the device back online.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-912
Cause: The DFA device is either full or out of supplies
Remedy: Refer to any user documentation that came with your DFA device and follow
the instructions to clear the fault and/or replenish the depleted supplies.
051-913
Cause: Paper jam in the DFA device
Remedy: Perform the following:
24-42
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
• Refer to any user documentation that came with your DFA device and follow the
instructions to clear the fault.
• If necessary, set the correct profile value; refer to the System Administration Guide,
Profiles chapter for more information.
• If necessary, refer to the DFA user documentation for setting/changing profile values.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-914
Cause: Paper jam in the DFA device
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Refer to any user documentation that came with your DFA device and follow the
instructions to clear the fault.
• If necessary, set the correct profile value; refer to the System Administration Guide,
Profiles chapter for more information.
• If necessary, refer to the DFA user documentation for setting/changing profile values.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-915
Cause: Paper jam in the DFA device
Remedy: Perform the following:
• Refer to any user documentation that came with your DFA device and follow the
instructions to clear the fault.
• If necessary, set the correct profile value; refer to the System Administration Guide,
Profiles chapter for more information.
• If necessary, refer to the DFA user documentation for setting/changing profile values.
• If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job.
• If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-43
Standard Finisher Plus
Specifications
This section provides specifications on the Standard Finisher Plus.
Finisher Module specifications
Item
Tray Type
Supported Paper Size
Specification
• Top Tray: Collated/Uncollated
• Stacker (middle) Tray: Collated/Uncollated (Offset available)
Top Tray:
• Maximum: SRA3, 13 x19 in., 12.6 x19.2 in., 330 x 488 mm (custom
size)
• Minimum: 100 x 148 mm (SEF), 4 x 6 in. (SEF), A6 (SEF) postcards
Stacker (middle) Tray:
• Maximum: 13 x 19 in. (330 x 488 mm), SRA3
• Minimum: B5, Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Booklet Tray (optional Booklet Maker Finisher only):
• Maximum: 13 x 18 in., SRA3
• Minimum: A4 (SEF), 8.5 x 11 in. (SEF)
Optional C/Z Folder tray: Supports A4 (SEF) and 8.5 x 11 in. (SEF)
Delivery to a supported third-party, DFA device:
• Maximum: 13 x 19 in., SRA3
• Minimum: B5, Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Supported Paper Weight Trays:
• Top Tray: 55-350 gsm
• Stacker (middle) Tray: 55-300 gsm
• Booklet Tray (optional Booklet Maker Finisher only):
-
Center binding 64-300 gsm
Center folding 60-105 gsm
• Optional C/Z Folder tray: 64-90 gsm
Delivery to a supported third-party, DFA device: 55-350 gsm
24-44
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Item
Tray Capacity
Specification
•
•
•
•
Top Tray: 500 sheets
Stacker (middle)Tray: 2,000 sheets, 200 sets*
Booklet Tray (optional Booklet Maker Finisher only): 20 sets**
Optional C/Z Folder tray: Minimum 30 sheets
*When using A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 8.5 x 11 in. LEF, 8 x 10 in. LEF, 7.5 x 10.5
in. LEF only. When using paper of other sizes, tray capacity is 1,500
sheets and 100 sets.
**Tray may not support some paper types.
Stapling (variable length) Maximum staple sheets: 100 sheets
• When using paper of size larger than A4 or 8.5 x 11 in., the
maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is 65.
• Staple nails may bend when using certain paper types.
Paper size:
• Maximum: A3/11 x 17 in.
• Minimum: B5, Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Staple position:
• 1 location: (front: angled stapling, center: parallel stapling, back:
parallel stapling*)
• 2 locations: (parallel stapling)
• 4 locations: A4 (LEF) and 8.5 x 11 in. (LEF) parallel stapling
*: Angled stapling for A3 and A4
Hole Punching
Supported paper size:
• Maximum: A3/11 x 17 in.
• Minimum: B5 LEF (2 holes), A4 LEF (4 holes)
Number of holes: 2, 4, 3 (optional)
Paper type: 55-220 gsm
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-45
Standard Finisher Plus
Item
Booklet Creation/Single
Fold
Specification
Maximum number of sheets:
• Fold and Staple: 25 sheets
• Fold only: 5 sheets
When using Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm paper, only 14 sheets can be stapled
if adding a cover.
Paper size:
• Maximum: A3, 13 x 18 in.
• Minimum: A4 SEF, 8.5 x 11 in. SEF
Note
When using light-weight stocks, media jams may occur with Booklet
Creation, Single Fold, and stapling for output that is 25 sheets or
more. If media jams do occur, it is recommended that a different
media type is selected for the job.
Paper type: Fold only or Fold and Staple: 55-350gsm uncoated, 106300gsm coated
Paper Weights/Booklet Capacity:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Folding
Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process
Inserter; also called
Interposer)
64-80 gsm, Uncoated: 25 sheets
81-90 gsm, Uncoated: 20 sheets
91-105 gsm, Uncoated: 10 sheets
106-128 gsm, Uncoated: 10 sheets, Coated: 10 sheets
129-150 gsm, Uncoated: 10 sheets, Coated: 10 sheets
151-176 gsm, Uncoated: 10 sheets, Coated: 10 sheets
177-220 gsm, Uncoated: 5 sheets, Coated: 5 sheets
221-256gsm, 4 sheets max. coated or uncoated
257-350gsm, 3 sheets max, coated or uncoated
Note
Non-stapled fold sets are limited to 5 sheets of paper.
Paper size:
• Maximum: A3/11 x 17 in.
• Minimum: B5, Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
The machine does not print on paper loaded in Tray 8/T1.
Capacity: 200 sheets when using Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm paper.
Paper type: 64-220 gsm
24-46
User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Optional C/Z Folder
Item
Z-Fold Half Sheet
Specification
• Z-paper size: 11 x 17 in./A3, 10 x 14 in./B4, 8K
• Capacity:
-
Maximum: 80 sheets (A3/11 x 17 in. Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm paper
Z folding)
20 sheets for 8K and 10 x 14 in./B4
• Paper type: 16-24 lb./64-90 gsm
• Output tray: Stacker (middle) tray
C-Fold
Z-Fold
• Paper size: A4/8.5 x 11 in.
• Number of sheets to be folded: 1 sheet
• Capacity: Minimum 30 sheets (When using Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm
paper.)
• Paper type: 16-24 lb./64-90 gsm
• Output tray: C/Z Folder tray
Finishing Transport specifications
Item
Specification
Paper size
7.16 x 19.2 in./182 x 488 mm, Process direction. Center Registered:
7.16 x 13 in./;182 x 330.2 mm, Process direction
Paper weight
52-350 gsm
Transparencies/coated
paper
Transparencies/Coated Paper Stock can be used
Speed
50 to 155 prints per minute (ppm)
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
24-47
Standard Finisher Plus
24-48
User Guide
Index
1-Sided print jobs
loading pre-drilled stock in the OHCF (Trays
6/7) 18-6
2-Sided print jobs
loading pre-drilled stock in the OHCF (Trays
6/7) 18-7
2Sided
book copy 5-5, 5-25
B
Basic copying 4-4
Billing Information 13-4
billing meters/usage counters 13-4
Usage Counters
User Account Billing Information 13-5
billing meters/usage counters 13-4
Build job 4-24
C
Checking the status of CRUs 14-9
Cleaning the document cover and glass 14-2
Cleaning the machine 14-1
cleaning the document feeder rollers 14-5
cleaning the exterior 14-2
Copy 4-1
Copy tab 4-4
Copying
basic 4-4
Current Faults 13-3
Current Messages 13-3
Current System Software 13-2
Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs)
D
D 16-7
Document feeder 1-3
basic copying using the document feeder
Document Finishing Architecture (DFA)
Selecting DFA copy options 4-3
Document glass
basic copying using the document glass
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
E
E-mail Print 11-4
Energy Saver 1exit energy saver mode 1-7
Low power mode
Sleep mode 1-6
Enlarging 4-4
Error codes, See Fault codes
F
Fault codes 17-10
Interface Module fault codes 19-9
OHCF fault codes
SquareFold Trimmer Module 23-16
Fault History 13-3
Faults 13-3
Current Faults 13-3
Current Messages
Fault History
Current Messages 13-3
Fault History 13-3
Feeding devices 1-7
Finishing devices 1-7
Folding 4-20
Form overlay 4-24
Forwarding protocol 5-11
G
GBC AdvancedPunch 1-10
H
Help 2-1
on the customer documentation CD/DVD
2-1
on the Print server customer
documentation CD/DVD 2-1
on the World Wide Web 2-1
High Capacity Feeder (HCF)
Problem solving 15-1, 17-3
High Capacity Stacker (HCS) 1-12
components 20-2
control panel 20-3
i
Index
fault codes 20-10
hints and tips 20-9
overview 20-1
paper jams
E1, E2, and E3 20-5
E4, E5, and E6 20-6
E7 20-7
E8 20-8
power, loss of 20-10
problem solving 20-5
specifications 20-25
stop button 20-3
top tray
stop button 20-3
unloading
stacker tray 20-4
I
Interface Module 1-9, 19-1
See also Interface Cooling Module
clearing jams 19-5
control panel 19-3
fault codes 19-9
manual decurler buttons on the Interface
Module 19-4
paper curl settings on the Interface Module
19-4
paper curl settings on the Module
paper jams at lever 1a 19-5
paper jams at lever 2a 19-6
paper jams at lever 2b 19-8
paper path 19-4
preset decurler settings on the Interface
Module
problem solving
See also Interface Cooling Module
Machine serial number
Current System Software
Machine Configuration
Software Version
Paper Tray Status
Print Reports
Overwrite Hard
Disk
Overwrite Hard Disk 13-2
Paper Tray Status 13-1
Print Reports 13-2
Software Version 13-2
Machine serial number
Machine Status 13-1
Billing Information 13-4
Faults 13-3
Machine Information
Supplies
Tools tab 13-6
Stored Programming
Maintenance 14-1
replacing consumable supplies
Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs)
Making
2sided copies 4-5
clear copies of newspapers (see "Auto
Exposure") 4-7
Media
loading media in the optional OHCF 18-4
loading media in Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 3-1
Message Contents 5-6
Mixed size originals 4-9, 4-10, 4-10, 5-5, 5-24
N
Newspapers
making clear copies 4-7
J
O
Jam clearance, See Paper jams
Job Status 12-1
Charge Print 12-4
overview 12-1
Optional feeding devices 1-7
Optional finishing devices 1-7
Original size 4-9, 4-10, 4-10, 5-5, 5-5, 5-24, 5-25
Oversized High Capacity Feeder
OHCF problem solving 18-9
OHCF specifications 18-22
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF) 18-1,
18Overwrite Hard Disk 13-2
M
Machine Configuration 13-2
Machine Information
Current System Software 13-2
Machine Configuration 13-2
ii
User Guide
Index
P
Paper
curl
settings on Interface Module 19-4
settings on the Interface Module
settings on the Interface Module 19-4
loading paper in the OHCF (Trays 6/7) 18-4
loading paper in Trays 1 and 2 3-2
loading paper in Trays 3 and 4 3-3
trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 3-1
Paper jams 15-1
at OHCF lever 1a and knob 1c
at OHCF lever 1b and knob 1c
at OHCF lever 1d and knob 1c
Bypass (Tray 5) 15-7
Document feeder jams 15-2
Document jams under the document
feeder belt 15-4
Duplex module 3 15-11
Duplex module3
Envelope jams in the Bypass tray 15-8
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
E1, E2, and E3 20-5
E4, E5, and E6 20-6
E7 20-7
E8 20-8
inside the OHCF trays (A1-1 and A1-2)
Interface Module
lever 1a 19-5
lever 2a 19-6
lever 2b 19-8
Lower left cover jams 15-6
Main unit jams 15-13
OHCF
inside trays A1-1 and A1-2 18-10
lever 1a and knob 1c 18-10
lever 1b and knob 1c 18-11
lever 1d and knob 1c 18-12
SquareFold Trimmer Module 23-12
E1/E2 23-13
E3 23-15
Standard Finisher Plus
area 1 24-30
area 2 24-32
area 3 24-33
area 4
area4 24-34
areas 4b and 4c 24-28
at 2c, 2e, 2f, and 2d 24-25
at 2d and lever 2g 24-26
finisher stacker tray 22-28, 24-30
finisher top tray 22-27, 24-29
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
lever 1a and knob 1c 24-14
lever 1b 22-17, 24-16
lever 1d 22-16, 24-15
lever 2a and knob 3a 24-22
lever 2b and knob 2c 24-24
lever 3b and 3d 24-17
lever 3e and knob 3c 24-19
lever 3g and knob 3f 24-20
lever 4b and knob 3a 24-21
Tray 8 (Post-Process Inserter) 22-14,
24-13
Transport unit 4 15-10
Transport unit4
Trays 1-4 15-9
Paper Tray Attributes 13-6
Paper Tray Status 13-1
Perfect Binder 1-11 21-1
adjusting the printed image and trim 21-28
binder components 21-3
book binding path 21-9
bypass path 21-9
circuit breaker 21-8
cleaning the binder 21-20
control panel 21-7
cover inserter 21-5
cover inserter path 21-11
empty trimmer waste tray 21-20
external components 21-3
fault codes 21-28
general problems 21-27
internal components 21-6
loading media in the cover inserter tray
21-13
maintenance 21-20
paper jams
area E1 and area E2 21-22
area E3 21-24
area E4 21-25
area E5 and area E6 21-25
power 21-12
power interruption during operation 21-27
power saver mode 21-12
problem solving 21-22
removing books from the binder 21-14
replenishing the adhesive filling tray 21-21
specifications 21-32
standard path 21-10
Postcard bracket 18-2
using the Postcard bracket 18-2
Power Saver, See Energy Saver
Pre-drilled stock
loading in the OHCF (Trays 6/7) 18-6, 18-7
loading in Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 3-4
Print Reports 13-2
iii
Index
Print server
overview 1-7
Printed output problems
paper curl settings on the Interface Module
19-4
printing 11-1
Problem solving
High Capacity Stacker (HCS) 20-5
Interface Module problem solving
OHCF problem solving 18-9
SquareFold Trimmer Module 23-12
Standard Finisher Plus 24-13
R
Reducing 4-4
Replacing consumable supplies
S
Sample set 4-24
Scan size
non-standard size document 5-5, 5-25
scanning 11-5
Secure Print Jobs & More tab
Charge Print 12-4
Sending E-mails 11-4
Skew adjustment levers
for trays 1 and 2
for trays A1-1 and A1-2 (OHCF) 18-8
for trays A1-1 and A1-2 (OHCF)
Software Version 13-2
Specifications 16-1
SquareFold Trimmer Module 23-1
components 23-2
control panel 23-4
fault codes 23-16
fold options 23-5
hints and tips 23-11
full-page images, printing 23-11
indicator lights 23-4
overview 23-1
paper jams 23-12
E1/E2 23-13
E3 23-15
paper path 23-3
problem solving 23-12
square fold feature 23-4
fold options 23-5
fold options, accessing 23-5
trimmer feature 23-7
finished booklet size 23-9
trimmer options 23-7
iv
trimming guidelines 23-9
trimmer options 23-7
Standard Finisher 1-12
Standard Finisher Plus 1-14, 24-1
fault codes
Finisher Module 24-37
Finishing Transport 24-38
third-party DFA 24-42
Finisher Module
components 24-2
fault codes 24-37
fold types 22-4, 24-4
specifications 24-44
optional C/Z folder 24-47
Finishing Transport 24-47
components 24-6
fault codes 24-38
specifications 24-47
status indicators 24-7
fold types 22-4, 24-4
maintenance
punch waste container, emptying
22-12, 24-12
standard staple cartridge, replacing
22-7, 24-8
standard staple waste container,
replacing 22-10, 24-10
overview 24-1
paper jams
area 1 24-30
area 2 24-32
area 3 24-33
area 4 24-34
areas 4b and 4c 24-28
at 2c, 2e, 2f, and 2d 24-25
at 2d and lever 2g 24-26
finisher stacker tray 22-28, 24-30
finisher top tray 22-27, 24-29
lever 1a and knob 1c 24-14
lever 1b 22-17, 24-16
lever 1d 22-16, 24-15
lever 2a and knob 3a 24-22
lever 2b and knob 2c 24-24
lever 3b and 3d 24-17
lever 3e and knob 3c 24-19
lever 3g and knob 3f 24-20
lever 4b and knob 3a 24-21
Tray 8 (Post-Process Inserter) 22-14,
24-13
problem solving 24-13
punch waste container, emptying 22-12,
24-12
User Guide
Index
specifications 24-44, 24-47
Finisher Module 24-44
optional C/Z folder 24-47
Finishing Transport
standard staple cartridge, replacing 22-7,
24-8
standard staple waste container, replacing
22-10, 24-10
staple jams
in standard staple cartridge 24-35
stapler faults 22-30, 24-35
third-party DFA
fault codes 24-42
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher 22-1
components 22-1
Stored Programming
Stored programs
deleting 8-3
naming / renaming 8-3
registering and changing the names 8-3
Subject 5-6, 5-6
Supplies
T
Tab stock
loading in the OHCF (Trays 6/7) 18-4
loading in Trays 3 and 4 3-4
Third-party finishing devices 1-14
Selecting DFA copy options 4-3
Tools
Paper Tray Attributes 13-6
Tools tab 13-6
Transparencies
loading in the OHCF (Trays 6/7) 18-5
loading in Trays 1-4 3-5
Xerox® D95/D110/D125/D136 Copier/Printer
User Guide
Trays
loading media in the OHCF 18-4
loading media in Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 3-1
loading paper in the OHCF (Trays 6/7) 18-4
loading paper in Trays 1 and 2 3-2
loading paper in Trays 3 and 4 3-3
loading pre-drilled stock in the OHCF (Trays
6/7) 18-6, 18-7
loading pre-drilled stock in Trays 1, 2, 3,
and 4 3-4
loading tab stock in the OHCF (Trays 6/7)
18-4
loading tab stock in Trays 3 and 4 3-4
loading transparencies in the OHCF (Trays
6/7) 18-5
loading transparencies in Trays 1-4 3-5
with 1-Sided print jobs and the optional
OHCF 18-6
loading pre-drilled stock in the OHCF
(Trays 6/7)
with 2-Sided print jobs and the optional
OHCF 18-7
loading pre-drilled stock in the OHCF
(Trays 6/7)
Trays 6/7, See Oversized High Capacity Feeder
(OHCF)
U
Usage Counters
User Account Billing Information 13-5
W
World Wide Web help
www.xerox.com 2-1
v
Index
vi
User Guide